DESCENT
™
MK3 SERIES
Owner’s Manual
© 2023 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries
All rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, in whole or in part, without the written consent of Garmin. Garmin reserves the right to change
or improve its products and to make changes in the content of this manual without obligation to notify any person or organization of such changes or improvements. Go to
www.garmin.com for current updates and supplemental information concerning the use of this product.
Garmin
®
, the Garmin logo, ANT
®
, ANT+
®
, Approach
®
, Auto Lap
®
, Auto Pause
®
, Edge
®
, inReach
®
, Move IQ
®
, QuickFit
®
, TracBack
®
, VIRB
®
, Virtual Partner
®
, and Xero
®
are trademarks
of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries, registered in the USA and other countries. Descent
™
, Body Battery
™
, Connect IQ
™
, DiveView
™
, Firstbeat Analytics
™
, Garmin AutoShot
™
, Garmin
Connect
™
, Garmin Dive
™
, Garmin Explore
™
, Garmin Express
™
, Garmin GameOn
™
, Garmin Golf
™
, Garmin Messenger
™
, Garmin Pay
™
, Health Snapshot
™
, HRM-Dual
™
, HRM-Fit
™
,
HRM-Pro
™
, HRM-Run
™
, HRM-Swim
™
, HRM-Tri
™
, Index
™
, NextFork
™
, PacePro
™
, Rally
™
, SatIQ
™
, SubWave
™
, tempe
™
, Varia
™
, and Vector
™
are trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its
subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
Android
™
is a trademark of Google LLC. Applied Ballistics
®
is a registered trademark of Applied Ballistics, LLC. Apple
®
, iPhone
®
, iTunes
®
, and Mac
®
are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries. The BLUETOOTH
®
word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Garmin is under license. The
Cooper Institute
®
, as well as any related trademarks, are the property of The Cooper Institute. Di2
™
is a trademark of Shimano, Inc. Shimano
®
is a registered trademark of Shimano,
Inc. iOS
®
is a registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc. used under license by Apple Inc. Iridium
®
is a registered trademark of Iridium Satellite LLC. Overwolf
™
is a trademark of
Overwolf Ltd. STRAVA and Strava
™
are trademarks of Strava, Inc. Training Stress Score
™
(TSS), Intensity Factor
™
(IF), and Normalized Power
™
(NP) are trademarks of Peaksware,
LLC. USB-C
®
is a registered trademark of USB Implementers Forum. Wi‑Fi
®
is a registered mark of Wi-Fi Alliance Corporation. Windows
®
is a registered trademark of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and other countries. Zwift
™
is a trademark of Zwift, Inc. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
This product is ANT+
®
certified. Visit www.thisisant.com/directory for a list of compatible products and apps.
Table of Contents
Introduction......................................1
Getting Started........................................ 1
Device Overview...................................... 1
Enabling and Disabling the
Touchscreen........................................ 2
Using the Watch...................................... 2
Clearing User Data with the Kill Switch
Feature................................................. 2
Diving............................................... 3
Dive Warnings..........................................3
Dive Cautions...........................................4
Dive Modes.............................................. 4
Using the Pool Dive Mode................... 4
Dive Setup................................................ 5
Dive Mode Advanced Settings............5
Setting Up Your Breathing Gases....... 6
Custom Dive Alerts..............................6
Setting a Custom Dive Alert............ 8
Setting a Pool Apnea Alert.............. 8
Setting PO2 Thresholds...................... 9
Setting CCR Setpoints......................... 9
No-Fly Time........................................10
Air Integration........................................ 10
Waking the Transceiver from Low
Power Mode.......................................10
Pairing a Transceiver with a Descent
Dive Computer................................... 11
Dive Network and Air Integration
Settings.............................................. 11
Transceiver Settings..................... 12
Selecting the Gas Consumption
Rate Metric..................................... 12
Selecting Transceivers to View
During a Dive.................................. 13
Sending Diver Messages.................. 13
Receiving Diver Messages............ 13
Requesting Diver Assistance............ 14
Updating the Transceiver Software
Using Your Dive Computer................14
Descent S1 Buoy................................... 14
Navigating to the Buoy...................... 15
Dive Data Screens................................. 16
Single-Gas and Multi-Gas Data
Screens.............................................. 16
CCR Data Screens............................. 17
Gauge Data Screens..........................18
Apnea and Apnea Hunt Data
Screens.............................................. 18
Pool Apnea Data Screens................. 19
Customizing the Dive Data
Screens.............................................. 19
Big Numbers Mode........................... 20
Going Diving.......................................... 21
Navigating with the Dive Compass.. 22
Using the Gauge Dive Stopwatch..... 22
Using the Basic Dive Stopwatch.......22
Viewing Transceiver Data During a
Dive.....................................................23
Switching Gases During a Dive.........24
Switching Between CC and OC Diving
for a Bailout Procedure..................... 24
Performing a Safety Stop..................25
Performing a Decompression Stop..26
Diving with the Map...........................26
Starting a Pool Apnea Activity.............. 27
Creating a Custom Pool Apnea
Workout..............................................27
Editing a Pool Apnea Workout...... 28
Pool Apnea Dive Setup......................28
Viewing the Surface Interval Glance.... 29
Viewing the Dive Log Glance................ 30
Dive Readiness...................................... 31
Dive Planning......................................... 31
Finding Nearby Dive Sites................. 32
Calculating NDL Time....................... 32
Calculating Your Breathing Gas....... 33
Creating a Decompression Plan....... 33
Using Decompression Plans............ 33
Altitude Diving....................................... 33
Tips for Wearing the Watch with an
Exposure Suit........................................ 34
Dive Alerts..............................................35
Transceiver Alerts................................. 37
Buoy Alerts............................................ 37
Enabling Lost Dive Accessory Alerts... 38
Dive Product and Feature
Compatibility......................................... 38
About SubWave Technology................ 39
Dive Terminology.................................. 39
Clocks............................................ 39
Table of Contents i
Setting an Alarm....................................39
Editing an Alarm................................ 40
Starting the Countdown Timer............. 40
Deleting a Timer................................ 40
Using the Stopwatch............................. 41
Adding Alternate Time Zones.............. 41
Editing an Alternate Time Zone........ 42
Activities and Apps.........................42
Starting an Activity................................ 42
Tips for Recording Activities............ 42
Stopping an Activity.............................. 43
Evaluating an Activity........................ 43
Running.................................................. 43
Going for a Track Run....................... 43
Tips for Recording a Track Run.... 44
Going for a Virtual Run...................... 44
Calibrating the Treadmill Distance... 44
Recording an Ultra Run Activity........ 44
Ultra Run Auto Rest Settings........ 45
Recording an Obstacle Racing
Activity............................................... 45
Swimming.............................................. 45
Swim Terminology............................ 45
Stroke Types...................................... 46
Tips for Swimming Activities............46
Swim Auto Rest and Manual Rest.... 46
Training with the Drill Log................. 47
Multisport.............................................. 47
Triathlon Training.............................. 47
Creating a Multisport Activity........... 47
Indoor Activities.................................... 48
Health Snapshot™............................. 48
Recording a Strength Training
Activity............................................... 48
Recording a HIIT Activity.................. 49
Using an Indoor Trainer.................... 49
Gaming............................................... 50
Using the Garmin GameOn™
App................................................. 50
Recording a Manual Gaming
Activity............................................50
Climbing Sports..................................... 51
Recording an Indoor Climbing
Activity............................................... 51
Recording a Bouldering Activity....... 52
Starting an Expedition...........................52
Recording a Track Point Manually... 52
Viewing Track Points........................ 52
Going Hunting....................................... 53
Marine Activities................................... 53
Sailing.................................................53
Tack Assist.................................... 53
Calibrating the Tack Assist....... 54
Entering a Fixed Tack Angle......54
Entering a True Wind
Direction..................................... 54
Tips for Getting the Best Lift
Estimate..................................... 54
Sail Racing..................................... 54
Setting the Starting Line............ 55
Starting a Race...........................55
Water Sports...................................... 56
Viewing Your Water Sport Runs....56
Fishing................................................56
Going Fishing................................. 56
Tides...................................................56
Viewing Tide Information.............. 56
Setting a Tide Alert.................... 57
Anchor................................................ 57
Marking Your Anchor Location..... 57
Anchor Settings............................. 58
Trolling Motor Remote...................... 58
Pairing Your Watch and Trolling
Motor.............................................. 58
Skiing and Winter Sports...................... 58
Viewing Your Ski Runs...................... 58
Recording a Backcountry Skiing or
Snowboarding Activity...................... 59
Cross-Country Skiing Power Data.... 59
Golfing................................................... 60
Playing Golf........................................60
Golf Menu.......................................... 62
Moving the Flag................................. 62
Virtual Caddie.................................... 63
PlaysLike Distance Icons.................. 63
PlaysLike Distance Factors...........63
PlaysLike Settings......................... 64
Measuring Distance with Touch
Targeting............................................ 64
Viewing Measured Shots.................. 64
Manually Measuring a Shot.......... 64
Keeping Score................................... 64
Recording Statistics...................... 65
ii Table of Contents
Scoring Settings............................ 65
About Stableford Scoring..............65
Viewing the Wind Speed and
Direction............................................. 65
Viewing the Direction to the Pin....... 66
Saving Custom Targets.................... 66
Big Numbers Mode........................... 66
Swing Tempo Training...................... 67
The Ideal Swing Tempo................ 67
Analyzing Your Swing Tempo....... 68
Viewing the Tip Sequence......... 68
Jumpmaster.......................................... 68
Planning a Jump............................... 68
Jump Types....................................... 68
Entering Jump Information...............69
Entering Wind Information for HAHO
and HALO Jumps.............................. 69
Resetting Wind Information.......... 69
Entering Wind Information for a Static
Jump.................................................. 69
Constant Settings.............................. 70
Customizing Activities and Apps......... 70
Adding or Removing a Favorite
Activity............................................... 70
Changing the Order of an Activity in
the Apps List...................................... 70
Customizing the Data Screens......... 71
Adding a Map to an Activity.......... 71
Creating a Custom Activity............... 71
Activities and App Settings...............72
Activity Alerts................................. 74
Setting an Alert.......................... 75
Activity Map Settings.................... 76
Routing Settings............................ 76
Using ClimbPro.............................. 76
Enabling Auto Climb...................... 77
Satellite Settings............................77
Segments....................................... 77
Strava™ Segments..................... 78
Viewing Segment Details.......... 78
Racing a Segment......................78
Applied Ballistics®......................... 79
Applied Ballistics Quantum App...........79
Applied Ballistics Options.....................79
Quickly Editing Shooting
Conditions..........................................80
Environment.......................................80
Editing the Environment................ 80
Enabling Auto Update....................80
Range Card........................................ 80
Customizing the Range Card
Fields.............................................. 80
Editing the Range Increment........ 80
Setting the Base Range................. 81
Targets............................................... 81
Changing the Target...................... 81
Editing the Target.......................... 81
Profile................................................. 81
Selecting a Different Profile.......... 81
Adding a Profile............................. 81
Deleting a Profile........................... 81
Customizing the Profile Data
Screen............................................ 82
Editing Bullet Properties................82
Editing Gun Properties.................. 82
Calibrating the Muzzle Velocity.... 82
Calibrating the Drop Scale
Factor............................................. 82
Viewing the Drop Scale Factor
Table...............................................83
Editing the Muzzle Velocity and
Temperature Table........................ 83
Clearing the Muzzle Velocity and
Temperature Table........................ 83
Applied Ballistics Glossary of Terms... 84
Training..........................................86
Unified Training Status......................... 86
Syncing Activities and Performance
Measurements.................................. 87
Training for a Race Event..................... 87
Race Calendar and Primary Race..... 87
Workouts............................................... 87
Starting a Workout............................ 88
Workout Execution Score..............88
Following a Workout From Garmin
Connect.............................................. 88
Following a Daily Suggested
Workout..............................................89
Starting an Interval Workout............. 89
Customizing an Interval
Workout.......................................... 89
Recording a Critical Swim Speed
Test.................................................... 90
Table of Contents iii
Using Virtual Partner®...................... 90
Setting a Training Target.............. 90
Racing a Previous Activity............ 91
About the Training Calendar............. 91
Using Garmin Connect Training
Plans...............................................91
Adaptive Training Plans............ 91
PacePro Training...................................91
Downloading a PacePro Plan from
Garmin Connect.................................92
Creating a PacePro Plan on Your
Watch................................................. 92
Starting a PacePro Plan.................... 93
Power Guide.......................................... 94
Creating and Using a Power Guide.. 94
History........................................... 94
Using History......................................... 95
Multisport History..............................95
Personal Records.................................. 95
Viewing Your Personal Records....... 95
Restoring a Personal Record............ 95
Clearing Personal Records............... 96
Viewing Data Totals.............................. 96
Using the Odometer.............................. 96
Deleting History..................................... 96
Appearance.................................... 96
Watch Face Settings............................. 96
Default Watch Face........................... 97
Customizing the Watch Face............97
Glances.................................................. 98
Viewing the Glance Loop................ 102
Customizing the Glance Loop........ 102
Creating Glance Folders..............102
Body Battery.................................... 103
Tips for Improved Body Battery
Data.............................................. 103
Performance Measurements......... 103
About VO2 Max. Estimates.........104
Getting Your VO2 Max. Estimate
for Running...............................104
Getting Your VO2 Max. Estimate
for Cycling................................ 105
Viewing Your Predicted Race
Times........................................... 105
Heart Rate Variability Status.......106
Heart Rate Variability and Stress
Level......................................... 106
Performance Condition............... 107
Viewing Your Performance
Condition.................................. 107
Getting Your FTP Estimate......... 108
Lactate Threshold....................... 108
Viewing Your Real-Time
Stamina........................................ 109
Viewing Your Power Curve......... 109
Training Status................................ 110
Training Status Levels.................111
Tips for Getting Your Training
Status....................................... 111
Acute Load................................... 111
Training Load Focus................ 112
Load Ratio................................ 112
About Training Effect.............. 113
Recovery Time............................. 113
Recovery Heart Rate................ 114
Heat and Altitude Performance
Acclimation.................................. 114
Pausing and Resuming Your
Training Status............................ 114
Training Readiness......................... 115
Endurance Score............................. 115
Hill Score..........................................116
Viewing Cycling Ability.................... 116
Adding a Stock................................ 116
Adding Weather Locations............. 117
Using the Jet Lag Adviser............... 117
Planning a Trip in the Garmin
Connect App................................ 117
Controls............................................... 117
Customizing the Controls Menu.... 120
Using the LED Flashlight................. 121
Editing the Custom Flashlight
Strobe........................................... 121
Using the Flashlight Screen............ 121
GarminPay...................................... 121
Setting Up Your GarminPay
Wallet........................................... 122
Paying for a Purchase Using Your
Watch........................................... 122
Adding a Card to Your GarminPay
Wallet........................................... 122
Managing Your GarminPay
Cards........................................ 122
iv Table of Contents
Changing Your GarminPay
Passcode..................................... 123
Morning Report................................... 123
Customizing Your Morning Report.123
Sensors and Accessories............. 123
Wrist Heart Rate.................................. 123
Wearing the Watch.......................... 124
Tips for Erratic Heart Rate Data..... 124
Wrist Heart Rate Monitor Settings. 125
Setting an Abnormal Heart Rate
Alert.............................................. 125
Broadcasting Heart Rate Data.... 125
Pulse Oximeter.................................... 126
Getting Pulse Oximeter Readings.. 127
Setting the Pulse Oximeter Mode.. 127
Tips for Erratic Pulse Oximeter
Data.................................................. 127
Compass............................................. 127
Setting the Compass Heading....... 127
Compass Settings........................... 128
Calibrating the Compass
Manually.......................................128
Setting the North Reference....... 128
Altimeter and Barometer.................... 128
Altimeter Settings........................... 129
Calibrating the Barometric
Altimeter...................................... 129
Barometer Settings......................... 129
Calibrating the Barometer...........129
Setting a Storm Alert................... 130
Wireless Sensors................................ 130
Pairing Your Wireless Sensors....... 132
Heart Rate Accessory Running Pace
and Distance.................................... 133
Tips for Recording Running Pace
and Distance................................ 133
Running Dynamics.......................... 133
Tips for Missing Running Dynamics
Data.............................................. 134
Running Power............................ 134
Running Power Settings.......... 135
Using the Varia Camera Controls... 135
inReach Remote.............................. 135
Using the inReach Remote..........135
VIRB Remote................................... 135
Controlling a VIRB Action
Camera......................................... 136
Controlling a VIRB Action Camera
During an Activity........................ 136
Xero Laser Location Settings......... 137
Map.............................................. 137
Viewing the Map................................. 137
Saving or Navigating to a Location on
the Map................................................ 138
Navigating with the Around Me
Feature................................................. 138
Map Settings....................................... 139
Managing Maps.............................. 139
Downloading Maps with Outdoor
Maps+.......................................... 140
Downloading TopoActive Maps. 140
Deleting Maps..............................140
Map Themes....................................141
Marine Map Settings....................... 141
Showing and Hiding Map Data...........141
Music........................................... 141
Connecting to a Third-Party Provider 142
Downloading Audio Content from a
Third-Party Provider........................ 142
Downloading Personal Audio
Content................................................ 142
Listening to Music.............................. 143
Music Playback Controls.................... 143
Connecting Bluetooth Headphones...143
Changing the Audio Mode.................. 143
Connectivity................................. 144
Phone Connectivity Features............. 144
Pairing Your Phone......................... 144
Enabling Bluetooth Notifications... 144
Viewing Notifications.................. 144
Receiving an Incoming Phone
Call................................................145
Replying to a Text Message....... 145
Managing Notifications.............. 145
Turning Off the Bluetooth Phone
Connection...................................... 145
Turning On and Off Phone Connection
Alerts................................................ 145
Turning On and Off Find My Phone
Alerts................................................ 146
Locating a Phone Lost During a GPS
Activity......................................... 146
Table of Contents v
Playing Audio Prompts During an
Activity............................................. 146
Wi‑Fi Connectivity Features................146
Connecting to a Wi‑Fi Network.......147
Phone Apps and Computer
Applications........................................ 147
Garmin Connect.............................. 147
Using the Garmin Connect App.. 148
Updating the Software Using the
Garmin Connect App............... 148
Using Garmin Connect on Your
Computer..................................... 148
Updating the Software Using
Garmin Express....................... 148
Manually Syncing Data with Garmin
Connect........................................ 148
Garmin Connect+ Subscription.. 149
Connect IQ Features....................... 149
Downloading Connect IQ
Features....................................... 149
Downloading Connect IQ Features
Using Your Computer.................. 149
Garmin Dive App..............................149
Garmin Explore™..............................150
Garmin Messenger App.................. 150
Using the Messenger Feature.....151
Garmin Golf App.............................. 151
Garmin Share.......................................151
Sharing Data with Garmin Share.... 152
Receiving Data with Garmin Share.152
Garmin Share Settings.................... 152
User Profile.................................. 152
Setting Up Your User Profile...............152
Gender Settings............................... 153
Viewing Your Fitness Age...................153
About Heart Rate Zones..................... 153
Fitness Goals................................... 153
Setting Your Heart Rate Zones....... 154
Letting the Watch Set Your Heart Rate
Zones............................................... 154
Heart Rate Zone Calculations........ 155
Setting Your Power Zones.................. 155
Detecting Performance Measurements
Automatically...................................... 155
Safety and Tracking Features....... 156
Adding Emergency Contacts..............156
Adding Contacts................................. 156
Turning Incident Detection On and
Off........................................................ 157
Requesting Assistance....................... 157
Starting a GroupTrack Session.......... 158
Tips for GroupTrack Sessions........ 158
GroupTrack Settings....................... 158
Health and Wellness Settings....... 159
Auto Goal............................................. 159
Using the Move Alert.......................... 159
Intensity Minutes.................................159
Earning Intensity Minutes............... 159
Sleep Tracking.....................................160
Using Automated Sleep Tracking...160
Breathing Variations....................... 160
Navigation.................................... 160
Viewing and Editing Your Saved
Locations............................................. 160
Saving a Dual Grid Location........... 160
Setting a Reference Point................... 161
Navigating to a Destination................ 161
Navigating to a Point of Interest.... 161
Navigating to the Starting Point of a
Saved Activity.................................. 162
Navigating to Your Starting Point
During an Activity............................ 162
Viewing Route Directions................163
Navigating with Sight 'N Go............ 163
Marking and Starting Navigation to a
Man Overboard Location................ 163
Sharing a Location From a Map Using
the Garmin Connect App.................... 163
Starting a GPS Activity From a Shared
Location........................................... 164
Navigating to a Shared Location
During an Activity............................ 164
Stopping Navigation........................... 164
Courses................................................164
Creating and Following a Course on
Your Device...................................... 165
Creating a Round-Trip Course........ 165
Creating a Course on Garmin
Connect............................................165
Sending a Course to Your
Device...........................................166
Viewing or Editing Course Details.. 166
vi Table of Contents
Projecting a Waypoint.........................166
Navigation Settings.............................166
Customizing Navigation Data
Screens............................................ 167
Setting Up a Heading Bug............... 167
Setting Navigation Alerts................ 167
Power Manager Settings.............. 167
Customizing the Battery Saver
Feature................................................. 168
Changing the Power Mode................. 168
Customizing Power Modes................ 168
Restoring a Power Mode.................... 168
System Settings........................... 169
Time Settings...................................... 169
Setting Time Alerts......................... 170
Syncing the Time.............................170
Changing the Screen Settings............ 170
Customizing Sleep Mode................... 171
Customizing the Hot Keys.................. 171
Changing the Units of Measure......... 171
Back Up and Restore Settings............171
Restoring Your Settings and Data from
Garmin Connect.............................. 171
Viewing Device Information............... 172
Viewing E-label Regulatory and
Compliance Information................. 172
Device Information....................... 172
About the AMOLED Display................ 172
Charging the Watch............................ 172
Specifications......................................173
Battery Information......................... 174
Device Care......................................... 175
Cleaning the Watch......................... 175
Changing the QuickFit® Bands.......... 176
Extra Long Diving Band.......................176
Metal Watch Band Adjustment.......... 176
Data Management.............................. 176
Deleting Files................................... 176
Troubleshooting........................... 177
Product Updates................................. 177
Getting More Information................... 177
My device is in the wrong language...177
Is my phone compatible with my
watch?................................................. 177
My phone will not connect to the
watch................................................... 177
Can I use my Bluetooth sensor with my
watch?................................................. 178
My headphones will not connect to the
watch................................................... 178
My music cuts out or my headphones
won't stay connected.......................... 178
Restarting Your Watch........................ 178
Resetting All Default Settings............ 179
Diving................................................... 179
Resetting Your Tissue Load........... 179
Resetting the Surface Pressure......179
Tips for Maximizing the Battery Life..180
How can I undo a lap button press?.. 180
Acquiring Satellite Signals..................180
Improving GPS Satellite Reception 180
The heart rate on my watch is not
accurate............................................... 180
The activity temperature reading is not
accurate............................................... 181
Exiting Demo Mode.............................181
Activity Tracking................................. 181
My step count does not seem
accurate........................................... 181
The step counts on my watch and my
Garmin Connect account don't
match............................................... 181
The floors climbed amount does not
seem accurate................................. 181
Appendix...................................... 182
Data Fields...........................................182
Color Gauges and Running Dynamics
Data......................................................198
Ground Contact Time Balance
Data.................................................. 198
Vertical Oscillation and Vertical Ratio
Data.................................................. 199
VO2 Max. Standard Ratings............... 199
FTP Ratings......................................... 200
Endurance Score Ratings................... 201
Wheel Size and Circumference.......... 202
Table of Contents vii
Introduction
WARNING
See the Important Safety and Product Information guide in the product box for product warnings and other
important information.
Always consult your physician before you begin or modify any exercise program.
Getting Started
When using your watch the first time, you should complete these tasks to set it up and get to know the basic
features.
1 Hold LIGHT to turn on the watch (Device Overview, page1).
2 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the initial setup.
During the initial setup, you can pair your phone with your watch to receive notifications, sync your activities,
and more (Pairing Your Phone, page144). If you are upgrading from a compatible watch, you can migrate
your watch settings, saved courses, and more when you pair your new Descent watch with your phone.
3 Charge the watch (Charging the Watch, page172).
4 Start an activity (Starting an Activity, page42).
Device Overview
Touchscreen
• Tap to choose an option in a menu.
• Hold the watch face data to open the glance or feature.
NOTE: This feature is not available on all watch faces.
• Swipe up or down to scroll through the glance loop and menus.
• Swipe right to return to the previous screen.
• Cover the screen with your palm to return to the watch face and turn down the screen brightness.
LIGHT
• Press to turn on the device.
• Press to illuminate the screen.
• Quickly press twice to turn on the flashlight.
• Hold to view the controls menu.
UP·MENU
• Press to scroll through the glance loop and menus.
• Hold to view the menu.
Introduction 1
DOWN
• Press to scroll through the glance loop and menus.
• Hold to view the music controls from any screen.
START·STOP
• Press to choose an option in a menu.
• Press to view the activity list and start or stop an activity.
BACK·LAP
• Press to return to the previous screen.
• Press to record a lap, rest, or transition during a multisport activity.
• Hold to view a list of your recently used apps from any screen.
Enabling and Disabling the Touchscreen
• Hold DOWN and START.
• Hold LIGHT, and select .
• Hold MENU, select System > Touch, and select an option.
Using the Watch
• Hold LIGHT to view the controls menu (Controls, page117).
The controls menu provides quick access to frequently used functions, such as turning on do not disturb
mode, saving a location, and turning the watch off.
• From the watch face, press UP or DOWN to scroll through the glance loop (Glances, page98).
• From the watch face, press START to start an activity or open an app (Activities and Apps, page42).
• Hold MENU to customize the watch face (Customizing the Watch Face, page97), adjust settings (System
Settings, page169), pair wireless sensors (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page132), and more.
Clearing User Data with the Kill Switch Feature
The Kill Switch feature quickly removes all saved user-entered data and resets all settings to the factory default
values.
1 Customize a button or button combination for the Kill Switch feature (Customizing the Hot Keys, page171).
2 Hold the button or button combination you customized to activate the Kill Switch feature.
TIP: You can press any button to cancel the Kill Switch feature during a 10-second countdown.
After 10 seconds, the watch deletes all user-entered data.
2 Introduction
Diving
Dive Warnings
WARNING
• The diving features of this device are for use by certified divers only. This device should not be used as a sole
dive computer. Failure to input the appropriate dive-related information into the device can lead to serious
personal injury or death.
• Do not exceed the maximum dive depth rating for the device (Specifications, page173).
• Make sure that you fully understand the use, displays, and limitations of your device. If you have questions
about this manual or the device, always resolve any discrepancies or confusion before diving with the device.
Always remember that you are responsible for your own safety.
• There is always a risk of decompression illness (DCI) for any dive profile even if you follow the dive plan
provided by the dive tables or a diving device. No procedure, diving device, or dive table will eliminate the
possibility of DCI or oxygen toxicity. An individual's physiological make up can vary from day to day. This
device cannot account for these variations. You are strongly advised to remain well within the limits provided
by this device to minimize the risk of DCI. You should consult a physician regarding your fitness before
diving.
• The dive computer can calculate your surface air consumption rate (SAC) and air time remaining (ATR).
These calculations are an estimate and should not be relied on as the only source of information.
• Always use backup instruments, including a depth gauge, submersible pressure gauge, and timer or watch.
You should have access to decompression tables when diving with this device.
• Perform pre-dive safety checks, such as checking proper device function and settings, display function,
battery level, tank pressure, and bubble checks to check hoses and connections for leaks.
• If a tank pressure warning or battery warning appears on the dive computer, terminate the dive immediately
and safely return to the surface. Disregarding the alarm may result in serious injury or death.
• This device should not be shared between multiple users for diving purposes. Diver profiles are user specific,
and using another diver's profile can result in misleading information that could lead to injury or death.
• For safety reasons, you should never dive alone. Dive with a designated buddy, even if you have someone
monitoring your dive from the surface. You should also stay with others for an extended time after a dive,
because the potential onset of decompression illness (DCI) may be delayed or triggered by surface activities.
• Apnea diving requires appropriate training. Pool apnea diving carries many of the same risks as apnea diving
in open water. Never dive alone.
• This device is not intended for commercial or professional dive activities. It is for recreational purposes only.
Commercial or professional dive activities can expose the user to extreme depths or conditions that increase
the risk of DCI.
• Do not dive with a gas if you have not personally verified its contents and input the analyzed value to
the device. Failure to verify tank contents and input the appropriate gas values to the device will result in
incorrect dive planning information and could result in serious injury or death.
• Diving with more than one gas mixture presents a much greater risk than diving with a single gas mixture.
Mistakes related to the use of multiple gas mixtures may lead to serious injury or death.
• The transceiver is not an oxygen cleaned product. Do not use the transceiver with anything greater than 40%
oxygen.
• Always ensure a safe ascent. A rapid ascent increases the risk of DCI.
• Disabling the deco lockout feature on the device can result in an increased risk of DCI, which can result in
personal injury or death. Disable this feature at your own risk.
• Violating a required decompression stop may result in serious injury or death. Never ascend above the
displayed decompression stop depth.
• Always perform a safety stop between 3 and 5 meters (9.8 and 16.4 feet) for 3 minutes, even if no
decompression stop is required.
• For devices that support the dive readiness feature, the feature calculates dive readiness scores based on a
limited set of factors and does not measure whether or not it is safe for you to dive. It is the responsibility of
Diving 3
the diver to judge their own dive readiness and to plan and conduct a dive safely. Failure to do so could result
in an accident leading to serious personal injury or death.
Dive Cautions
CAUTION
• Dive messaging and navigation requires line of sight between two compatible receivers with the latest
compatible software versions. Obstructions and other environmental factors may affect receiver connectivity
and may delay or prevent the sending and receiving of messages. With good connectivity, data can be
successfully sent between divers in under 20 seconds. If connectivity is poor, devices will attempt to send
data for up to two minutes. This is a supplemental feature that should not be relied upon as a method to
receive emergency assistance and should not replace traditional dive safety tools and procedures.
• The device range and availability of messaging and/or location tracking depends on the type of compatible
devices to which this device is communicating (Dive Product and Feature Compatibility, page38).
Dive Modes
The Descent device supports seven dive modes. Each dive mode has four phases: dive pre-check, surface
display, in-dive, and post-dive. During the pre-dive check, you can confirm the dive settings before you start
diving (Dive Setup, page5). You can also verify the connection to your paired Descent accessories. The
surface phase shows the data screens for the dive mode
(Dive Data Screens, page16). The in-dive phase
shows data about the dive in progress, and other watch features, such as GPS, are disabled (Going Diving,
page21). During the post-dive review, you can view a summary of the completed dive (Viewing the Dive Log
Glance, page30).
Single-Gas: This mode allows you to dive with a single gas blend. You can set up to 11 additional gases as
backup gases.
Multi-Gas: This mode allows you to configure multiple gas blends and switch gases during your dive. You can
set the oxygen content from 5–100%. This mode supports one bottom gas, and up to 11 additional gases as
decompression or backup gases.
NOTE: Backup gases are not used in no-decompression limit (NDL) and time to surface (TTS)
decompression calculations until you activate them during a dive.
CCR: This mode for closed-circuit rebreather (CCR) diving allows you to configure two partial pressure of
oxygen (PO2) setpoints, closed-circuit (CC) diluent gases, and open-circuit (OC) decompression and backup
gases.
Gauge: This mode allows you to dive with basic bottom timer features.
NOTE: After diving in gauge mode, the device can only be used in gauge or apnea mode for 24 hours.
Apnea: This mode allows you to free dive with apnea-specific dive data. This mode has a higher data refresh
rate.
Apnea Hunt: This mode is similar to the Apnea dive mode, but tuned specifically for spearfishers. This mode
disables start and stop tones.
Pool Apnea: This mode allows you to perform a dynamic or static apnea dive in a pool with activity-specific dive
data.
Using the Pool Dive Mode
When the device is in pool dive mode, the tissue load and decompression lockout features function normally,
but dives are not saved to the dive log.
1 Hold LIGHT to view the controls menu.
2 Select .
The pool dive mode turns off automatically at midnight.
4 Diving
Dive Setup
You can customize the dive settings based on your needs. Not all settings are applicable for all dive modes. You
can also edit the settings before you start a dive.
Hold MENU, and select Dive Setup.
Gases: Sets the gas blends used in the gas dive modes (Setting Up Your Breathing Gases, page6). You can
have up to twelve gases for each gas dive mode.
Dive Network & Air Integration: Pairs Descent transceivers and configures the data screens (Air Integration,
page10).
Conservatism: Sets the level of conservatism for decompression calculations. Higher conservatism provides a
shorter bottom time and a longer ascent time. The Custom option sets a custom gradient factor.
NOTE: Make sure you understand gradient factors before entering a custom level of conservatism.
Auto Dive: Sets the type of dive activity that starts automatically when you begin your descent. You can use the
Snooze option to temporarily disable this feature.
Water Type: Sets the water type.
PO2: Sets the partial pressure of oxygen (PO2) thresholds, in bar, for the maximum operating depth (MOD),
decompression, warnings, and critical alerts (Setting PO2 Thresholds, page9).
Scuba Alerts: Sets custom alerts for gas dives (Custom Dive Alerts, page6).
Apnea Alerts: Sets custom alerts for apnea dives (Custom Dive Alerts, page6).
Display Settings: Enables Big Numbers mode and customizes the data screens for each dive mode (Dive Data
Screens, page16).
Safety Stop: Changes the safety stop duration.
Last Deco Stop: Sets the depth of the final decompression stop.
Apnea Discipline: Sets the discipline type for apnea diving.
NOTE: You can view the discipline type for the dive in the dive log (Viewing the Dive Log Glance, page30).
End Dive Delay: Sets the length of time before the device ends and saves a dive after surfacing.
CCR Setpoints: Sets high and low PO2 setpoints for closed-circuit rebreather (CCR) dives (Setting CCR
Setpoints, page9).
Dive Shortcuts: Assigns button shortcuts for use during dives.
Advanced Settings: Customizes advanced dive mode settings (Dive Mode Advanced Settings, page5).
Dive Mode Advanced Settings
Hold MENU, and select Dive Setup > Advanced Settings.
Double Tap to Scroll: Enables a double-tap on the dive computer to scroll through the dive data screens. If you
notice accidental scrolling, you can use the Sensitivity option to adjust the responsiveness.
UP Key: Disables the UP button during dive activities to prevent inadvertent button presses.
Silent Diving: Disables all tones and vibrations for alerts during dive activities.
Heart Rate: Enables a heart rate monitor for dives. The Stored Strap Data option allows you to enable a chest
heart rate monitor, such as the HRM-Pro
™
series accessory, that stores heart rate data with the dive. You can
view chest heart rate monitor data in the Garmin Dive
™
app after you complete the dive.
Compass: Calibrates and set the north reference of the dive compass (Calibrating the Compass Manually,
page128).
No-Fly Time: Sets the no-fly countdown timer mode (No-Fly Time, page10).
Satellites: Sets the satellite system to use for dive entry and exit locations for each dive mode (Satellite Settings,
page77).
Units: Sets the distance, depth, temperature, and tank pressure units of measure for diving.
Deco Lockout: Disables the decompression lockout feature. This feature prevents single-gas, multi-gas, and
CCR dives for 24 hours if you violate a decompression ceiling for more than three minutes.
NOTE: You can still disable the decompression lockout feature after violating a decompression ceiling.
Diving 5
Setting Up Your Breathing Gases
You can enter up to twelve gases for each gas dive mode. Decompression calculations include your
decompression gases, but do not include your backup gases.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Dive Setup > Gases.
3 Select a dive mode.
4 Select the first gas in the list.
For single-gas or multi-gas dive modes, this is the bottom gas. For the closed-circuit rebreather (CCR) dive
mode, this is the diluent gas.
5 Select Oxygen, and enter the oxygen percentage of the gas blend.
6 Select Helium, and enter the helium percentage of the gas blend.
The dive computer calculates the remaining percentage as the nitrogen content.
7 Press BACK.
8 Select an option:
NOTE: Not all options are available for all dive modes.
• Select Add Backup, and enter the oxygen and helium percentage for your backup gas.
• Select Add New, enter the oxygen and helium percentage, and select Mode to set the intended use for the
gas, such as decompression or backup.
NOTE: For the multi-gas dive mode, you can select Set as Travel Gas to set your intended gas for
descending.
Custom Dive Alerts
You can set custom dive alerts to help you train toward a specific goal or to increase your awareness of your
environment.
6 Diving
Alert Name Dive Mode Description
Breathe Up Pool apnea
The alert occurs when the selected time interval elapses
during an apnea breathe up.
Depth
Single-gas, multi-gas, CCR,
gauge, apnea, or apnea
hunt
The alert occurs when you reach the selected depth.
Dive Pool apnea
The alert occurs when the selected time interval elapses
during a dynamic apnea dive.
High Speed Apnea or apnea hunt
The alert occurs when your vertical speed exceeds the
selected speed.
Low Speed Apnea or apnea hunt
The alert occurs when your vertical speed drops below the
selected speed.
Neutral Buoyancy Apnea or apnea hunt The alert occurs when you reach the selected depth.
Rest Pool apnea
The alert occurs when the selected time interval elapses
during a rest.
STA Pool apnea
The alert occurs when the selected time interval elapses
during a static apnea dive.
Start/Stop Apnea or apnea hunt The alert occurs when you start or stop a dive.
Surface Timer Apnea or apnea hunt The alert occurs when the selected time interval elapses.
Target Depth Apnea or apnea hunt The alert occurs when you reach the selected depth.
Time
Single-gas, multi-gas, CCR,
gauge, apnea, or apnea
hunt
The alert occurs when the selected time interval elapses.
Variometer Apnea or apnea hunt
The alert occurs every time you reach the selected depth
interval.
Diving 7
Setting a Custom Dive Alert
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Dive Setup.
3 Select an option:
• Select Scuba Alerts.
• Select Apnea Alerts.
4 Select an option:
• Select Add Alert to add a new alert.
• Select the alert name to edit an existing alert.
5 If necessary, enable the alert.
6 Select an option:
NOTE: Not all options are available for all alert types.
• Select Depth to specify the depth that should trigger the alert.
• Select Time to specify the time interval that should trigger the alert.
• Select Speed to specify the vertical speed threshold that should trigger the alert.
NOTE: You can set the alert to trigger when your vertical speed exceeds or drops below the selected
speed.
• Select Interval to specify if the alert should trigger once or at a repeat interval.
• Select Direction to specify if the alert should be enabled for ascending, descending, or both.
• Select Dive Types to specify which dive modes should allow the alert to trigger.
• Select Sound and Vibe to set the alert tone, vibration, or neither.
• Select Pop-up to enable a pop-up notification for the alert.
• Select Preview Alert to see how the alert appears and sounds during a dive.
Setting a Pool Apnea Alert
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Pool Apnea.
3 Select an option:
• Select Free to start an unstructured workout.
• Select an existing workout, and select Do Training.
4 Press MENU.
5 Select Alerts.
6 Select an alert category.
7 Select an option:
• Select Add Alert to add a new alert.
• Select the alert name to edit an existing alert.
8 Select an option:
NOTE: Not all options are available for all alert types.
• Select Time to specify the total time of a breathe up set.
• Select At to set the time after the workout step start time that should trigger the alert.
• Select Every to set the time interval that should trigger the alert.
• Select Last to set the time before the workout step end time that should trigger the alert.
• Select Countdown to set the number of remaining seconds to count down before the workout step end
time.
8 Diving
Setting PO2 Thresholds
You can configure the partial pressure of oxygen (PO2) alert message thresholds, in bar.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Dive Setup > PO2.
3 Select an option:
• Select MOD/Deco PO2 to set the maximum operating depth (MOD) and decompression PO2 threshold for
your planned bottom gas before you should begin your ascent and switch to the decompression gas with
the highest percentage of oxygen.
NOTE: The dive computer does not switch gases for you automatically. You must select the gas.
• Select PO2 Warning to set the threshold for the highest oxygen concentration level that you are
comfortable reaching.
• Select PO2 Critical to set the threshold for the maximum oxygen concentration level that you should
reach.
4 Enter a value.
If you reach the PO2 Critical threshold value during a dive, the dive computer displays an alert message (Dive
Alerts, page35).
Setting CCR Setpoints
You can configure the high and low partial pressure of oxygen (PO2) setpoints for closed-circuit rebreather
(CCR) dives.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Dive Setup > CCR Setpoints.
3 Select an option:
• To configure the lower PO2 setpoint, select Low Setpoint.
• To configure the upper PO2 setpoint, select High Setpoint.
4 Select Mode.
5 Select an option:
• To automatically change the setpoint based on your current depth, select Auto.
NOTE: For example, if you descend through the high setpoint depth or ascend through the low setpoint
depth, the PO2 threshold switches to the high or low setpoint, respectively. Automatic setpoint depths
must be at least 6.1 m (20 ft.) apart.
• To manually change setpoints during a dive, select Manual.
NOTE: If you manually change setpoints within 1.8 m (6 ft.) of an automatic switch depth, then automatic
setpoint switching is disabled until you are more than 1.8 m (6 ft.) above or below the automatic switch
depth. This prevents unintended setpoint switching.
6 Select PO2, and enter a value.
7 If necessary, select Depth, and enter a depth value for the automatic setpoint change.
Diving 9
No-Fly Time
After a dive, you may need to wait several hours before it is safe to fly on an airplane. To indicate your remaining
no-fly time, appears on the default watch face, along with a no-fly time estimate in hours (Default Watch
Face, page97). You can view more details on the surface interval glance (Viewing the Surface Interval Glance,
page29).
TIP: You can add the no-fly indicator to a custom watch face (Customizing the Watch Face, page97).
Hold MENU, and select Dive Setup > Advanced Settings > No-Fly Time.
No-Fly Time Mode Dive Type No-Fly Time
Standard or 24 Hours Dive duration of 3 minutes or less or depth of 5 m (15 ft.) or less. 0 hours
Standard Non-decompression dive more than 48 hours since the previous dive. 12 hours
Standard Multiple non-decompression dives within 48 hours. 18 hours
Standard Dive with a completed decompression stop. 24 hours
24 Hours Non-gauge dive that did not violate the decompression plan. 24 hours
Standard or 24 Hours Gauge dive or a dive that violated the decompression plan. 48 hours
Air Integration
The Descent Mk3i dive computer can be used with a paired Descent transceiver to view your tank pressure,
estimated air time remaining, and estimated gas consumption. When you pair your dive computer with another
diver's transceiver, you can view their depth, distance, and tank pressure. Compatible devices can send and/or
receive diver messages within your dive network (Dive Product and Feature Compatibility, page38). For more
information about the Descent transceiver, see the owner's manual for your device.
Waking the Transceiver from Low Power Mode
Out of the box, the transceiver is in low power mode. You must wake the transceiver from low power mode to
pair and connect to it.
Select an option:
• Install the transceiver on the first-stage regulator, and gradually open the tank valve to pressurize the
regulator.
NOTE: This option is not available for Bluetooth
®
pairing. Bluetooth technology is disabled when the
transceiver is pressurized.
• Twist the battery cover counter-clockwise 270 degrees, wait 30 seconds, then twist the battery cover
clockwise until it is secure.
NOTE: The transceiver remains awake for two minutes before returning to low power mode.
The transceiver plays a tone when it wakes from low power mode and is ready to connect to your Descent
dive computer (Pairing a Transceiver with a Descent Dive Computer, page11) or phone.
10 Diving
Pairing a Transceiver with a Descent Dive Computer
Before you use the transceiver for the first time, you must pair it with a compatible Descent dive computer using
ANT
®
technology.
1 Wake the transceiver from low power mode (Waking the Transceiver from Low Power Mode, page10).
2 On your Descent dive computer, hold MENU, and select Dive Setup > Dive Network & Air Integration >
Transmitters.
3 Select an option:
• To add your own transceiver, select Add Your Tank, select your transceiver from the list, enter your
transceiver ID, and select an option for gas consumption calculations.
NOTE: The transceiver ID is printed on the housing.
• To add another diver's transceiver, select Add Other Divers, select at least one transceiver from the list,
and select Add.
When the pairing process is complete, the transceiver begins sending data, and it is ready to use on a dive. The
next time the transceiver and dive computer are turned on and within wireless range, they connect automatically
when you start a dive.
If you are diving with a group, you can pair up to 8 transceivers with the dive computer.
Dive Network and Air Integration Settings
Hold MENU, and select Dive Setup > Dive Network & Air Integration.
NOTE: Some settings are available only for your own transceiver or another diver's transceiver.
Transmitters: Customizes the settings for paired transceivers (Transceiver Settings, page12).
Buoys: Pairs with a Descent S1 buoy (Descent S1 Buoy, page14). After pairing, you can manually sync the buoy
with your dive computer, and view information about the buoy, such as its connection status and software
version.
SubWave Features: Enables SubWave
™
features, such as messaging (Sending Diver Messages, page13) and
location tracking.
NOTE: SubWave features are only available when you are paired to a Descent T2 transceiver (Dive Product
and Feature Compatibility, page38). Location tracking is only available when you are paired to a Descent S1
buoy (Descent S1 Buoy, page14).
Quick Access Messages: Customizes which preset diver messages appear at the top of the message list
(Sending Diver Messages, page13).
Display Setup: Customizes which paired transceivers appear on the primary dive data screen during a dive
(Selecting Transceivers to View During a Dive, page13), and changes the gas consumption rate for your
transceiver (Selecting the Gas Consumption Rate Metric, page12).
Connection Alert: Enables alerts when paired transceivers connect and disconnect.
Diving 11
Transceiver Settings
You can customize the settings for paired transceivers prior to a dive.
Hold MENU, select Dive Setup > Dive Network & Air Integration > Transmitters, and select a transceiver.
NOTE: Some settings are available only for your own transceiver or another diver's transceiver.
Status: Enables a connection to the transceiver, and shows the current connection status. Connected
transceivers show data during a dive and can send or receive messages.
Placement: Sets the transceiver location as either your own tank or that of another diver.
Public Tank Name: Associates a name with your transceiver, which will be visible to your dive network the next
time you connect to your transceiver.
NOTE: If you customize this name, another option appears in the list to clear the name.
SubWave Status: Displays what SubWave features are currently available based on the devices present, along
with the current software version, hardware version, or configuration settings. For help troubleshooting
issues with the status of your SubWave features, go to garmin.com/SubWaveSupport.
Nickname: Associates a nickname with another diver's transceiver, which will be visible on your dive data
screens. This setting does not change the name that appears for other divers.
NOTE: If you customize this name, another option appears in the list to clear the name.
Identify: Plays a tone on the selected paired transceiver. This helps you to identify the transceiver without
needing to look at the transceiver ID printed on the transceiver housing.
Working Pressure: Sets how much pressure the tank has when full. This value is used to determine the upper
end of the pressure gauge, and to calculate respiratory minute volume (RMV) for tanks using psi units.
Reserve Pressure: Sets the threshold values for reserve pressure and critical pressure alerts to appear on the
dive computer.
Volume: Sets the air volume of the tank. You can use the Reset Volume option if you move the transceiver to a
different size tank.
NOTE: This value is required to calculate volumetric surface air consumption (SAC) and respiratory minute
volume (RMV) (Selecting the Gas Consumption Rate Metric, page12).
SAC/RMV/ATR: Enables calculations for volumetric surface air consumption (SAC), respiratory minute volume
(RMV), and air time remaining (ATR) estimates for your transceiver.
Set Transmit Power: Adjusts the power setting if your transceiver is losing connection with the paired dive
computer underwater.
About: Displays the transceiver ID, software version, and battery status.
Remove: Removes a paired transceiver.
Software Update: If an update is available, updates the transceiver software using your dive computer (Updating
the Transceiver Software Using Your Dive Computer, page14).
Selecting the Gas Consumption Rate Metric
1 Hold MENU, and select Dive Setup > Dive Network & Air Integration > Display Setup > Gas Consumption
Rate.
2 Select an option.
NOTE: The dive computer can estimate volumetric surface air consumption (SAC) or respiratory minute
volume (RMV) only if the air volume of the tank is entered in the dive computer (Transceiver Settings,
page12). The dive computer can estimate pressure-based surface air consumption (PSAC) with or without
the air volume of the tank.
12 Diving
Selecting Transceivers to View During a Dive
You can view two paired transceivers at-a-glance on the primary dive data screen. You can customize which
paired transceivers appear on the screen. By default, the first and second transceivers that you pair appear
(Viewing Transceiver Data During a Dive, page23).
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Dive Setup > Dive Network & Air Integration > Display Setup.
3 Select a field to customize.
4 Select a paired transceiver.
Sending Diver Messages
CAUTION
Dive messaging and navigation requires line of sight between two compatible receivers with the latest
compatible software versions. Obstructions and other environmental factors may affect receiver connectivity
and may delay or prevent the sending and receiving of messages. With good connectivity, data can be
successfully sent between divers in under 20 seconds. If connectivity is poor, devices will attempt to send
data for up to two minutes. This is a supplemental feature that should not be relied upon as a method to receive
emergency assistance and should not replace traditional dive safety tools and procedures.
When paired to your compatible Descent transceiver, you can send preset messages to other members of your
dive network up to 30 m (98 ft.) away. When also paired to a
Descent S1 buoy and within 100 m (328ft.) of it,
you can send preset messages to members of your dive network on the surface.
1 Press START.
2 Select Messages.
3 Press DOWN.
TIP: You can press UP to scroll through your recent messages.
4 Select a message.
5 If necessary, select a recipient.
NOTE: You can select the Dive Group option to send the message to every member of your dive network.
Receiving Diver Messages
CAUTION
Dive messaging and navigation requires line of sight between two compatible receivers with the latest
compatible software versions. Obstructions and other environmental factors may affect receiver connectivity
and may delay or prevent the sending and receiving of messages. With good connectivity, data can be
successfully sent between divers in under 20 seconds. If connectivity is poor, devices will attempt to send
data for up to two minutes. This is a supplemental feature that should not be relied upon as a method to receive
emergency assistance and should not replace traditional dive safety tools and procedures.
When paired to your compatible Descent transceiver, you can receive and reply to preset messages from other
members of your dive network who are up to 30 m (98 ft.) away. When you receive a message, a pop-up
notification appears on the watch.
1 When the message appears, press START.
2 Select an option:
• To reply to the message sender, select Reply.
• To reply to every member of your dive network, select Group Reply.
• To view the transceiver data of the message sender, select View Diver.
Diving 13
Requesting Diver Assistance
WARNING
Assistance is a supplemental feature and should not be relied upon as a primary method to obtain emergency
assistance. Your device cannot contact emergency services on your behalf.
If your are in distress during a dive, you can send a message requesting help to the other members of your dive
network.
1 Hold LIGHT until you are prompted to release it for assistance.
NOTE: If you do not release LIGHT soon after the prompt, the dive computer will restart.
After a brief countdown, a request for help will be sent every two minutes. On Descent Mk3i - 51 mm models,
the flashlight on your dive computer will also flash in a distress pattern.
2 If necessary, hold LIGHT to cancel the request for help.
A message indicating you are okay is sent to the other members of your dive network.
Updating the Transceiver Software Using Your Dive Computer
Before you can update the software, you must pair your Descent transceiver with a Descent Mk3i dive computer.
1 Select an option to sync your dive computer:
• Sync your dive computer with the Garmin Dive app.
• Connect the dive computer to your computer using the USB cable, and sync with the Garmin Express
™
application.
The Garmin Dive app and Garmin Express application automatically look for software updates. When you
sync with the Garmin Dive app, you will be prompted to apply the update at a later time. When you sync with
the Garmin Express application, the update is applied immediately to your dive computer.
2 Wake the transceiver from low power mode (Waking the Transceiver from Low Power Mode, page10).
3 On the paired Descent dive computer, hold MENU, select Dive Setup > Dive Network & Air Integration >
Transmitters, and select your transceiver.
4 Wait for the transceiver to connect to your dive computer.
Connected appears on the dive computer screen.
5 Select Software Update, press START, and select Install Now.
NOTE: The Software Update option may take up to a minute to appear while the dive computer determines
the transceiver's software version and battery status. If the battery status is low or critically low, you must
replace the battery before you can install the update.
6 Keep the dive computer near the transceiver until the software update is complete.
Descent S1 Buoy
Your Descent Mk3i dive computer is compatible with the Descent S1 buoy accessory. When you pair your
devices, your Descent S1 buoy creates a dive network that connects the surface users using the Garmin Dive
app with divers below the surface using both a Descent Mk3i dive computer and Descent T2 transceiver. Divers
can send and receive messages from users on the surface, and can also receive guidance for navigating back
to the buoy (Navigating to the Buoy, page15). Users on the surface can track the location of the divers in the
network. At the end of a dive, the buoy syncs with your dive computer, and you can view underwater heat maps
for approximate location information in the Garmin Dive app.
See the owner's manual for your Descent S1 buoy accessory for more information.
14 Diving
Navigating to the Buoy
CAUTION
You should not rely solely on the buoy for underwater navigation. The navigate to buoy feature requires line of
sight with the buoy. Location and distance information from the buoy is not precise, and should be used as a
supplement, and not a replacement, for diver training in navigation, search, and positioning.
When paired to a Descent S1 buoy (Descent S1 Buoy, page14) and Descent T2 transceiver (Pairing a Transceiver
with a Descent Dive Computer, page11), you can view your horizontal distance and direction back to the buoy
during a dive.
NOTE: The buoy data screen is automatically added for each dive activity when you pair your dive computer to a
Descent S1 buoy.
1 During a Single-Gas, Multi-Gas, CCR, or Gauge dive, scroll to the buoy data screen.
NOTE: The buoy data fields turn yellow if your dive computer loses communication with the buoy.
The current direction to the buoy.
Your current heading.
Your horizontal distance from the buoy.
2 Use the direction indicator to navigate to the buoy.
Diving 15
A solid blue circle appears to indicate your distance from the buoy. It increases in size as you get closer
to the buoy, and meets the dotted circle once you reach it.
NOTE: When you are near the buoy, the dive computer is no longer able to update direction information. The
direction indicator turns black and displays the last known direction for thirty seconds. After thirty seconds,
the direction indicator is removed, but the horizontal distance is still updated. For more information, go to
garmin.com/subwave.
Dive Data Screens
You can press DOWN or double-tap the device to scroll through the data screens.
In the activity settings, you can reorder the default data screens, add a dive stopwatch, and add custom data
screens (Customizing the Data Screens, page71). You can customize the data fields on some of the data
screens.
Single-Gas and Multi-Gas Data Screens
The primary data screen for single-gas and multi-gas dive modes displays the main dive data, including your
breathing gas and rate of ascent or descent. You can press DOWN to scroll through additional data, including
time of day, heart rate, battery life, maximum depth, and to view the dive compass (Navigating with the Dive
Compass, page22).
NOTE: The single-gas dive mode has Big Numbers mode enabled by default (Big Numbers Mode, page20).
Your partial pressure of oxygen (PO2) level.
Your nitrogen (N2) and helium (He) tissue load level.
Green: 0 to 79% tissue load.
Yellow: 80 to 99% tissue load.
Red: 100% or greater tissue load.
Your rate of ascent.
Green: Good. Ascent is less than 7.9 m (26 ft.) per minute.
Yellow: Moderately high. Ascent is between 7.9 and 10.1 m (26 and 33 ft.) per minute.
Red: Too high. Ascent is greater than 10.1 m (33 ft.) per minute.
16 Diving
CCR Data Screens
The primary data screen for the CCR dive mode displays the main dive data, including your breathing gas and
rate of ascent or descent. You can press DOWN to scroll through additional data, including your central nervous
system (CNS) oxygen toxicity level and your current oxygen toxicity units (OTU) (Viewing the Surface Interval
Glance, page29), and view the dive compass (Navigating with the Dive Compass, page22).
Indicates whether closed-circuit (CC) or open-circuit (OC) diving is active.
Your partial pressure of oxygen (PO2) level.
Your nitrogen (N2) and helium (He) tissue load level.
Green: 0 to 79% tissue load.
Yellow: 80 to 99% tissue load.
Red: 100% or greater tissue load.
Your rate of descent or ascent.
Green: Good. Ascent is less than 7.9 m (26 ft.) per minute.
Yellow: Moderately high. Ascent is between 7.9 and 10.1 m (26 and 33 ft.) per minute.
Red: Too high. Ascent is greater than 10.1 m (33 ft.) per minute.
Diving 17
Gauge Data Screens
The primary data screen for the gauge dive mode displays data for the current dive, including the current,
maximum, and average depth and the stopwatch (Using the Gauge Dive Stopwatch, page22). You can press
DOWN to scroll through additional data, including time of day and heart rate, and view the dive compass
(Navigating with the Dive Compass, page22).
Apnea and Apnea Hunt Data Screens
The in-dive screen for the apnea and apnea hunt dive modes displays information about the current dive,
including the elapsed time, current maximum depth, and rate of ascent or descent. During surface intervals,
you can press DOWN to scroll through additional data, including last dive depth and time, view the map screen
(Diving with the Map, page26), and use the stopwatch (Using the Basic Dive Stopwatch, page22).
18 Diving
Pool Apnea Data Screens
The in-dive screen for the pool apnea dive mode displays information about the current dive, including your
current heart rate, target distance, training set, elapsed time, and a preview of the next step of the training
activity. During surface intervals, you can press DOWN to view information about your last dive. You can press
START to stop, change, or preview the current training activity or access the activity settings.
Customizing the Dive Data Screens
You can reorder the default data screens, customize some of the default data fields, and add custom data
screens.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Dive Setup > Display Settings.
3 Select a dive mode.
4 Select an option:
• For gas dive modes, select Data Screens.
• For apnea dive modes, select Dive Screen or Surface Screens.
5 Scroll to a screen, and press START.
6 Select an option:
• Select Layout to adjust the number of data fields on the data screen.
• Select Data Fields, and select a field to change the data that appears in the field.
TIP: For a list of all the available data fields, go to Data Fields, page182. Not all data fields are available
for all activity types.
• Select Left Gauge or Right Gauge to change the data used for the graphical dive gauges.
• Select Reorder to change the location of the data screen in the loop.
• Select Remove to remove the data screen from the loop.
NOTE: Not all options are available for all dive modes.
7 If necessary, select Add New to add a data screen to the loop.
You can add a custom data screen, or select one of the predefined data screens.
Diving 19
Big Numbers Mode
You can change the size of the numbers on the single-gas, multi-gas, and CCR dive data screens.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Dive Setup > Display Settings.
3 Select Single-Gas Mode, Multi-Gas Mode, or CCR Mode.
4 Select Big Numbers.
Your rate of ascent.
Green: Good. Ascent is less than 7.9 m (26 ft.) per minute.
Yellow: Moderately high. Ascent is between 7.9 and 10.1 m (26 and 33 ft.) per minute.
Red: Too high. Ascent is greater than 10.1 m (33 ft.) per minute.
Indicates whether closed-circuit (CC) or open-circuit (OC) diving is active in a CCR dive.
Your partial pressure of oxygen (PO2) level.
20 Diving
Going Diving
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select a dive mode (Dive Modes, page4).
3 If necessary, press UP to edit the dive settings, such as the gases, water type, and alerts (Dive Setup, page5).
4 Wait with your wrist out of the water until the watch acquires GPS signals and the status bar is filled
(optional).
The watch requires GPS signals to save your dive entry location.
5 Press START until the primary dive data screen appears.
6 Descend to start your dive.
The activity timer starts automatically when you reach a depth of 1.2 m (4 ft.).
NOTE: If you start a dive without selecting a dive mode, the watch uses the most recently used dive mode
and settings, and your dive entry location is not saved.
7 Select an option:
• Press DOWN to scroll through the data screens and dive compass.
TIP: You can also double tap the watch to scroll through the data screens. For an Apnea or Apnea Hunt
dive, you can only scroll through the data screens during a surface interval.
• Press START to view the in-dive menu.
8 When you are ready to end the dive, ascend to the surface.
9 Keep your wrist out of the water so the watch can acquire GPS signals and save your dive exit location
(optional).
10 Select an option:
• For a Single-Gas, Multi-Gas, CCR, or Gauge dive, wait for the DIVE END timer to count down.
NOTE: When you ascend to 1 m (3.3 ft.), the DIVE END timer begins counting down (Dive Setup, page5).
You can press START, and select Stop Dive to save the dive before the timer elapses.
• For an Apnea or Apnea Hunt dive, press BACK, and select Save.
The watch saves the dive activity.
TIP: You can view your diving history in the dive log glance (Viewing the Dive Log Glance, page30).
Diving 21
Navigating with the Dive Compass
1 During a Single-Gas, Multi-Gas, CCR, or Gauge dive, scroll to the dive compass.
The compass indicates your directional heading .
2 Press START to set the heading.
The compass indicates deviations from the set heading .
TIP: You can set the heading from any of the dive data screens by holding START and DOWN.
3 Press START, and select an option:
• To reset the heading, select Reset Heading.
• To change the heading by 180 degrees, select Set to Recip..
NOTE: The compass indicates the reciprocal heading with a red mark.
• To set to a 90-degree heading left or right, select Set to 90L or Set to 90R.
• To clear the heading, select Clear Heading.
Using the Gauge Dive Stopwatch
1 Start a Gauge dive.
2 Press START, and select Reset Avg. Depth to set the average depth to your current depth.
3 Press START.
4 Select Start Stopwatch.
5 Select an option:
• To stop using the stopwatch, press START, and select Stop Stopwatch.
• To restart the stopwatch, press START, and select Reset Stopwatch.
Using the Basic Dive Stopwatch
1 Select an option:
• Add the Stopwatch Timer data screen to the Single-Gas, Multi-Gas, CCR, or Gauge dive mode.
• Enable the STOPWATCH surface data screen for the Apnea or Apnea Hunt dive mode.
2 During a gas dive or apnea surface interval, scroll to the stopwatch screen.
TIP: During an apnea surface interval, you can press and hold START to open the stopwatch and start the
timer, even if the screen is not enabled. You can view the running stopwatch timer from the dive data screen
after starting or resuming your dive.
3 Press START to start the timer.
4 Press STOP to stop the timer.
5 Press BACK to reset the timer.
22 Diving
Viewing Transceiver Data During a Dive
1 Press DOWN to view the data screen.
TIP: You can customize the dive data screens to view the transceiver and diver dashboard data on dedicated
data screens (Customizing the Data Screens, page71).
The gas consumption estimate for your transceiver (Selecting the Gas Consumption Rate Metric,
page12).
The air time remaining (ATR) estimate for your transceiver.
Your primary and secondary transceivers and their tank pressure values.
NOTE: You can customize which transceivers are displayed (Selecting Transceivers to View During a
Dive, page13).
2 Press START, and select Divers to view the tank pressure values, approximate depths, and approximate
distances of the paired Descent transceivers in the network.
NOTE: Not all features are available for older devices (Dive Product and Feature Compatibility, page38).
Diving 23
Switching Gases During a Dive
1 Start a single-gas, multi-gas, or closed-circuit rebreather (CCR) dive.
2 Select an option:
• Press START, select Gas, and select a backup or decompression gas.
NOTE: If necessary, you can select Add New and enter a new gas.
• Dive until you reach the MOD/Deco PO2 threshold (Setting PO2 Thresholds, page9).
The device prompts you to switch to the gas with the highest percentage of oxygen.
NOTE: The device does not switch gases for you automatically. You must select the gas.
Switching Between CC and OC Diving for a Bailout Procedure
During a closed-circuit rebreather (CCR) dive, you can switch between closed-circuit (CC) and open-circuit (OC)
diving while you perform a bailout procedure.
1 Start a CCR dive.
2 Press START.
3 Select Switch to OC.
The dividing lines on the data screens turn red, and the device switches the active breathing gas to your OC
decompression gas.
NOTE: If you have not set up an OC decompression gas, the device switches to your diluent gas.
4 If necessary, press START, and select Gas to manually switch to a backup gas.
5 Press START, and select Switch to CC to switch back to CC diving.
24 Diving
Performing a Safety Stop
You should perform a safety stop during every dive to help reduce the risk of decompression sickness.
1 After a dive of at least 11 m (35 ft.), ascend to 5 m (15 ft.).
Safety stop information appears on the data screens.
Your depth relative to the surface.
As you ascend, your position moves upward toward the safety stop depth.
The safety stop ceiling depth.
The safety stop timer.
When you are within 1 m (5 ft.) of the ceiling depth, the timer starts counting down.
2 Stay within 2 m (8 ft.) of the safety stop ceiling depth until the safety stop timer reaches zero.
NOTE: If you ascend more than 3 m (8 ft.) above the safety stop ceiling depth, the safety stop timer pauses,
and the device alerts you to descend below the ceiling depth. If you descend below 11 m (35 ft.), the safety
stop timer resets.
3 Continue ascending to the surface.
Diving 25
Performing a Decompression Stop
You should always perform all the required decompression stops during a dive to help reduce the risk of
decompression sickness. Missing a decompression stop adds significant risk.
1 When you exceed the no-decompression limit (NDL) time, begin your ascent.
Decompression stop information appears on the data screens.
Your depth relative to the surface.
As you ascend, your position moves upward toward the required decompression stop depth. The
empty segments represent cleared stops. You may clear a stop before ascending to it.
The decompression stop ceiling depth.
The decompression stop timer.
2 Stay within 0.6 m (2 ft.) of the decompression stop ceiling depth until the decompression stop timer reaches
zero.
NOTE: If you ascend more than 0.6 m (2 ft.) above the decompression stop ceiling depth, the decompression
stop timer pauses, and the device alerts you to descend below the ceiling depth. The depth and ceiling depth
flash red until you are within the safe margin.
3 Continue ascending to the surface or the next decompression stop.
Diving with the Map
You can view your dive entry and exit locations on the map during apnea surface intervals. With DiveView
™
maps
enabled, you can view shading for coastal depth zones and terrain (Managing Maps, page139).
TIP: You can view map data for all dive modes in the dive log glance and in the Garmin Dive app.
1 During an apnea dive activity, scroll to the map.
2 Press START, and select an option:
• To pan or zoom the map, select Pan/Zoom.
TIP: You can press START to toggle between panning up and down, panning left and right, or zooming.
You can hold START to select the point indicated by the crosshairs.
• To mark your location, select Save Location.
TIP: You can press DOWN to change the icon.
26 Diving
Starting a Pool Apnea Activity
WARNING
Apnea diving requires appropriate training. Pool apnea diving carries many of the same risks as apnea diving in
open water. Never dive alone.
NOTE: The auto dive feature does not automatically start a pool apnea activity.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Pool Apnea.
3 Select an option:
• Select Free to start an unstructured workout.
• Select an existing workout, and select Do Training.
• Select Create to create a new workout (Creating a Custom Pool Apnea Workout, page27).
4 If necessary, press MENU to edit the dive settings, such as the pool size or auto start depth (Pool Apnea Dive
Setup, page28).
5 Press START.
6 If necessary, select an apnea discipline.
7 If necessary, press START to begin the breathe up timer.
8 Descend to start your dive.
The dive timer starts automatically when you reach the Start Depth for the Auto Start setting (Pool Apnea
Dive Setup, page28).
9 When you are ready to end the current dive, ascend to the surface.
The dive timer stops and the rest timer starts automatically when you reach the End Depth for the Auto Start
setting (Pool Apnea Dive Setup, page28).
10 If necessary, enter the swim distance, and press START.
11 Select an option:
• Press START to view the in-dive menu.
• Press DOWN to scroll to the static apnea stopwatch during a Free workout.
• During a surface interval, press DOWN to view information about your last dive and remaining workout
details.
12 To end the dive activity, press START, and select Stop Training > Save.
TIP: You can view your diving history in the dive log glance (Viewing the Dive Log Glance, page30).
Creating a Custom Pool Apnea Workout
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Pool Apnea > Create.
3 Enter a custom workout name.
4 Select an option:
• Select Total Sets to edit the number of sets.
• Select Apnea to set the apnea discipline, type, and interval change.
• Select Rest to set the rest type and interval change.
• Select Preview to see the current custom workout details.
5 Select Apply to save the custom workout.
Diving 27
Editing a Pool Apnea Workout
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Pool Apnea.
3 Select a workout from the list.
4 Press START.
5 Select an option:
• Select Edit to edit the workout details (Creating a Custom Pool Apnea Workout, page27).
• Select Copy to create a copy of this workout to create a new workout.
• Select Rename to rename the workout.
• Select Delete to delete the workout.
Pool Apnea Dive Setup
From the watch face, press START, select Pool Apnea, select a workout, and press MENU.
TIP: During a dive, press START and select Settings access these settings.
Pool Size: Sets the pool length for dynamic apnea workouts.
Auto Start: Sets the depth that automatically starts and ends the dive timer for a dive.
Training Library: Displays the list of available pool apnea workouts. You can create and edit custom workouts
(Creating a Custom Pool Apnea Workout, page27).
Alerts: Sets in-dive and rest pool apnea alerts (Setting a Pool Apnea Alert, page8).
Heart Rate: Enables a heart rate monitor for dives. The Stored Strap Data option allows you to enable a chest
heart rate monitor, such as the HRM-Pro series accessory, that stores heart rate data with the dive. You can
view chest heart rate monitor data in the Garmin Dive app after you complete the dive.
28 Diving
Viewing the Surface Interval Glance
1 From the watch face, press UP or DOWN to view the surface interval glance.
2 Press START to view your current oxygen toxicity units (OTU) and central nervous system (CNS) percentage.
NOTE: The OTU accumulated during a dive expire after 24 hours.
Green: 0 to 249 OTU.
Yellow: 250 to 299 OTU.
Red: 300 or greater OTU.
Green: 0 to 79% CNS oxygen toxicity.
Yellow: 80 to 99% CNS oxygen toxicity.
Red: 100% or greater CNS oxygen toxicity.
3 Press DOWN to view your tissue load details.
4 Press DOWN to view your no-fly time remaining and the time of day the no-fly period ends.
Diving 29
Viewing the Dive Log Glance
The glance displays summaries of your recently recorded dives.
1 From the watch face, press UP or DOWN to view the dive log glance.
2 Press START to view your most recent dive.
3 Press DOWN > START to view a different dive (optional).
4 Press START, and select an option:
• To view additional information about the activity, select All Stats.
• To view additional information about one of multiple apnea dives in the activity, select Dives, and select a
dive.
• To view your rest time between pool apnea dives, select Rest.
• To view the activity on a map, select Map.
NOTE: The watch shows your entry and exit locations if you waited for GPS signals before and after the
dive.
• To save a dive entry or exit location, select Save Location.
• To view a depth graph for the activity, select Depth.
• To view a temperature graph for the activity, select Temperature.
• To view a vertical velocity graph for each apnea dive, select Velocity.
• To view the gases you used, select Gas Switches.
NOTE: This option only appears if gases were switched during the dive.
• To view messages sent and received, select Dive Messages.
NOTE: This option only appears if messages were sent or received during the dive.
• To remove the activity from your watch, select Delete.
NOTE: Deleting an activity from the dive log glance does not impact tissue loading calculations.
30 Diving
Dive Readiness
WARNING
The dive readiness feature calculates dive readiness scores based on a limited set of factors and does not
measure whether or not it is safe for you to dive. It is the responsibility of the diver to judge their own dive
readiness and to plan and conduct a dive safely. Failure to do so could result in an accident leading to serious
personal injury or death.
Your dive readiness is a score and a short message that can help you decide whether you are ready to dive. The
score is continuously calculated and updated throughout the day using these factors:
• Sleep score (last night)
• Recovery time
• Body battery
• Jet lag
• Dive history
• Sleep history (last 3 nights)
• Training status
Color Zone Score Description
Green
75 to 100
Good
Ready to dive
Yellow
50 to 74
Moderate
Stay focused
Orange
25 to 49
Low
Be cautious
Red
1 to 24
Poor
Rest before diving
To see your dive readiness trends over time, go to the Garmin Dive app..
Dive Planning
You can plan for future dives using your dive computer, such as calculating your breathing gas or no-
decompression limit (NDL) times. When planning a dive, the dive computer uses your residual tissue load
from recent dives in the calculations.
Diving 31
Finding Nearby Dive Sites
You can search for nearby dive sites and points of interest.
1 Press START.
2 Select Plan Dive > Nearby Dive Sites.
3 Select an option:
• To search for a dive site by name, select Spell Search, and enter the name.
• To search for dive sites by category, select a category.
• To search the list of all dive sites, select All Categories.
A list of dive sites near your current location appears.
4 Select a location from the search results.
5 Select an option:
• To navigate to the dive site, select Go.
• To view the dive site on the map, select Map.
• To save the location of the dive site, select Save Location.
• To view information about the dive site, such as its distance from your current location and its average
water temperature, select Review.
Calculating NDL Time
You can calculate the no-decompression limit (NDL) time or maximum depth for a future dive. These
calculations are not saved or applied to your next dive.
1 Press START.
2 Select Plan Dive > Compute NDL.
3 Select an option:
• To calculate NDL based on your current tissue load, select Diving Now.
• To calculate NDL based on your tissue load at a future time, select Enter Surf. Interval, and enter your
surface interval time.
4 Enter an oxygen percentage.
5 Select an option:
• To calculate the NDL time, select Enter Depth, and enter the planned depth for your dive.
• To calculate the maximum depth, select Enter Time, and enter your planned dive time.
The NDL countdown clock, depth, and maximum operating depth (MOD) appear.
NOTE: If the planned depth exceeds the MOD of the dive computer or the breathing gas, a warning message
appears, and the gas MOD appears in red.
6 Press DOWN.
7 Select an option:
• To exit, select Done.
• To add intervals to your dive, select Add Repeat Dive, and follow the on-screen instructions.
32 Diving
Calculating Your Breathing Gas
You can calculate the PO2 value, oxygen percentage, or maximum depth for a dive by adjusting two of the three
values. The calculations are affected by the water type setting in the Dive Setup menu (Dive Setup, page5).
1 Press START.
2 Select Plan Dive > Calculate Gas.
3 Press UP or DOWN, and select an option to calculate:
• Select PO2.
• Select O2%.
• Select Depth.
4 Press UP or DOWN to edit the first value.
5 Press START, then press UP or DOWN to edit the second value.
As you edit the values, the device calculates an adjusted value for the highlighted option.
6 If necessary, press BACK to calculate the value for a different option.
Creating a Decompression Plan
You can create open-circuit decompression plans and save them for future dives.
1 Press START.
2 Select Plan Dive > Deco Plans > Add New.
3 Enter a name for the decompression plan.
4 Select an option:
• To enter the maximum partial pressure of oxygen in bars, select PO2.
NOTE: The dive computer uses the PO2 value for gas switching.
• To enter your level of conservatism for decompression calculations, select Conservatism.
• To enter your gas blends, select Gases.
• To enter the depth of your last decompression stop, select Last Deco Stop.
• To enter the maximum dive depth, select Bottom Depth.
• To enter the time at the bottom depth, select Bottom Time.
5 Select Save.
Using Decompression Plans
1 Press START.
2 Select Plan Dive > Deco Plans.
3 Select a decompression plan.
4 Select an option:
• To view the decompression plan, select View.
• To use the decompression plan settings for a dive mode, select Apply.
• To change the decompression plan details, select Edit.
• To edit the name of the decompression plan, select Rename.
• To remove the decompression plan, select Delete > Yes.
Altitude Diving
At higher altitudes, the atmospheric pressure is lower, and your body contains a larger amount of nitrogen than
it would at the start of a dive at sea level. The dive computer accounts for altitude changes automatically using
the barometric pressure sensor. The absolute pressure value used by the decompression model is not affected
by the altitude or the gauge pressure displayed on the dive computer.
Diving 33
Tips for Wearing the Watch with an Exposure Suit
• Use the extra long silicone diving band to wear the watch over a thick exposure suit.
• Use the extension on the titanium watch band to increase the length of the band.
• Turn off the wrist-based heart rate monitor to increase battery life (Wrist Heart Rate Monitor Settings,
page125).
34 Diving
Dive Alerts
Alert Message Cause Watch Action
None You completed the decompression stop.
The decompression stop depth and
time flash blue for five seconds.
None
Your partial pressure of oxygen (PO2)
value is above the specified warning
value.
Your PO2 value flashes yellow.
%1 OTU accumulated.
End your dive now.
Your oxygen toxicity units are above the
safe limit. During a dive, "%1" is replaced
with the number of units accumulated.
The alert appears every two minutes, up
to three times.
250 OTU accumulated.
Your oxygen toxicity units (OTU) are at
250 units, and you are nearing the safe
limit of 300 units.
None
Approaching Deco Stop
You are within one stop interval (3m or
9.8ft.) of the decompression stop depth.
None
Approaching NDL
You have 10 minutes of no decompres
sion limit (NDL) time remaining.
The alert appears again when you have
5 minutes of NDL time remaining.
Ascending too fast. Slow
your ascent.
You are ascending faster than 9.1m/min.
(30ft./min.) for more than 5 seconds.
None
Battery critically low. End
your dive now.
Less than 10% battery power remains.
The alert appears when the watch is
below 10% battery power and on the
dive pre-check screen for your next
dive.
Battery is low. Less than 20% battery power remains.
The alert appears when the watch is
below 20% battery power and on the
dive pre-check screen for your next
dive.
Continuing on %1. Switch
at any time.
You selected Not Now when prompted
to switch to a higher-oxygen gas, or you
ignored the prompt.
The watch marks the gas as a backup
and updates decompression guidance
accordingly.
CNS toxicity at %1%. End
your dive now.
Your CNS oxygen toxicity is too high.
During a dive, "%1" is replaced with your
current CNS percentage.
The alert appears every two minutes, up
to three times.
CNS toxicity at 80%.
Your central nervous system (CNS)
oxygen toxicity is at 80% of the safe limit.
The alert appears during a dive and on
the dive pre-check screen for your next
dive.
Decompression Cleared You completed all decompression stops. None
Descend below deco
ceiling.
You are more than 0.6m (2ft.) above the
decompression ceiling.
The current depth and stop depth flash
red.
If you remain above the decompression
ceiling for more than three minutes, the
decompression lockout feature goes
into effect.
Descend to complete
safety stop.
You are more than 2 m (8 ft.) above the
safety stop ceiling.
The current depth and stop depth flash
yellow.
Diving 35
Alert Message Cause Watch Action
Diluent PO2 is low.
Flushing may be
dangerous.
The PO2 of the diluent gas is too low, and
filling the rebreather breathing loop with
the diluent gas may be dangerous.
None
Dive will end in %1
seconds.
The watch will automatically end and
save the dive. During a dive, "%1" is
replaced by the number of seconds.
None
Do not dive. Failed to read
depth sensor.
The watch has invalid or missing depth
sensor data before you start a dive
activity.
Do not start a dive. Call Garmin
®
Product Support.
Failed to read depth
sensor. End your dive
now.
The watch has invalid or missing depth
sensor data after you have started a dive
activity.
Use a backup dive computer or dive
plan and end your dive. Call Garmin
Product Support.
NDL exceeded. Decom
pression now required.
You have exceeded your NDL time.
The watch begins providing decom
pression stop guidance.
No more gas switch alerts
will be issued.
You selected Never when prompted to
switch to a higher-oxygen gas.
The watch marks the gas as a backup
and updates decompression guidance
accordingly. It will no longer prompt
you to switch to the gas.
PO2 is high. Ascend or
switch to lower O2 gas.
Your PO2 value is above the specified
critical value.
Your PO2 value flashes red.
The alert appears every 30 seconds, up
to three times, until you ascend to a
safe level or switch gases.
PO2 is low. Descend or
switch to higher O2 gas.
Your PO2 value is below 0.18 bar.
If you are within the first two minutes
of your dive, your PO2 value flashes
yellow. Otherwise, your PO2 value
flashes red.
The alert appears every 30 seconds, up
to three times, until you descend to a
safe level or switch gases.
Safety Stop Cleared You completed the safety stop. None
Safety Stop Started
You ascended above 6 m (20 ft.) without
other decompression guidance.
The safety stop countdown timer
begins, if configured.
Safe to switch to %1.
Switch now?
In a multi-gas dive, a gas with a higher
oxygen content is now safe to breathe.
During a dive, "%1" is replaced with the
name of the gas.
You can switch gases now, or wait
to switch gases later in the dive. A
confirmation message for your choice
appears.
Switched to high setpoint.
The watch automatically switched to
your specified CCR high setpoint.
None
Switched to low setpoint.
The watch automatically switched to
your specified CCR low setpoint.
None
This pool dive will not be
saved to the dive log.
The watch is in pool dive mode.
The watch will not save the current dive
to the dive log.
Watch rebooted. Evaluate
dive conditions.
The watch rebooted during the dive.
The watch simulates the dive for the
time it was rebooting. Since other alerts
36 Diving
Alert Message Cause Watch Action
may not have been triggered, evaluate
your current depth and dive conditions.
Transceiver Alerts
Alert Message Cause Device Action
None
Your paired dive computer has lost
communication with the transceiver for 30
seconds.
The tank pressure value flashes yellow.
%1 is below
reserve pressure.
Your tank pressure is below the reserve
pressure level. "%1" is replaced with the
transceiver name.
The tank pressure value turns yellow.
The paired dive computer vibrates and plays
a warning tone.
%1 pressure is
critically low.
Your tank pressure is below the critical
pressure level. "%1" is replaced with the
transceiver name.
The tank pressure value flashes red.
The paired dive computer vibrates and plays
a warning tone.
%1 has a low
battery.
Fewer than 20 hours of dive time remain.
"%1" is replaced with the transceiver name.
The transceiver name flashes BATT. LOW
when the battery is critically low.
The paired dive computer vibrates and plays
a warning tone.
NO COMMS
Your paired dive computer has lost
communication with the transceiver for 60
seconds.
The transceiver name flashes NO COMMS,
dashed lines replace the tank pressure value,
and the tank pressure value flashes red.
The paired dive computer vibrates and plays
a warning tone if connection alerts are
enabled.
Transmitter %1
failed to connect.
Your paired dive computer cannot connect
to the transceiver. You should update both
devices to the latest software version. "%1"
is replaced with the transceiver name.
The paired dive computer vibrates and plays
a warning tone.
Buoy Alerts
Alert Message Cause Device Action
Buoy synced.
The buoy synced with the paired
dive computer after a dive.
The buoy sends location heat maps for the
dive to the Garmin Dive app.
Buoy sync failed. Go
to buoy settings to
manually sync.
The buoy failed to sync with the
paired dive computer after a dive.
The buoy will not send location heat maps for
the dive until it is manually synced with the
paired dive computer.
Leaving SubWave buoy
communication range.
You are more than 100 m (328 ft.)
away from the buoy.
The dive computer loses connection with the
buoy.
Nearing SubWave buoy.
Distance guidance only.
You are close to the buoy.
The direction to the buoy will no longer be
updated on your dive computer.
Diving 37
Enabling Lost Dive Accessory Alerts
Your paired dive computer can lose communication with the transceiver or buoy when it is out of range, when
its signal is blocked by your body or that of another diver, and when it loses battery power. You can enable an
alert that notifies you when your paired dive computer has lost communication with the transceiver or buoy for
60 seconds.
From the watch face, hold MENU, and select Dive Setup > Dive Network & Air Integration > Connection Alert.
Dive Product and Feature Compatibility
You can pair multiple Descent devices to form a dive network for you and your fellow divers. Not all features are
available for older devices. See your Descent device owner's manual for more information.
NOTICE
You should update your devices to the latest software versions to access all features and improvements. If the
software versions are incompatible, the following alert appears on the dive computer: Transmitter %1 failed to
connect.. "%1" is replaced with the transceiver name.
Descent T1 Descent T2
Descent Mk2i
• View tank pressure
• View diver depth
• View diver distance
• Receive messages
• View tank pressure
• View diver depth
• View diver distance
• View public tank name
Descent Mk3i
Descent X50i
• View tank pressure
• View diver depth
• View diver distance
• Send messages
• Receive messages
• View tank pressure
• View diver depth
• View diver distance
• View public tank name
Descent S1 Not compatible
Using a paired dive computer during a dive:
• Navigate to buoy
• Send messages to the surface
• Receive messages from the surface
Using the Garmin Dive app from the surface:
• Send messages to underwater divers
• Receive messages from underwater divers
• View tank pressure
• View diver depth
• View diver distance
• View diver direction
• View public tank name
: View tank pressure for yourself and connected divers.
: View diver depth for connected divers.
: View diver distance for connected divers.
38 Diving
: View the direction to connected divers.
: View the public transceiver names for yourself and connected divers.
: Send pre-defined in-dive messages to divers with a Descent T2 transceiver, or to users on the surface with
a Descent S1 buoy.
: Receive in-dive messages from divers with a paired Descent T2 transceiver, or from users on the surface
with a Descent S1 buoy.
: View distance and direction information to navigate back to the Descent S1 buoy.
About SubWave Technology
Compatible Descent devices use SubWave sonar technology to communicate with other compatible Descent
devices. There are many factors that can affect device-to-device communication. For more information, go to
garmin.com/subwave.
Dive Terminology
Air time remaining (ATR): The time you may remain at the current depth until an ascent at 9 m/min. (30
ft./min.) would result in surfacing with reserve pressure remaining.
NOTE: If multiple tanks are included in gas consumption calculations, air time remaining is calculated using
the combined pressure and reserve pressure of all tanks.
CAUTION
Decompression stops are included in the calculations, but safety stops are not.
Central nervous system (CNS): A measure of central nervous system oxygen toxicity caused by exposure to
increased partial pressure of oxygen (PO2) while diving.
Closed-circuit rebreather (CCR): A diving mode used for dives performed with a rebreather that recirculates
exhaled gas and removes carbon dioxide.
Maximum operating depth (MOD): The greatest depth at which a breathing gas can be used before the partial
pressure of oxygen (PO2) exceeds the safe limit.
No decompression limit (NDL): A dive that does not require decompression time while ascending to the
surface.
Oxygen toxicity units (OTU): A measure of pulmonary oxygen toxicity caused by exposure to increased partial
pressure of oxygen (PO2) while diving. One OTU is equivalent to breathing 100% oxygen at 1 ATM for 1
minute.
Partial pressure of oxygen (PO2): The pressure of the oxygen in the breathing gas, based on depth and oxygen
percentage.
Pressure-based surface air consumption (PSAC): The change in pressure over time, normalized to 1 ATM.
Respiratory minute volume (RMV): The change in gas volume at ambient pressure over time.
Surface interval (SI): The amount of time that has elapsed since the completion of the last dive.
Time to surface (TTS): The estimated amount of time required to safely ascend to the surface.
CAUTION
Decompression stops are included in the calculations, but safety stops are not.
Volumetric surface air consumption (SAC): The change in gas volume over time, normalized to 1 ATM.
Clocks
Setting an Alarm
You can set multiple alarms.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Clocks > ALARMS > Add Alarm.
3 Enter the alarm time.
Clocks 39
Editing an Alarm
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Clocks > ALARMS > Edit.
3 Select an alarm.
4 Select an option:
• To turn the alarm on or off, select Status.
• To change the alarm time, select Time.
• To set the alarm to repeat regularly, select Repeat, and select when the alarm should repeat.
• To select the type of alarm notification, select Sound and Vibe.
• To select a description for the alarm, select Label.
• To delete the alarm, select Delete.
Starting the Countdown Timer
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clocks > TIMERS.
3 Select an option:
• To set and save a countdown timer for the first time, enter the time, press MENU, and select Save Timer.
• To set and save additional countdown timers, select Add Timer, and enter the time.
• To set a countdown timer without saving it, select Quick Timer, and enter the time.
4 If necessary, press MENU, and select an option:
• Select Time to change the time.
• Select Restart > On to automatically restart the timer after it expires.
• Select Sound and Vibe, and select a type of notification.
5 Press START to start the timer.
Deleting a Timer
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clocks > TIMERS > Edit.
3 Select a timer.
4 Select Delete.
40 Clocks
Using the Stopwatch
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Clocks > STOPWATCH.
3 Press START to start the timer.
4 Press LAP to restart the lap timer .
The total stopwatch time continues running.
5 Press STOP to stop both timers.
6 Select an option:
• To reset both timers, press DOWN.
• To save the stopwatch time as an activity, press MENU, and select Save Activity.
• To reset the timers and exit the stopwatch, press MENU, and select Done.
• To review the lap timers, press MENU, and select Review.
NOTE: The Review option only appears if there have been multiple laps.
• To return to the watch face without resetting the timers, press MENU, and select Go to Watchface.
• To enable or disable lap recording, press MENU, and select Lap Key.
Adding Alternate Time Zones
You can display the current time of day in additional time zones.
NOTE: You can view your alternate time zones in the glance loop (Customizing the Glance Loop, page102).
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Clocks > ALT. TIME ZONES > Add Alt. Time Zone.
3 Press UP or DOWN to highlight a region, and press START to select it.
4 Select a time zone.
5 If necessary, rename the zone.
Clocks 41
Editing an Alternate Time Zone
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Clocks > ALT. TIME ZONES.
3 Select a time zone.
4 Press START.
5 Select an option:
• To set the time zone to display on the glance loop, select Set as Favorite.
• To enter a custom name for the time zone, select Rename Zone.
• To enter a custom abbreviation for the time zone, select Abbreviate Zone.
• To change the time zone, select Change Zone.
• To delete the time zone, select Delete Zone.
Activities and Apps
Your watch can be used for indoor, outdoor, athletic, and fitness activities. When you start an activity, the watch
displays and records sensor data. You can create custom activities or new activities based on default activities
(Creating a Custom Activity, page71). When you finish your activities, you can save and share them with the
Garmin Connect
™
community.
You can also add Connect IQ
™
activities and apps to your watch using the Connect IQ app (Connect IQ Features,
page149).
For more information about activity tracking and fitness metric accuracy, go to garmin.com/ataccuracy.
Starting an Activity
When you start an activity, GPSturns on automatically (if required).
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 If this is the first time you are starting an activity, select the checkbox next to each activity to add to your
favorites, and select .
3 Select an option:
• Select an activity from your favorites.
• Select , and select an activity from the extended activity list.
4 If the activity requires GPS signals, go outside to an area with a clear view of the sky, and wait until the watch
is ready.
The watch is ready after it establishes your heart rate, acquires GPSsignals (if required), and connects to
your wireless sensors (if required).
5 Press START to start the activity timer.
The watch records activity data only while the activity timer is running.
Tips for Recording Activities
• Charge the watch before starting an activity (Charging the Watch, page172).
• Press LAP to record laps, start a new set or pose, or advance to the next workout step.
You can select to discard a lap for certain activities (How can I undo a lap button press?, page180).
• Press UP or DOWN to view additional data screens.
• Swipe up or down to view additional data screens (Enabling and Disabling the Touchscreen, page2).
• Hold MENU, and select Power Mode to use a power mode to extend battery life (Customizing Power Modes,
page168).
42 Activities and Apps
Stopping an Activity
1 Press STOP.
2 Select an option:
• To resume your activity, select Resume.
• To save the activity and view the details, select Save, press START, and select an option.
NOTE: After you save the activity, you can enter self-evaluation data (Evaluating an Activity, page43).
• To suspend your activity and resume it at a later time, select Resume Later.
• To mark a lap, select Lap.
You can select to discard a lap for certain activities (How can I undo a lap button press?, page180).
• To navigate back to the starting point of your activity along the path you traveled, select Back to Start >
TracBack.
NOTE: This feature is available only for activities that use GPS.
• To navigate back to the starting point of your activity by the most direct path, select Back to Start > Route.
NOTE: This feature is available only for activities that use GPS.
• To measure the difference between your heart rate at the end of the activity and your heart rate two
minutes later, select Recovery HR, and wait while the timer counts down (Recovery Heart Rate, page114).
• To discard the activity, select Discard.
NOTE: After stopping the activity, the watch saves it automatically after 30 minutes.
Evaluating an Activity
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
You can customize the self-evaluation setting for certain activities (Activities and App Settings, page72).
1 After you complete an activity, select Save (Stopping an Activity, page43).
2 Select a number that corresponds with your perceived effort.
NOTE: You can select to skip the self evaluation.
3 Select how you felt during the activity.
You can view evaluations in the Garmin Connect app.
Running
Going for a Track Run
Before you go for a track run, make sure you are running on a standard-shape, 400 m track.
You can use the track run activity to record your outdoor track data, including distance in meters and lap splits.
1 Stand on the outdoor track.
2 From the watch face, press START.
3 Select Track Run.
4 Wait while the watch locates satellites.
5 If you are running in lane 1, skip to step 11.
6 Press MENU.
7 Select the activity settings.
8 Select Lane Number.
9 Select a lane number.
10 Press BACK twice to return to the activity timer.
11 Press START.
12 Run around the track.
After you run 3 laps, your watch records the track dimensions and calibrates your track distance.
13 After you complete your activity, press STOP, and select Save.
Activities and Apps 43
Tips for Recording a Track Run
• Wait until the watch acquires satellite signals before starting a track run.
• During your first run on an unfamiliar track, run four laps to calibrate your track distance.
You should run slightly past your starting point to complete the lap.
• Run each lap in the same lane.
NOTE: The default Auto Lap
®
distance is 1600 m, or four laps around the track.
• If you are running in a lane other than lane 1, set the lane number in the activity settings.
Going for a Virtual Run
You can pair your watch with a compatible third-party app to transmit pace, heart rate, or cadence data.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Virtual Run.
3 On your tablet, laptop, or phone, open the Zwift
™
app or another virtual training app.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions to start a running activity and pair the devices.
5 Press START to start the activity timer.
6 After you complete your activity, press STOP, and select Save.
Calibrating the Treadmill Distance
To record more accurate distances for your treadmill runs, you can calibrate the treadmill distance after you run
at least 2.4km (1.5mi.) on a treadmill. If you use different treadmills, you can manually calibrate the treadmill
distance on each treadmill or after each run.
1 Start a treadmill activity (Starting an Activity, page42).
2 Run on the treadmill until your watch records at least 2.4km (1.5mi.).
3 After you finish the activity, press STOP to stop the activity timer.
4 Select an option:
• To calibrate the treadmill distance the first time, select Save.
The device prompts you to complete the treadmill calibration.
• To manually calibrate the treadmill distance after the first-time calibration, select Calibrate & Save > Yes.
5 Check the treadmill display for the distance traveled, and enter the distance on your watch.
Recording an Ultra Run Activity
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Ultra Run.
3 Press START to start the activity timer.
4 Start running.
5 Press LAP to record a lap and start the rest timer.
NOTE: You can configure the Lap Key setting to record a lap and start the rest timer, start the rest timer only,
or record a lap only (Activities and App Settings, page72).
6 When you are done resting, press LAP to resume running.
7 Press UP or DOWN to view additional data pages (optional).
8 After you complete your activity, press STOP, and select Save.
44 Activities and Apps
Ultra Run Auto Rest Settings
You can customize the options for automatically starting and stopping the rest timer for the Ultra Run activity.
Status: Enables automatically recording rest splits.
Rest Start: Automatically starts the rest timer when you stop running. You can use the Manual Only option to
start the rest timer only when you press LAP.
Rest End: Sets the pace required to end a rest split.
Minimum Time: Sets the amount of time before a rest split starts or ends.
Lap Key: Sets the LAP button to record a lap and start the rest timer, start the rest timer only, or record a lap
only.
Recording an Obstacle Racing Activity
When you participate in an obstacle course race, you can use the Obstacle Racing activity to record your time on
each obstacle and your time running between obstacles.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Obstacle Racing.
3 Press START to start the activity timer.
4 Press LAP to manually mark the beginning and end of each obstacle.
NOTE: You can configure the Obstacle Tracking setting to save obstacle locations from your first loop of the
course. On repeat loops of the course, the watch uses the saved locations to switch between obstacle and
running intervals.
5 After you complete your activity, press STOP, and select Save.
Swimming
NOTE: The watch has wrist-based heart rate enabled for swim activities. The watch is also compatible with
chest heart rate monitors, such as the HRM-Pro series accessories. If both wrist-based heart rate and chest
heart rate data are available, your watch uses the chest heart rate data.
Swim Terminology
Length: One trip down the pool.
Interval: One or more consecutive lengths. A new interval starts after a rest.
Stroke: A stroke is counted every time your arm wearing the watch completes a full cycle.
Swolf: Your swolf score is the sum of the time for one pool length and the number of strokes for that length.
For example, 30 seconds plus 15 strokes equals a swolf score of 45. For open water swimming, swolf is
calculated over 25 meters. Swolf is a measurement of swimming efficiency and, like golf, a lower score is
better.
Critical swim speed (CSS): Your CSS is the theoretical speed that you can maintain continuously without
exhaustion. You can use your CSS to guide your training pace and monitor your improvement.
Activities and Apps 45
Stroke Types
Stroke type identification is available only for pool swimming. Your stroke type is identified at the end of a
length. Stroke types appear in your swimming history and in your Garmin Connect account. You can also select
stroke type as a custom data field (Customizing the Data Screens, page71).
Free Freestyle
Back Backstroke
Breast Breaststroke
Fly Butterfly
Mixed More than one stroke type in an interval
Drill Used with drill logging (Training with the Drill Log, page47)
Tips for Swimming Activities
• Press LAP to record an interval during open water swimming.
• Before starting a pool swimming activity, follow the on-screen instructions to select your pool size or enter a
custom size.
The watch measures and records distance by completed pool lengths. The pool size must be correct to
display accurate distance. The next time you start a pool swimming activity, the watch uses this pool size.
You can hold MENU, select the activity settings, and select Pool Size to change the size.
• For accurate results, swim the entire pool length, and use one stroke type for the entire length. Pause the
activity timer when resting.
• Press LAP to record a rest during pool swimming (Swim Auto Rest and Manual Rest, page46).
The watch automatically records swim intervals and lengths for pool swimming.
• To help the watch count your lengths, use a strong push off the wall and glide before your first stroke.
• When doing drills, you must either pause the activity timer or use the drill logging feature (Training with the
Drill Log, page47).
Swim Auto Rest and Manual Rest
The auto rest feature is available only for pool swimming. Your watch automatically detects when you are
resting, and the rest screen appears. If you rest for more than 15 seconds, the watch automatically creates a
rest interval. When you resume swimming, the watch automatically starts a new swim interval.
TIP: For best results using the auto rest feature, minimize your arm motions while resting.
To use manual rests instead, you can turn off the auto rest feature in the activity options (Activities and App
Settings, page72). During a pool or open water swim activity, you can manually mark a rest interval by pressing
LAP. Swim data is not recorded during a rest interval.
TIP: Use manual rests if you are taking short rests or you want very precise swim interval timing.
46 Activities and Apps
Training with the Drill Log
The drill log feature is available only for pool swimming. You can use the drill log feature to manually record kick
sets, one-arm swimming, or any type of swimming that is not one of the four major strokes.
1 During your pool swim activity, press UP or DOWN to view the drill log screen.
2 Press LAP to start the drill timer.
3 After you complete a drill interval, press LAP.
The drill timer stops, but the activity timer continues to record the entire swim session.
4 Select a distance for the completed drill.
Distance increments are based on the pool size selected for the activity profile.
5 Select an option:
• To start another drill interval, press LAP.
• To start a swim interval, press UP or DOWN to return to the swim training screens.
Multisport
Triathletes, duathletes, and other multisport competitors can take advantage of the multisport activities, such
as Triathlon or Swimrun. During a multisport activity, you can transition between activities and continue to view
your total time. For example, you can switch from biking to running and view your total time for biking and
running throughout the multisport activity.
You can customize a multisport activity, or you can use the default triathlon activity set up for a standard
triathlon.
Triathlon Training
When you participate in a triathlon, you can use the triathlon activity to quickly transition to each sport segment,
to time each segment, and to save the activity.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Triathlon.
3 Press START to start the activity timer.
NOTE: Auto Sport Change is the default setting for multisport activities (Activities and App Settings,
page72).
4 If necessary, press LAP at the beginning and end of each transition (How can I undo a lap button press?,
page180).
The transition feature is on by default, and the transition time is recorded separately from the activity time.
The transition feature can be turned on or off in the triathlon activity settings. If transitions are turned off,
press LAP to change sports.
5 After you complete your activity, press STOP, and select Save.
Creating a Multisport Activity
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Add > Multisport.
3 Select a multisport activity type, or enter a custom name.
Duplicate activity names include a number. For example, Triathlon(2).
4 Select two or more activities.
5 Select an option:
• Select an option to customize specific activity settings. For example, you can select whether to include
transitions.
• Select Done to save and use the multisport activity.
6 Select Yes to add the activity to your list of favorites.
Activities and Apps 47
Indoor Activities
The watch can be used for training indoors, such as running on an indoor track or using a stationary bike or
indoor trainer. GPS is turned off for indoor activities (Activities and App Settings, page72).
When running or walking with GPS turned off, speed and distance are calculated using the accelerometer in the
watch. The accelerometer is self-calibrating. The accuracy of the speed and distance data improves after a few
outdoor runs or walks using GPS.
TIP: Holding the handrails of the treadmill reduces accuracy.
When cycling with GPS turned off, speed and distance data are not available unless you have an optional sensor
that sends speed and distance data to the watch, such as a speed or cadence sensor.
Health Snapshot
™
The Health Snapshot feature records several key health metrics while you hold still for two minutes. It provides
a glimpse of your overall cardiovascular status. The watch records metrics such as your average heart rate,
stress level, and respiration rate. You can add the Health Snapshot feature to the list of your favorite apps
(Activities and App Settings, page72).
Recording a Strength Training Activity
You can record sets during a strength training activity. A set is multiple repetitions (reps) of a single move.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Strength.
3 Select a workout.
4 Press DOWN to view a list of workout steps (optional).
TIP: While viewing workout steps, you can press START and then press DOWN to view an animation of the
selected exercise, if available.
5 When you have finished viewing the workout steps, press START, and select Do Workout.
6 Press START, and select Start Workout.
7 Start your first set.
The watch counts your reps. Your rep count appears when you complete at least four reps.
TIP: The watch can only count reps of a single move for each set. When you want to change moves, you
should finish the set and start a new one.
8 Press LAP to finish the set and move to the next exercise, if available.
The watch displays the total reps for the set.
9 If necessary, press UP or DOWN to edit the number of reps.
TIP: You can also add the weight used for the set.
10 If necessary, press LAP when you are done resting to start your next set.
11 Repeat for each strength training set until your activity is complete.
12 After your last set, press START, and select Stop Workout.
13 Select Save.
48 Activities and Apps
Recording a HIIT Activity
You can use specialized timers to record a high-intensity interval training (HIIT) activity.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select HIIT.
3 Select an option:
• Select Free to record an open, unstructured HIIT activity.
• Select HIIT Timers > AMRAP to record as many rounds as possible during a set time period.
• Select HIIT Timers > EMOM to record a set number of moves every minute on the minute.
• Select HIIT Timers > Tabata to alternate between 20-second intervals of maximum effort with 10 seconds
of rest.
• Select HIIT Timers > Custom to set your move time, rest time, number of moves, and number of rounds.
• Select Workouts to follow a saved workout.
4 If necessary, follow the on-screen instructions.
5 Press START to start your first round.
The watch displays a countdown timer and your current heart rate.
6 If necessary, press LAP to manually move to the next round or rest.
7 After you finish the activity, press STOP to stop the activity timer.
8 Select Save.
Using an Indoor Trainer
Before you can use a compatible indoor trainer, you must pair the trainer with your watch using ANT+
®
technology (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page132).
You can use your watch with an indoor trainer to simulate resistance while following a course, ride, or workout.
While using an indoor trainer, GPS is turned off automatically.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Bike Indoor.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Smart Trainer Options.
5 Select an option:
• Select Free Ride to go for a ride.
• Select Follow Workout to follow a saved workout (Workouts, page87).
• Select Follow Course to follow a saved course (Courses, page164).
• Select Set Power to set the target power value.
• Select Set Grade to set the simulated grade value.
• Select Set Resistance to set the resistance force applied by the trainer.
6 Press START to start the activity timer.
The trainer increases or decreases resistance based on the elevation information in the course or ride.
Activities and Apps 49
Gaming
Using the Garmin GameOn
™
App
When you pair your watch with your computer, you can record a gaming activity on your watch and view
real-time performance metrics on your computer.
1 On your computer, go to www.overwolf.com/app/Garmin-Garmin_GameOn and download the Garmin
GameOn app.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.
3 Launch the Garmin GameOn app.
4 When the Garmin GameOn app prompts you to pair your watch, press START, and select Gaming on your
watch.
NOTE: While your watch is connected to the Garmin GameOn app, notifications and other Bluetooth features
are disabled on the watch.
5 Select Pair Now.
6 Select your watch from the list, and follow the on-screen instructions.
TIP: You can click > Settings to customize your settings, reread the tutorial, or remove a watch. The
Garmin GameOn app remembers your watch and settings the next time you open the app. If necessary, you
can pair your watch to another computer (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page132).
7 Select an option:
• On your computer, start a supported game to automatically start the gaming activity.
• On your watch, start a manual gaming activity (Recording a Manual Gaming Activity, page50).
The Garmin GameOn app shows your real-time performance metrics. When you complete your activity, the
Garmin GameOn app displays your gaming activity summary and match information.
Recording a Manual Gaming Activity
You can record a gaming activity on your watch and manually enter stats for each match.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Gaming.
3 Press DOWN, and select a game type.
4 Press START to start the activity timer.
5 Press LAP at the end of the match to record your match result or placement.
6 Press LAP to start a new match.
7 After you complete your activity, press STOP, and select Save.
50 Activities and Apps
Climbing Sports
Recording an Indoor Climbing Activity
You can record routes during an indoor climbing activity. A route is a climbing path along an indoor rock wall.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Climb Indoor.
3 Select Yes to record route statistics.
4 Select a grading system.
NOTE: The next time you start an indoor climbing activity, the device uses this grading system. You can hold
MENU, select the activity settings, and select Grading System to change the system.
5 Select the difficulty level for the route.
6 Press START.
7 Start your first route.
NOTE: When the route timer is running, the device automatically locks the buttons to prevent accidental
button presses. You can hold any button to unlock the watch.
8 When you finish the route, descend to the ground.
The rest timer starts automatically when you are on the ground.
NOTE: If necessary, you can press LAP to finish the route.
9 Select an option:
• To save a successful route, select Completed.
• To save an unsuccessful route, select Attempted.
• To delete the route, select Discard.
10 Enter the number of falls for the route.
11 When you are done resting, press LAP and begin your next route.
12 Repeat this process for each route until your activity is complete.
13 Press STOP.
14 Select Save.
Activities and Apps 51
Recording a Bouldering Activity
You can record routes during a bouldering activity. A route is a climbing path along a boulder or small rock
formation.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Bouldering.
3 Select a grading system.
NOTE: The next time you start a bouldering activity, the watch uses this grading system. You can hold MENU,
select the activity settings, and select Grading System to change the system.
4 Select the difficulty level for the route.
5 Press START to start the route timer.
6 Start your first route.
7 Press LAP to finish the route.
8 Select an option:
• To save a successful route, select Completed.
• To save an unsuccessful route, select Attempted.
• To delete the route, select Discard.
9 When you are done resting, press LAP to start your next route.
10 Repeat this process for each route until your activity is complete.
11 After your last route, press STOP to stop the route timer.
12 Select Save.
Starting an Expedition
You can use the Expedition app to prolong the battery life while recording a multi-day activity.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Expedition.
3 Press START to start the activity timer.
The device enters low power mode and collects GPS track points once an hour. To maximize battery life, the
device turns off all sensors and accessories, including the connection to your smartphone.
Recording a Track Point Manually
During an expedition, track points are recorded automatically based on the selected recording interval. You can
manually record a track point at any time.
1 During an expedition, press START.
2 Select Add Point.
Viewing Track Points
1 During an expedition, press START.
2 Select View Points.
3 Select a track point from the list.
4 Select an option:
• To start navigating to the track point, select Go To.
• To view detailed information about the track point, select Details.
52 Activities and Apps
Going Hunting
You can save locations relevant to your hunt and view a map of saved locations. During a hunting activity, the
device uses a GNSS mode that conserves battery life.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Hunt.
3 Press START, and select Start Hunt.
4 Press START, and select an option:
• To navigate back to the starting point of your activity, select Back to Start, and select an option.
• To save your current location, select Save Location.
• To view locations saved during this hunt activity, select Hunt Locations.
• To view all previously saved locations, select Saved Locations.
• To navigate to a destination, select Navigation, and select an option.
5 After you complete your hunt, press STOP, and select End Hunt.
Marine Activities
Sailing
Tack Assist
CAUTION
The watch uses GPS-based course over ground to determine your course in the tack assist feature, and
does not account for other factors that can affect your boat's direction, such as currents and tides. You are
responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel.
While cruising or racing into the wind, the tack assist feature can help you determine if your boat is being lifted
or headed. When you calibrate tack assist, the watch captures your boat's port and starboard course
over ground (COG) measurements, and uses the COG data to calculate the mean true wind direction and the
boat's tack angle .
The watch uses this data to determine whether your boat is being lifted or headed due to wind shifts.
By default, the tack assist feature is set to automatic. Each time you calibrate the port or starboard COG, the
watch recalibrates the opposite side and true wind direction. You can change the tack assist settings to enter a
fixed tack angle or true wind direction.
Activities and Apps 53
Calibrating the Tack Assist
1 From the watch face, select START.
2 Select Sail Race or Sail.
3 Select UP or DOWN to view the tack assist screen.
NOTE: You may need to add the tack assist screen to the data screens for the activity (Customizing the Data
Screens, page71).
4 Select START.
5 Select an option:
• To calibrate the starboard side, select START.
• To calibrate the port side, select DOWN.
TIP: If the wind is coming from the starboard side of the vessel, you should calibrate starboard. If the wind is
coming from the port side of the vessel, you should calibrate port.
6 Wait while the device calibrates the tack assist.
An arrow appears and indicates if your boat is being lifted or headed.
Entering a Fixed Tack Angle
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Sail Race or Sail.
3 Press UP or DOWN to view the tack assist screen.
4 Hold MENU.
5 Select Tack Angle > Angle.
6 Press UP or DOWN to set the value.
Entering a True Wind Direction
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Sail Race or Sail.
3 Press UP or DOWN to view the tack assist screen.
4 Hold MENU.
5 Select True Wind Direction > Fixed.
6 Press UP or DOWN to set the value.
Tips for Getting the Best Lift Estimate
To get the best lift estimate when using the tack assist feature, you can try these tips. See Entering a True Wind
Direction, page54 and Calibrating the Tack Assist, page54 for more information.
• Enter a fixed tack angle, and calibrate the port side.
• Enter a fixed tack angle, and calibrate the starboard side.
• Reset the tack angle, and calibrate both the port and starboard side.
Sail Racing
You can use the device to help you cross the start line of a race exactly when the race begins. When you
synchronize the regatta timer in the sail racing app with the official race countdown timer, you are alerted at
one-minute intervals as the race start approaches. When you set the starting line, the device uses GPS data to
indicate whether your boat will cross the start line before, after, or at the correct time to start the race.
54 Activities and Apps
Setting the Starting Line
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Sail Race.
3 Wait while the device locates satellites.
4 Hold MENU.
5 Select Start Line Settings.
6 Select an option:
• Select Mark Port to mark the port starting line mark as you sail past it.
• Select Mark Starboard to mark the starboard starting line mark as you sail past it.
• Select Time to Burn to enable or disable the time to burn data on the regatta timer data screen.
• Select Distance to Start to set the distance to the start line, preferred distance units, and length of your
boat.
Starting a Race
Before you can view the time to burn, you must set the starting line (Setting the Starting Line, page55).
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Sail Race.
3 Wait while the watch locates satellites.
The screen displays the regatta timer and time to burn .
4 If necessary, hold MENU, and select an option:
• To set a fixed timer, select Regatta Time > Fixed, and enter a length of time.
• To set a start time within the next 24 hours, select Regatta Time > GPS, and enter a time of day.
5 Press START.
6 Press UP and DOWN to synchronize the regatta timer with the official race countdown.
NOTE: When the burn time is negative, you will arrive at the start line after the race starts. When the burn
time is positive, you will arrive at the start line before the race starts.
7 Press START to start the activity timer.
Activities and Apps 55
Water Sports
Viewing Your Water Sport Runs
Your watch records the details of each water sport run using the auto run feature. This feature automatically
records new runs based on your movement. The activity timer pauses when you stop moving. The activity timer
starts automatically when your movement speed increases. You can view run details from the paused screen or
while the activity timer is running.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all water sport activity types.
1 Start a water sport activity.
2 Hold MENU.
3 Select View Runs.
4 Press UP and DOWN to view details of your last run, your current run, and your total runs.
The run screens include time, distance traveled, maximum speed, and average speed.
Fishing
Going Fishing
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Fish.
3 Press START > Start Fish.
4 Press START, and select an option:
• To add the catch to your fish count and save the location, select Log Catch.
• To save your current location, select Save Location.
• To set an interval timer, end time, or end time reminder for the activity, select Fish Timers.
• To navigate back to the starting point of your activity, select Back to Start, and select an option.
• To view your saved locations, select Saved Locations.
• To navigate to a destination, select Navigation, and select an option.
• To edit the activity settings, select Settings, and select an option (Activities and App Settings, page72).
5 After you complete your activity, press STOP, and select End Fish.
Tides
Viewing Tide Information
WARNING
Tide information is for information purposes only. It is your responsibility to heed all posted water-related
guidance, to remain aware of your surroundings, and to use safe judgment in, on, and around the water at all
times. Failure to heed this warning could result in serious personal injury or death.
You can view information about a tide station, including the tide height and when the next high and low tides will
occur. You can save up to ten tide stations.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Tides.
56 Activities and Apps
3 Select an option:
• To use your current location when you are near a tide station, select Add > Current Location.
• To select a location on the map, select Add > Use Map.
• To enter the name of a city, select Add > City Search.
• To select a saved location, select Add > Saved Locations.
• To enter coordinates for a location, select Add > Coordinates.
A 24-hour tide chart appears for the current date with the current tide height and information about the
next high and low tides .
4 Press DOWN to see tide information for upcoming days.
5 Press START, and select Set as Favorite to set this location as your favorite tide station.
Your favorite tide station appears at the top of the list in the app and in the glance.
Setting a Tide Alert
1 From the Tides app, select a saved tide station.
2 Press START, and select Set Alerts.
3 Select an option:
• To set an alarm to sound before the peak tide, select Til High Tide.
• To set an alarm to sound before the low tide, select Til Low Tide.
Anchor
WARNING
The anchor feature is a tool for situational awareness only and may not prevent groundings or collisions in all
circumstances. You are responsible for the safe and prudent operation of your vessel, for remaining aware of
your surroundings, and for using safe judgment on the water at all times. Failure to heed this warning could
result in property damage, serious personal injury, or death.
Marking Your Anchor Location
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Anchor.
3 Wait while the watch locates satellites.
4 Press START, and select Drop Anchor.
Activities and Apps 57
Anchor Settings
From the watch face, press START, select Anchor, hold MENU, and select the activity settings.
Drift Radius: Sets the allowable drift distance while anchored.
Update Interval: Sets the time interval for updating anchor data.
Anchor Alarm: Allows you to enable or disable an alarm for when the boat moves beyond the drift radius.
Anchor Alarm Duration: Allows you to set the anchor alarm duration. When the anchor alarm is enabled, an alert
appears each time the boat moves beyond the drift radius during the specified alarm duration.
Trolling Motor Remote
Pairing Your Watch and Trolling Motor
You can pair your watch with a Garmin trolling motor and use it as a remote control. For more information about
using a remote control, see your trolling motor owner's manual.
1 Turn on the trolling motor.
2 Bring the watch within 1m (3ft.) of the display panel on the trolling motor.
3 On the watch, press START, and select Trolling Motor.
TIP: If necessary, you can pair your watch with another trolling motor (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors,
page132).
4 On the trolling motor display panel, press three times to enter pairing mode.
on the trolling motor display panel illuminates blue as it searches for a connection.
5 On the watch, press START to enter pairing mode.
6 Verify that the passkey shown on your trolling motor remote control matches your watch.
7 On the watch, press START to confirm the passkey.
8 On the trolling motor remote control, press to confirm the passkey.
on the trolling motor display panel illuminates green when the connection to your watch is successful.
Skiing and Winter Sports
You can add skiing and snowboarding activities to your activity list (Customizing Activities and Apps, page70).
You can customize the data screens for each activity (Customizing the Data Screens, page71).
Viewing Your Ski Runs
Your watch records the details of each downhill skiing or snowboarding run using the auto run feature. This
feature is turned on by default for downhill skiing and snowboarding. It automatically records new ski runs when
you start moving down hill.
1 Start a skiing or snowboarding activity.
2 Hold MENU.
3 Select View Runs.
4 Press UP and DOWN to view details of your last run, your current run, and your total runs.
The run screens include time, distance traveled, maximum speed, average speed, and total descent.
58 Activities and Apps
Recording a Backcountry Skiing or Snowboarding Activity
The backcountry skiing or snowboarding activity lets you switch between climbing and descending tracking
modes so you can accurately track your statistics. You can customize the Mode Tracking setting to
automatically or manually switch tracking modes (Activities and App Settings, page72).
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Backcountry Ski or Backcountry Snowboard.
3 Select an option:
• If you are starting your activity on a climb, select Climbing.
• If you are starting your activity moving downhill, select Descending.
4 Press START to start the activity timer.
5 If necessary, press LAP to switch between climbing and descending tracking modes.
6 After you complete your activity, press STOP, and select Save.
Cross-Country Skiing Power Data
NOTE: The HRM-Pro series accessory must be paired to the Descent watch using ANT+ technology.
You can use your compatible Descent watch paired with the HRM-Pro series accessory to provide real-time
feedback about your cross-country skiing performance. The power output is measured in watts. Factors that
affect power include your speed, elevation changes, wind, and snow conditions. You can use power output to
measure and improve your skiing performance.
NOTE: Skiing power values are generally lower than cycling power values. This is normal and occurs because
humans are less efficient at skiing than they are at cycling. It is common for ski power values to be 30 to 40
percent lower than cycling power values at the same training intensity.
Activities and Apps 59
Golfing
Playing Golf
Before you play golf, you should charge the watch (Charging the Watch, page172).
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Golf.
The device locates satellites, calculates your location, and selects a course if there is only one course
nearby.
3 If the course list appears, select a course from the list.
4 If necessary, set your driver distance.
5 Select to keep score.
60 Activities and Apps
6 Select a tee box.
The hole information screen appears.
Current hole number
Distance to the back of the green
Distance to the middle of the green
Distance to the front of the green
Par for the hole
Map of the green
Driver distance from the tee box
NOTE: Because pin locations change, the watch calculates the distance to the front, middle, and back of the
green, but not the actual pin location.
7 Select an option:
• Tap the front, middle, or back distances to the green to view the PlaysLike distance (PlaysLike Distance
Icons, page63).
• Tap the map to view more detail or measure distance with touch targeting (Measuring Distance with
Touch Targeting, page64).
• Press UP or DOWN to view the location and distance to a layup or to the front and back of a hazard.
• Press START to open the golf menu (Golf Menu, page62).
When you move to the next hole, the watch automatically transitions to display the new hole information.
Activities and Apps 61
Golf Menu
During a round, you can press START to access additional features in the golf menu.
End Round: Ends the current round.
Change Hole: Allows you to manually change the hole.
Change Green: Allows you to change the green when more than one green is available for a hole.
View Green: Allows you to move the pin location to get a more precise distance measurement (Moving the Flag,
page62).
Virtual Caddie: Requests a club recommendation from the virtual caddie (Virtual Caddie, page63).
PlaysLike: Shows the PlaysLike factors for the hole (PlaysLike Distance Icons, page63).
Measure Shot: Shows the distance of your previous shot recorded with the Garmin AutoShot
™
feature (Viewing
Measured Shots, page64). You can also manually record a shot (Manually Measuring a Shot, page64).
Scorecard: Opens the scorecard for the round (Keeping Score, page64).
Odometer: Shows the recorded time, distance, and steps traveled. The odometer automatically starts and stops
when you start or end a round. You can reset the odometer during a round.
Wind: Opens a pointer that shows the wind direction and speed relative to the pin (Viewing the Wind Speed and
Direction, page65).
PinPointer: The PinPointer feature is a compass that points to the pin location when you are unable to see the
green. This feature can help you line up a shot even if you are in the woods or in a deep sand trap.
NOTE: Do not use the PinPointer feature while in a golf cart. Interference from the golf cart can affect the
accuracy of the compass.
Custom Targets: Allows you to save a location, such as an object or obstacle, for the current hole (Saving
Custom Targets, page66).
Club Stats: Shows your statistics with each golf club, such as distance and accuracy information. Appears when
you pair Approach
®
CT10 sensors or enable the Club Prompt setting.
Sunrise & Sunset: Shows the sunrise, sunset, and twilight times for the current day.
Settings: Allows you to customize the golf activity settings (Activities and App Settings, page72).
Moving the Flag
You can take a closer look at the green and move the pin location.
1 From the hole information screen, press START.
2 Select View Green.
3 Tap or drag to move the pin location.
TIP: You can press START to zoom in our out.
4 Press BACK.
The distances on the hole information screen are updated to show the new pin location. The pin location is
saved for only the current round.
62 Activities and Apps
Virtual Caddie
Before you can use the virtual caddie, you must play five rounds with Approach CT10 club tracking sensors
or enable the Club Prompt setting (Activities and App Settings, page72), and upload your scorecards. For
each round, you must connect to a paired phone with the Garmin Golf
™
app. The virtual caddie provides
recommendations based on the hole, wind data, and your past performance with each club.
Displays the club or club combination recommendation for the hole. You can select or to view other
club options.
Displays the average number of strokes expected to score with the club recommendation.
Displays the shot dispersion area for your next shot with the club recommendation, based on your shot
history with the club.
NOTE: If the shot dispersion area overlaps with the green, the shot's chances of reaching the green will
display as a percentage.
PlaysLike Distance Icons
The PlaysLike distance feature accounts for elevation changes on the course, wind speed, wind direction, and
air density by showing the adjusted distance to the green (PlaysLike Distance Factors, page63). During a
round, you can tap a distance to the green to view the PlaysLike distance.
TIP: You can configure what data is factored into the PlaysLike adjustments in the activity settings (PlaysLike
Settings, page64).
: Distance plays longer than expected.
: Distance plays as expected.
: Distance plays shorter than expected.
PlaysLike Distance Factors
During a round of golf, you can view how much of the PlaysLike distance adjustments are due to elevation
changes on the course, wind speed and direction, and air density.
Press START, and select PlaysLike.
: The difference in the distance due to elevation changes.
: The difference in the distance due to the wind speed and direction.
: The difference in the distance due to the air density.
Activities and Apps 63
PlaysLike Settings
Hold MENU, and select Activities & Apps > Golf > Golf Settings > PlaysLike.
Wind: Enables wind speed and direction to be included in the PlaysLike distance adjustments.
Weather: Enables air density to be included in the PlaysLike distance adjustments.
Home Conditions: Allows you to manually change the altitude, temperature, and humidity settings used for the
air density.
NOTE: It can be helpful to set weather conditions that match where you typically play. If they do not match
the conditions at your normal course locations, the air density adjustments may seem inaccurate.
Measuring Distance with Touch Targeting
While playing a game, you can use touch targeting to measure the distance to any point on the map.
1 While playing golf, tap the map.
2 Tap or drag your finger to position the target circle .
You can view the distance from your current position to the target circle, and from the target circle to the pin
location.
3 If necessary, select or to zoom in or out.
Viewing Measured Shots
Your device features automatic shot detection and recording. Each time you take a shot along the fairway, the
device records your shot distance so you can view it later.
TIP: Automatic shot detection works best when you wear the device on your leading wrist and make good
contact with the ball. Putts are not detected.
1 While playing golf, press START.
2 Select Previous Shots to view all recorded shot distances.
NOTE: The distance from the most recent shot also displays at the top of the hole information screen.
Manually Measuring a Shot
You can manually add a shot if the watch doesn't detect it. You must add the shot from the location of the
missed shot.
1 Take a shot and watch where your ball lands.
2 From the hole information screen, press START.
3 Select Measure Shot.
4 Press START.
5 Select Add Shot > .
6 If necessary, enter the club you used for the shot.
7 Walk or drive to your ball.
The next time you take a shot, the watch automatically records your last shot distance. If necessary, you can
manually add another shot.
Keeping Score
1 From the hole information screen, press START.
2 Select Scorecard.
The scorecard appears when you are on the green.
3 Press UP or DOWN to scroll through the holes.
4 Press START to select a hole.
5 Press UP or DOWN to set the score.
Your total score is updated.
64 Activities and Apps
Recording Statistics
Before you can record statistics, you must enable statistics tracking (Scoring Settings, page65).
1 From the scorecard, select a hole.
2 Enter the total number of strokes taken, including putts, and press START.
3 Set the number of putts taken, and press START.
NOTE: The number of putts taken is used for statistics tracking only and does not increase your score.
4 If necessary, select an option:
NOTE: If you are on a par 3 hole, fairway information does not appear.
• If your ball hit the fairway, select In Fairway.
• If your ball missed the fairway, select Missed Right or Missed Left.
5 If necessary, enter the number of penalty strokes.
Scoring Settings
Hold MENU, and select Activities & Apps > Golf > Golf Settings > Scoring.
Scoring Method: Changes the method the device uses to keep score.
Handicap Scoring: Enables handicap scoring.
Set Handicap: Sets your handicap when handicap scoring is enabled.
Show Score: Displays your total score for the round at the top of the scorecard (Keeping Score, page64).
Stat Tracking: Enables statistics tracking for the number of putts, greens in regulation, and fairways hit while
playing golf.
Penalties: Enables penalty stroke tracking while playing golf (Recording Statistics, page65).
Prompt: Enables the prompt at the start of a round asking if you want to keep score.
About Stableford Scoring
When you select the Stableford scoring method (Activities and App Settings, page72), points are awarded
based on the number of strokes taken relative to par. At the end of a round, the highest score wins. The device
awards points as specified by the United States Golf Association.
The scorecard for a Stableford scored game shows points instead of strokes.
Points Strokes Taken Relative to Par
0 2 or more over
1 1 over
2 Par
3 1 under
4 2 under
5 3 under
Viewing the Wind Speed and Direction
The wind feature is a pointer that shows the wind speed and direction relative to the pin. The wind feature
requires a connection with the Garmin Golf app.
1 Press START.
2 Select Wind.
The arrow points to the wind direction relative to the pin.
Activities and Apps 65
Viewing the Direction to the Pin
The PinPointer feature is a compass that provides directional assistance when you are unable to see the green.
This feature can help you line up a shot even if you are in the woods or in a deep sand trap.
NOTE: Do not use the PinPointer feature while in a golf cart. Interference from the golf cart can affect the
accuracy of the compass.
1 From the hole information screen, press START.
2 Select PinPointer.
The arrow points to the pin location.
Saving Custom Targets
While playing a round, you can save up to five custom targets for each hole. Saving a target is useful for
recording objects or obstacles that are not shown on the map. You can view the distances to these targets from
the hazards and layups screen (Playing Golf, page60).
1 Stand near the target you want to save.
NOTE: You cannot save a target that is far from the currently selected hole.
2 From the hole information screen, press START.
3 Select Custom Targets.
4 Select a target type.
Big Numbers Mode
You can change the size of the numbers on the hole information screen.
Hold MENU, select the activity settings, and select Big Numbers.
The distance to the back of the green
The distance to the middle of the green or selected pin position
The distance to the front of the green
The current hole number
The par for the current hole
66 Activities and Apps
Swing Tempo Training
The Tempo Training activity helps you perform a more consistent swing. The device measures and displays
your backswing time and downswing time. The device also displays your swing tempo. Swing tempo is the
backswing time divided by the downswing time, expressed in a ratio. A 3 to 1 ratio, or 3.0, is the ideal swing
tempo based on studies of professional golfers.
The Ideal Swing Tempo
You can achieve the ideal 3.0 tempo using different swing timings, for example, 0.7 sec./0.23 sec. or 1.2 sec./
0.4 sec. Each golfer may have a unique swing tempo based on their ability and experience. Garmin provides six
different timings.
The device displays a graph that indicates if your backswing or downswing times are too fast, too slow, or just
right for the selected timing.
Timing choices (backswing to downswing time ratio)
Backswing time
Downswing time
Your tempo
Good timing
Too slow
Too fast
To find your ideal swing timing, you should start with the slowest timing and try it for a few swings. When
the tempo graph is consistently green for both your backswing and downswing times, you can move up to the
next timing. When you find a timing that is comfortable, you can use it to achieve more consistent swings and
performance.
Activities and Apps 67
Analyzing Your Swing Tempo
You must hit a ball to view your swing tempo.
1 Press START.
2 Select Tempo Training.
3 Press START.
4 Select Swing Speed, and select an option.
5 Complete a full swing, and hit the ball.
The watch displays your swing analysis.
Viewing the Tip Sequence
The first time you use the Tempo Training activity, the watch displays a tip sequence to explain how your swing
is analyzed.
1 During your activity, press START.
2 Select Tips.
3 Press START to view the next tip.
Jumpmaster
WARNING
The jumpmaster feature is for use by experienced skydivers only. The jumpmaster feature should not be used
as a primary skydiving altimeter. Failure to input the appropriate jump related information can lead to serious
personal injury or death.
The jumpmaster feature follows military guidelines for calculating the high altitude release point (HARP). The
watch detects automatically when you have jumped to begin navigating toward the desired impact point (DIP)
using the barometer and electronic compass.
Planning a Jump
1 Select a jump type (Jump Types, page68).
2 Enter the jump information (Entering Jump Information, page69).
The device calculates the HARP.
3 Select Go To HARP to start navigation to the HARP.
Jump Types
The jumpmaster feature allows you to set the jump type to one of three types: HAHO, HALO, or Static. The jump
type selected determines what additional setup information is required. For all jump types, drop altitudes and
opening altitudes are measured in feet above ground level (AGL).
HAHO: High Altitude High Opening. The jumpmaster jumps from a very high altitude and opens the parachute
at a high altitude. You must set a DIP and a drop altitude of at least 1,000 feet. The drop altitude is assumed
to be the same as the opening altitude. Common values for a drop altitude range from 12,000 to 24,000 feet
AGL.
HALO: High Altitude Low Opening. The jumpmaster jumps from a very high altitude and opens the parachute at
a low altitude. The required information is the same as the HAHO jump type, plus an opening altitude. The
opening altitude must not be greater than the drop altitude. Common values for an opening altitude range
from 2,000 to 6,000 feet AGL.
Static: The wind speed and direction are assumed to be constant for the duration of the jump. The drop altitude
must be at least 1,000 feet.
68 Activities and Apps
Entering Jump Information
1 Press START.
2 Select Jumpmaster.
3 Select a jump type (Jump Types, page68).
4 Complete one or more actions to enter your jump information:
• Select DIP to set a waypoint for the desired landing location.
• Select Drop Alt. to set the drop altitude AGL (in feet) when the jumpmaster exits the aircraft.
• Select Open Alt to set the open altitude AGL (in feet) when the jumpmaster opens the parachute.
• Select Forward Throw to set the horizontal distance traveled (in meters) due to aircraft speed.
• Select Crs. to HARP to set the direction traveled (in degrees) due to aircraft speed.
• Select Wind to set the wind speed (in knots) and direction (in degrees).
• Select Constant to fine-tune some information for the planned jump. Depending on the jump type, you
can select Percent Max., Safety Factor, K-Open, K-Freefall, or K-Static and enter additional information
(Constant Settings, page70).
• Select Auto to DIP to enable navigation to the DIP automatically after you jump.
• Select Go To HARP to start navigation to the HARP.
Entering Wind Information for HAHO and HALO Jumps
1 Press START.
2 Select Jumpmaster.
3 Select a jump type (Jump Types, page68).
4 Select Wind > Add.
5 Select an altitude.
6 Enter a wind speed in knots and select Done.
7 Enter a wind direction in degrees and select Done.
The wind value is added to the list. Only wind values included in the list are used in calculations.
8 Repeat steps 5–7 for each available altitude.
Resetting Wind Information
1 Press START.
2 Select Jumpmaster.
3 Select HAHO or HALO.
4 Select Wind > Reset.
All wind values are removed from the list.
Entering Wind Information for a Static Jump
1 Press START.
2 Select Jumpmaster > Static > Wind.
3 Enter a wind speed in knots and select Done.
4 Enter a wind direction in degrees and select Done.
Activities and Apps 69
Constant Settings
Select Jumpmaster, select a jump type, and select Constant.
Percent Max.: Sets the jump range for all jump types. A setting less than 100% decreases the drift distance to
the DIP, and a setting greater than 100% increases the drift distance. More experienced jumpmasters may
want to use smaller numbers, and less experienced skydivers may want to use larger numbers.
Safety Factor: Sets the margin of error for a jump (HAHO only). Safety factors are usually integer values of two
or greater, and are determined by the jumpmaster based on specifications for the jump.
K-Freefall: Sets the wind drag value for a parachute during freefall, based on the parachute canopy rating (HALO
only). Each parachute should be labeled with a K value.
K-Open: Sets the wind drag value for an open parachute, based on the parachute canopy rating (HAHO and
HALO). Each parachute should be labeled with a K value.
K-Static: Sets the wind drag value for a parachute during a static jump, based on the parachute canopy rating
(Static only). Each parachute should be labeled with a K value.
Customizing Activities and Apps
You can customize the activities and apps list, data screens, data fields, and other settings.
Adding or Removing a Favorite Activity
The list of your favorite activities appears when you press START from the watch face, and it provides quick
access to the activities you use most frequently. The first time you press START to start an activity, the watch
prompts you to select your favorite activities. You can add or remove favorite activities at any time.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Activities & Apps.
Your favorite activities appear at the top of the list.
3 Select an option:
• To add a favorite activity, select the activity, and select Set as Favorite.
• To remove a favorite activity, select the activity, and select Remove from Favorites.
Changing the Order of an Activity in the Apps List
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
4 Select Reorder.
5 Press UP or DOWN to adjust the position of the activity in the apps list.
70 Activities and Apps
Customizing the Data Screens
You can show, hide, and change the layout and content of data screens for each activity.
NOTE: For dive activities, you can customize the data screens from the Dive Setup menu (Customizing the Dive
Data Screens, page19).
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Activities & Apps.
3 Select the activity to customize.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Data Screens.
6 Select a data screen to customize.
7 Select an option:
• Select Layout to adjust the number of data fields on the data screen.
• Select Data Fields, and select a field to change the data that appears in the field.
TIP: For a list of all the available data fields, go to Data Fields, page182. Not all data fields are available
for all activity types.
• Select Reorder to change the location of the data screen in the loop.
• Select Remove to remove the data screen from the loop.
8 If necessary, select Add New to add a data screen to the loop.
You can add a custom data screen, or select one of the predefined data screens.
Adding a Map to an Activity
You can add the map to the data screens loop for an activity.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Activities & Apps.
3 Select the activity to customize.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Data Screens > Add New > Map.
Creating a Custom Activity
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Add.
3 Select an option:
• Select Copy Activity to create your custom activity starting from one of your saved activities.
• Select Other > Other to create a new custom activity.
4 If necessary, select an activity type.
5 Select a name or enter a custom name.
Duplicate activity names include a number, for example: Bike(2).
6 Select an option:
• Select an option to customize specific activity settings. For example, you can customize the data screens
or auto features.
• Select Done to save and use the custom activity.
7 Select Yes to add the activity to your list of favorites.
Activities and Apps 71
Activities and App Settings
These settings allow you to customize each preloaded activity app based on your needs. For example, you can
customize data pages and enable alerts and training features. Not all settings are available for all activity types.
Hold MENU, select Activities & Apps, select an activity, and select the activity settings.
3D Distance: Calculates your distance traveled using your elevation change as well as your horizontal
movement over ground.
3D Speed: Calculates your speed using your elevation change as well as your horizontal movement over ground.
Accent Color: Sets the accent color for the activity icon.
Add Activity: Adds an activity type to a multisport activity.
Alerts: Sets the training or navigation alerts for the activity (Activity Alerts, page74).
Auto Climb: Detects elevation changes using the built-in altimeter and automatically displays relevant climb
data (Enabling Auto Climb, page77).
Auto Lap: Sets the options for the Auto Lap feature to automatically mark laps. The Auto Distance option
marks laps at a specific distance. The Auto Position option marks laps at a location where you previously
pressed LAP. When you complete a lap, a customizable lap alert message appears. This feature is helpful for
comparing your performance over different parts of an activity.
Auto Pause: Sets the options for the Auto Pause
®
feature to stop recording data when you stop moving or when
you drop below a specified speed. This feature is helpful if your activity includes stop lights or other places
where you must stop.
Auto Rest: Automatically creates a rest interval when you stop moving during a pool swim activity (Swim Auto
Rest and Manual Rest, page46). Sets the options for automatically starting and stopping the rest timer for the
ultra run activity (Ultra Run Auto Rest Settings, page45).
Auto Run: Automatically detects ski or water sport runs using the built-in accelerometer (Viewing Your Ski Runs,
page58, Viewing Your Water Sport Runs, page56).
Auto Scroll: Automatically scrolls through all of the activity data screens while the activity timer is running.
Auto Set: Automatically starts and stops exercise sets during a strength training activity.
Auto Sport Change: Automatically detects a transition to the next sport in a multisport activity, such as a
triathlon.
Auto Start: Automatically starts a motocross or BMX activity when you start moving.
Big Numbers: Changes the size of the numbers on the data screens (Big Numbers Mode, page66).
Broadcast Heart Rate: Automatically broadcasts heart rate data from your watch to paired devices when you
start the activity (Broadcasting Heart Rate Data, page125).
Broadcast to GameOn: Automatically broadcasts biometrics data to the Garmin GameOn app when you start a
gaming activity (Using the Garmin GameOn
™
App, page50).
ClimbPro: Displays ascent information for upcoming and current climbs while navigating a course (Using
ClimbPro, page76).
Club Prompt: Prompts you to enter which golf club you used after each detected shot to record your club
statistics (Recording Statistics, page65).
Countdown Start: Enables a countdown timer for pool swimming intervals.
Data Screens: Customizes data screens and adds new data screens for the activity (Customizing the Data
Screens, page71).
Driver Distance: Sets the average distance the ball travels on your drive while playing golf.
Edit Weight: Prompts you to add the weight used for an exercise set during a strength training or cardio activity.
Flashlight Strobe: Sets the LED flashlight strobe mode, speed, and color during the activity.
Golf Distance: Sets the unit of measure for distance while playing golf.
Golf Wind Speed: Sets the unit of measure for wind speed while playing golf.
Grading System: Sets the grading system for rating the route difficulty for a rock climbing activity.
Jump Mode: Sets the jump rope activity target to a set time, number of reps, or open ended.
Lane Number: Sets your lane number for track running.
72 Activities and Apps
Lap Key: Enables the LAP button for recording a lap or rest during an activity.
Lock Device: Locks the touchscreen and buttons during a multisport activity to prevent inadvertent button
presses and touchscreen swipes.
Map: Sets the display preferences for the map data screen for the activity (Activity Map Settings, page76).
Map Layers: Sets the map data to show on the map (Showing and Hiding Map Data, page141).
Metronome: Plays tones or vibrates at a steady rhythm to help you improve your performance by training at a
faster, slower, or more consistent cadence. You can set the beats per minute (bpm) of the cadence you want
to maintain, beat frequency, and sound settings.
Mode Tracking: Sets the ascent and descent tracking mode to automatic or manual for backcountry skiing and
snowboarding.
Obstacle Tracking: Saves obstacle locations from your first loop of the course. On repeat loops of the course,
the watch uses the saved locations to switch between obstacle and running intervals (Recording an Obstacle
Racing Activity, page45).
PlaysLike: Configures the "plays like" distance feature, which shows adjusted distances to the green while
playing golf (PlaysLike Distance Icons, page63).
Pool Size: Sets the pool length for pool swimming.
Power Averaging: Controls whether the watch includes zero values for bike power data that occur when you are
not pedaling.
Power Mode: Sets the default power mode for the activity.
Power Save Timeout: Sets the timeout limit for the watch to stay in activity mode while waiting for you to start
the activity, for example, when you are waiting for a race to start. The Normal option sets the watch to enter
low-power watch mode after 5 minutes of inactivity. The Extended option sets the watch to enter low-power
watch mode after 25 minutes of inactivity. The extended mode can result in shorter battery life between
charges.
Record Activity: Enables activity FIT file recording for golf activities. FIT files record fitness information that is
tailored for the Garmin Connect website and app.
Record After Sunset: Sets the watch to record track points after sunset during an expedition.
Record Temperature: Records the ambient temperature around the watch or from a paired temperature sensor.
Record VO2 Max.: Records a VO2 max. estimate for trail run and ultra run activities.
Recording Interval: Sets the frequency for recording track points during an expedition. By default, GPS track
points are recorded once an hour, and they are not recorded after sunset. Recording track points less
frequently maximizes battery life.
Rename: Sets the activity name.
Rep Counting: Records rep counts during a workout. The Workouts Only option records rep counts during
guided workouts only.
Repeat: Records repeats for multisport activities. For example, you can use this option for activities that include
multiple transitions, such as a swimrun.
Restore Defaults: Resets the activity settings.
Route Stats: Records route statistics for indoor climbing activities.
Routing: Sets the preferences for calculating routes for the activity (Routing Settings, page76).
Running Power: Records running power data and customizes the settings (Running Power Settings, page135).
Satellites: Sets the satellite system to use for the activity (Satellite Settings, page77).
Scoring: Sets your golf scoring preferences, enables statistics tracking, and sets your handicap (Scoring
Settings, page65).
Segments: Displays your saved segments for the activity (Segments, page77). The Auto Effort option
automatically adjusts the target race time of a segment based on your performance during the segment.
Segment Alerts: Notifies you about approaching saved segments (Segments, page77).
Self Evaluation: Sets how often you evaluate your perceived effort for the activity (Evaluating an Activity,
page43).
SpeedPro: Records advanced speed metrics for windsurf activity runs.
Activities and Apps 73
Stroke Detect.: Automatically detects your stroke type for pool swimming.
Swimrun Auto Sport Change: Automatically transitions between the swim portion and the run portion of a
swimrun multisport activity.
Touch: Enables the touchscreen during an activity.
Tournament Mode: Disables features that are not allowed during sanctioned golf tournaments.
Transitions: Enables transitions for multisport activities.
Units: Sets the units of measure for the activity.
Vibration Alerts: Notifies you to inhale or exhale during a breathwork activity.
Virtual Caddie: Shows virtual caddie club recommendations automatically, or you can manually access them
from the menu. Appears after you play five rounds of golf, track your clubs, and upload your scorecards to the
Garmin Golf app.
Workout Videos: Plays instructive workout animations for a strength, cardio, yoga, or Pilates activity.
Animations are available for pre-installed workouts and workouts downloaded from your Garmin Connect
account.
Activity Alerts
You can set alerts for each activity, which can help you to train toward specific goals, to increase your
awareness of your environment, and to navigate to your destination. Some alerts are available only for specific
activities. There are three types of alerts: event alerts, range alerts, and recurring alerts.
Event alert: An event alert notifies you one time. The event is a specific value. For example, you can set the
watch to alert you when you burn a specified number of calories.
Range alert: A range alert notifies you each time the watch is above or below a specified range of values. For
example, you can set the watch to alert you when your heart rate is below 60beats per minute (bpm) and
over 210bpm.
Recurring alert: A recurring alert notifies you each time the watch records a specified value or interval. For
example, you can set the watch to alert you every 30minutes.
74 Activities and Apps
Alert Name Alert Type Description
Cadence Range You can set minimum and maximum cadence values.
Calories Event, recurring You can set the number of calories.
Custom Event, recurring
You can select an existing message or create a custom message and select
an alert type.
Distance Event, recurring You can set a distance interval.
Elevation Range You can set minimum and maximum elevation values.
Heart Rate Range
You can set minimum and maximum heart rate values or select zone
changes. See About Heart Rate Zones, page153 and Heart Rate Zone Calcu
lations, page155.
Pace Range You can set minimum and maximum pace values.
Pacing Recurring You can set a target swim pace.
Power Range You can set the high or low power level.
Proximity Event You can set a radius from a saved location.
Run/Walk Recurring You can set timed walking breaks at regular intervals.
Running Power Event, range You can set minimum and maximum power zone values.
Speed Range You can set minimum and maximum speed values.
Stroke Rate Range You can set high or low strokes per minute.
Time Event, recurring You can set a time interval.
Track Timer Recurring You can set a track time interval in seconds.
Setting an Alert
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Alerts.
6 Select an option:
• Select Add New to add a new alert for the activity.
• Select the alert name to edit an existing alert.
7 If necessary, select the type of alert.
8 Select a zone, enter the minimum and maximum values, or enter a custom value for the alert.
9 If necessary, turn on the alert.
For event and recurring alerts, a message appears each time you reach the alert value. For range alerts, a
message appears each time you exceed or drop below the specified range (minimum and maximum values).
Activities and Apps 75
Activity Map Settings
You can customize the appearance of the map data screen for each activity.
Hold MENU, select Activities & Apps, select an activity, select the activity settings, and select Map.
Configure Maps: Shows data from installed map products.
Marine Chart Mode: Enables the nautical chart when displaying marine data. This option displays various map
features in different colors so the marine data is more readable and the map reflects the drawing scheme of
paper charts.
Use Sys. Settings: Enables the watch to use the preferences from the map system settings (Map Settings,
page139). When this setting is disabled, you can customize the map settings for the activity.
Routing Settings
You can change the routing settings to customize the way the watch calculates routes for each activity.
NOTE: Not all settings are available for all activity types.
Hold MENU, select Activities & Apps, select an activity, select the activity settings, and select Routing.
Activity: Sets an activity for routing. The watch calculates routes optimized for the type of activity you are doing.
Popularity Routing: Calculates routes based on the most popular runs and rides from Garmin Connect.
Courses: Sets how you navigate courses using the watch. Use the Follow Course option to navigate a course
exactly as it appears, without recalculating. Use the Use Map option to navigate a course using routable
maps, and recalculate the route if you stray from the course.
Calculation Method: Sets the calculation method to minimize the time, distance, or ascent in routes.
Avoidances: Sets the road or transportation types to avoid in routes.
Type: Sets the behavior of the pointer that appears during direct routing.
Using ClimbPro
The ClimbPro feature helps you manage your effort for the upcoming climbs on a course. You can view climb
details, including gradient, distance, and elevation gain, before or in real time while following a course. Cycling
climb categories, based on length and gradient, are indicated by color.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select ClimbPro > Status > When Navigating.
6 Select an option:
• Select Data Field to customize the data field that appears on the ClimbPro screen.
• Select Alert to set alerts at the start of a climb or at a certain distance from the climb.
• Select Descents to turn descents on or off for running activities.
• Select Climb Detection to choose the types of climbs detected during cycling activities.
7 Review the climbs and course details for the course (Viewing or Editing Course Details, page166).
8 Start following a saved course (Navigating to a Destination, page161).
76 Activities and Apps
Enabling Auto Climb
You can use the auto climb feature to detect elevation changes automatically. You can use it during activities
such as climbing, hiking, running, or biking.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Auto Climb > Status.
6 Select Always or When Not Navigating.
7 Select an option:
• Select Run Screen to identify which data screen appears while running.
• Select Climb Screen to identify which data screen appears while climbing.
• Select Invert Colors to reverse the display colors when changing modes.
• Select Vertical Speed to set the rate of ascent over time.
• Select Mode Switch to set how quickly the device changes modes.
NOTE: The Current Screen option allows you to automatically switch to the last screen you were viewing
before the auto climb transition occurred.
Satellite Settings
You can change the satellite settings to customize the satellite systems used for each activity. For more
information about satellite systems, go to garmin.com/aboutGPS.
Hold MENU, select Activities & Apps, select an activity, select the activity settings, and select Satellites.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
Off: Disables satellite systems for the activity.
Use Default: Enables the watch to use the default system setting for satellites (System Settings, page169).
GPS Only: Enables the GPS satellite system.
All Systems: Enables multiple satellite systems. Using multiple satellite systems together offers increased
performance in challenging environments and faster position acquisition than using GPS only. However,
using multiple systems can reduce battery life more quickly than using GPS only.
All + Multi-Band: Enables multiple satellite systems on multiple frequency bands. Multi-band systems use
multiple frequency bands and allow for more consistent track logs, improved positioning, improved multi-
path errors, and fewer atmospheric errors when using the watch in challenging environments.
Auto Select: Enables the watch to use SatIQ
™
technology to dynamically select the best multi-band system
based on your environment. The Auto Select setting offers the best positioning accuracy while still
prioritizing battery life.
UltraTrac: Records track points and sensor data less frequently. Enabling the UltraTrac feature increases
battery life but decreases the quality of recorded activities. You should use the UltraTrac feature for activities
that demand longer battery life and for which frequent sensor data updates are less important.
Segments
You can send running or cycling segments from your Garmin Connect account to your device. After a segment
is saved to your device, you can race a segment, trying to match or exceed your personal record or other
participants who have raced the segment.
NOTE: When you download a course from your Garmin Connect account, you can download all of the available
segments in the course.
Activities and Apps 77
Strava
™
Segments
You can download Strava segments to your Descent device. Follow Strava segments to compare your
performance with your past rides, friends, and pros who have ridden the same segment.
To sign up for a Strava membership, go to the segments menu in your Garmin Connect account. For more
information, go to www.strava.com.
The information in this manual applies to both Garmin Connect segments and Strava segments.
Viewing Segment Details
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Segments.
6 Select a segment.
7 Select an option:
• Select Race Times to view the time and average speed or pace for the segment leader.
• Select Map to view the segment on the map.
• Select Elevation Plot to view an elevation plot of the segment.
Racing a Segment
Segments are virtual race courses. You can race a segment, and compare your performance to past activities,
others' performance, connections in your Garmin Connect account, or other members of the running or cycling
communities. You can upload your activity data to your Garmin Connect account to view your segment position.
NOTE: If your Garmin Connect account and Strava account are linked, your activity is automatically sent to your
Strava account so you can review the segment position.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select an activity.
3 Go for a run or ride.
When you approach a segment, a message appears, and you can race the segment.
4 Start racing the segment.
A message appears when the segment is complete.
78 Activities and Apps
Applied Ballistics
®
WARNING
The Applied Ballistics feature is intended to provide accurate elevation and windage solutions based on gun and
bullet profiles and measurements of current conditions only. Depending on your environment, conditions may
change rapidly. Changes in environmental conditions, like wind gusts or downrange winds, may have an effect
on the accuracy of your shot. Elevation and windage solutions are suggestions only based upon your input into
the feature. Take readings often and carefully, and allow the readings to stabilize after significant changes in
environmental conditions. Always allow a margin of safety for changing conditions and reading errors.
Always understand your target and what lies beyond your target before taking a shot. Failure to account for your
shooting environment could cause property damage, injury, or death.
The Applied Ballistics feature offers customized aiming solutions for long-range shooting based on your
rifle characteristics, bullet characteristics, and various environmental conditions. You can enter parameters
including wind, temperature, humidity, range, and firing direction.
This feature provides the information you need to fire long-range projectiles, including elevation
holdover, windage, and time of flight. It also includes custom drag models for your bullet type. Go to
appliedballisticsllc.com for more details about this feature. See the Applied Ballistics Glossary of Terms,
page84 for descriptions of the terms and data fields.
NOTE: You may need to upgrade the ballistic solver in the Applied Ballistics Quantum app to unlock all Applied
Ballistics features (Applied Ballistics Quantum App, page79).
Applied Ballistics Quantum App
The Applied Ballistics Quantum app allows you to manage ballistic profiles on your Descent watch, or upgrade
your ballistic solver, if necessary. You can download the Applied Ballistics Quantum app from the app store on
your phone.
Applied Ballistics Options
From the watch face, press START, select Applied Ballistics, and press START.
Quick Edit: Allows you to quickly edit the range, direction of fire, and wind information (Quickly Editing Shooting
Conditions, page80).
Range Card: Allows you to view data for various ranges based on user input parameters. You can change
fields (Customizing the Range Card Fields, page80), edit the range increment (Editing the Range Increment,
page80), and set the base range (Setting the Base Range, page81).
Target Card: Allows you to view range, elevation, and windage for ten targets based on user input parameters.
Environment: Allows you to customize atmospheric conditions for your current environment. You can enter
custom values, use the pressure and latitude values from the internal sensor in the device, or use the
temperature value from a connected tempe
™
sensor (Environment, page80).
Target: Allows you to customize long-range shooting conditions for your current target. You can change the
selected target and customize conditions for up to ten targets (Changing the Target, page81).
Profile: Allows you to customize gun properties (Editing Gun Properties, page82), bullet properties (Editing
Bullet Properties, page82), and output units of measure for your current profile. You can change the
selected profile (Selecting a Different Profile, page81) and add additional profiles (Adding a Profile,
page81).
Change Fields: Allows you to customize the data fields on the profile data screen (Customizing the Profile Data
Screen, page82).
Setup: Allows you to select the units of measure and enable the windage and elevation solution options.
Applied Ballistics
®
79
Quickly Editing Shooting Conditions
You can edit the range, direction of fire, and wind information.
1 From the Applied Ballistics app, press START.
2 Select Quick Edit.
TIP: You can press DOWN or UP to edit each value, and press START to move to the next field.
3 Set the RNG value to the target distance.
4 Set the DOF value to your actual direction of fire (either manually or by using the compass).
5 Set the W 1 value to the low wind speed.
6 Set the W 2 value to the high wind speed.
7 Set the DIR value to the direction the wind is coming from.
8 Press BACK to save your settings.
Environment
Editing the Environment
1 From the Applied Ballistics app, press START.
2 Select Environment.
3 Select an option to edit.
Enabling Auto Update
You can use the auto update feature to update the latitude and pressure values automatically. When connected
to a tempe sensor, the temperature value also updates. When connected to a weather meter, the wind speed,
wind direction, and humidity values also update. The values update every five minutes.
1 From the Applied Ballistics app, press START.
2 Select Environment > Auto Update > On.
Range Card
Customizing the Range Card Fields
1 From the Applied Ballistics app, press START.
2 Select Range Card.
TIP: You can press START to quickly view different data fields for the third column.
3 Hold START.
4 Select Change Fields.
5 Press START to scroll to a field.
6 Press DOWN or UP to change the field.
7 Press BACK to save your changes.
Editing the Range Increment
1 From the Applied Ballistics app, press START.
2 Select Range Card.
3 Hold START.
4 Select Range Increment.
5 Enter a value.
80 Applied Ballistics
®
Setting the Base Range
1 From the Applied Ballistics app, press START.
2 Select Range Card.
3 Hold START.
4 Select Base Range.
5 Enter a value.
Targets
Changing the Target
1 From the Applied Ballistics app, press START.
2 Select Target.
3 Select a target.
4 Select Set as Current.
Editing the Target
1 From the Applied Ballistics app, press START.
2 Select Target.
3 Select a target.
4 Select an option to edit.
Profile
Selecting a Different Profile
1 From the Applied Ballistics app, press START.
2 Select Profile > Profile.
3 Select a profile.
4 Select Change Profile.
Adding a Profile
You can add a .pro file that contains profile information by creating it using the Applied Ballistics Quantum app
and transferring the file to the AB folder on the device. You can also create a profile using your Garmin device.
1 From the Applied Ballistics app, press START.
2 Select Profile > Profile > + Profile.
3 Select an option:
• To customize the bullet properties, select Bullet Properties (Editing Bullet Properties, page82).
• To customize the gun properties, select Gun Properties (Editing Gun Properties, page82).
• To change the units of measure for the output fields, select Output Units.
Deleting a Profile
1 From the Applied Ballistics app, press START.
2 Select Profile > Profile.
3 Select a profile.
4 Select Delete Profile.
Applied Ballistics
®
81
Customizing the Profile Data Screen
1 During an Applied Ballistics activity, press DOWN to scroll to the profile data screen.
2 Press START.
3 Select Change Fields.
4 Press DOWN or UP to scroll to a field.
5 Press START to change the field.
6 Press BACK to save your changes.
Editing Bullet Properties
1 From the Applied Ballistics app, press START.
2 Select Profile > Bullet Properties.
3 Select an option:
• To automatically enter bullet properties from the Applied Ballistics bullet database, select Bullet
Database, select your ballistic solver, and select the bullet caliber, manufacturer, bullet, and drag curve.
NOTE: You can select the caliber of your bullet to search a list of bullets within that caliber. Not all
cartridge names match the actual bullet caliber. For example, a 300 Win Mag is a .308 caliber bullet.
• To manually enter bullet properties if your bullet is not in the bullet database, press DOWN to scroll
through the options, and select the values to edit.
NOTE: You can find this information on the bullet manufacturer's website.
Editing Gun Properties
1 From the Applied Ballistics app, press START.
2 Select Profile > Gun Properties.
3 Select an option to edit.
Calibrating the Muzzle Velocity
Calibrating the muzzle velocity provides a more accurate solution in the supersonic range for your specific
firearm.
1 From the Applied Ballistics app, press START.
2 Select Profile > Gun Properties > Calibrate Muzzle Velocity.
3 Select an option:
• Select Range to edit the range.
• Select True Drop to edit the drop distance.
4 Select .
Calibrating the Drop Scale Factor
Garmin recommends you calibrate the muzzle velocity prior to the drop scale factor.
Calibrating the drop scale factor provides a more accurate solution at or beyond the transonic range for your
specific firearm.
1 From the Applied Ballistics app, press START.
2 Select Profile > Gun Properties > Calibrate DSF.
3 Select an option:
• Select Range to edit the range.
• Select True Drop to edit the drop distance.
4 Select .
82 Applied Ballistics
®
Viewing the Drop Scale Factor Table
The drop scale factor table is populated after you calibrate the drop scale factor. If necessary, you can reset the
table values to zero.
1 From the Applied Ballistics app, press START.
2 Select Profile > Gun Properties > View DSF Table.
3 If necessary, hold MENU, and select Clear DSF Table.
The table values reset to zero.
Editing the Muzzle Velocity and Temperature Table
1 From the Applied Ballistics app, press START.
2 Select Profile > Gun Properties > MV-Temp Table.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Edit.
5 Press DOWN or UP to scroll through the table.
6 Press START to edit a value.
7 Press BACK to save your changes.
8 Press BACK.
9 Select Muzzle Velocity > Enable MV-Temp to set the muzzle velocity using the temperature table.
Clearing the Muzzle Velocity and Temperature Table
1 From the Applied Ballistics app, press START.
2 Select Profile > Gun Properties > MV-Temp Table.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Clear MV-Temp.
Applied Ballistics
®
83
Applied Ballistics Glossary of Terms
Shooting Solution Fields
DOF: The direction of fire, with north at 0 degrees and east at 90 degrees. Input field.
TIP: You can use the compass to set this value by pointing the top of the device toward the direction of
fire. The current compass value appears in the DOF field. You can press START to use this value. You can
manually enter a value by pressing DOWN or UP.
NOTE: The DOF is used only for calculating the Coriolis effect. If you are shooting at a target less than 1,000
yards away, this input field is optional.
Elevation: The vertical portion of the aiming solution, displayed in milliradians (mil) or minute of angle (MOA).
RNG: The distance to the target, displayed in yards or meters. Input field.
W 1/2: The wind speed 1, wind speed 2, and wind direction. For example, if the wind direction (DIR) is 9:00, the
wind is blowing left to right as viewed by the shooter. Input field.
NOTE: The wind speed 2 field is optional. Using both wind speed 1 and wind speed 2 is not an effective way
to account for different wind speeds at different distances between you and the target. Using these fields
is a way to bracket (isolate) the wind values and calculate minimum and maximum windage values for the
solution.
Windage 1: The horizontal portion of the aiming solution based on the wind speed 1 and wind direction,
displayed in milliradians (mil) or minute of angle (MOA).
Windage 2: The horizontal portion of the aiming solution based on the wind speed 2 and wind direction,
displayed in milliradians (mil) or minute of angle (MOA).
Additional Output Fields
Aero. Jump. Effect: The amount of the elevation solution attributed to aerodynamic jump. Aerodynamic jump is
the vertical deflection of the bullet due to a crosswind. Aerodynamic jump is calculated based on the wind
speed 1 value. If there is no crosswind component or wind value, this value is zero.
Bullet Drop: The total drop the bullet experiences along its flight path, displayed in inches.
Cos. Incl. Ang.: The cosine of the inclination angle to the target.
H. Cor. Effect: The horizontal Coriolis effect. The horizontal Coriolis effect is the amount of the windage
solution attributed to the Coriolis effect. This is always calculated by the device, although the impact may be
minimal if you are not shooting at extended range.
Lead: The horizontal correction needed to hit a target moving left or right at a given speed.
TIP: When you enter the speed of your target, the device factors the necessary windage required into the total
windage value.
Max. Ord.: The maximum ordinance. The maximum ordinance is the maximum height above the axis of the
barrel that a bullet will reach along its flight path.
Max. Ord. Range: The range at which the bullet will reach its maximum ordinance.
Remaining Energy: The remaining energy of the bullet at target impact, displayed in foot-pounds of force (ft. lbf)
or joules (J).
Spin Drift: The amount of the windage solution attributed to the spin drift (gyroscopic drift). For example, in the
northern hemisphere, a bullet shot out of a right-hand twist barrel will always deflect slightly to the right as it
travels.
Time of Flight: The time of flight, which indicates the time required for a bullet to reach its target at a given
range.
V. Cor. Effect: The vertical Coriolis effect. The vertical Coriolis effect is the amount of the elevation solution
attributed to the Coriolis effect. This is always calculated by the device, although the impact may be minimal
if you are not shooting at extended range.
Velocity: The estimated velocity of the bullet when it impacts the target.
Velocity Mach: The estimated velocity of the bullet when it impacts the target, displayed as a factor of mach
speed.
Environment Fields
84 Applied Ballistics
®
Amb/Stn Pressure: The ambient (station) pressure. Ambient pressure is not adjusted to represent sea level
(barometric) pressure. Ambient pressure is required for the ballistics shooting solution. Input field.
TIP: You can manually enter this value, or you can select the Use Current Pressure option to use the pressure
value from the internal sensor in the device.
Humidity: The percentage of moisture in the air. Input field.
Latitude: The horizontal location on the Earth's surface. Negative values are below the equator. Positive values
are above the equator. This value is used to calculate the vertical and horizontal Coriolis drift. Input field.
TIP: You can select the Use Current Position option to use the GPS coordinates from your device.
NOTE: The Latitude is used only for calculating the Coriolis effect. If you are shooting at a target less than
1,000 yards away, this input field is optional.
Temperature: The temperature at your current location. Input field.
TIP: You can manually enter the temperature reading from a connected tempe sensor or other temperature
source. This field does not automatically update when connected to a tempe sensor.
Wind Direction: The direction from which the wind is coming. For example, a 9:00 wind blows from your left to
your right. Input field.
Wind Speed 1: The wind speed used in the shooting solution. Input field.
Wind Speed 2: An optional, additional wind speed used in the shooting solution. Input field.
TIP: You can use two wind speeds to calculate a windage solution that contains a high and low value. The
actual windage to apply for the shot should fall in this range.
Target Fields
Direction of Fire: The direction of fire, with north at 0 degrees and east at 90 degrees. Input field.
NOTE: The Direction of Fire is used only for calculating the Coriolis effect. If you are shooting at a target less
than 1,000 yards away, this input field is optional.
Inclination: The angle of inclination of the shot. A negative value indicates a downhill shot. A positive values
indicates an uphill shot. The shooting solution multiplies the vertical portion of the solution by the cosine of
the inclination angle to calculate the adjusted solution for an uphill or downhill shot. Input field.
Range: The distance to the target, displayed in yards or meters. Input field.
Speed: The speed of a moving target, displayed in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h). A
negative value indicates a target moving left. A positive value indicates a target moving right. Input field.
Profile Fields, Bullet Properties
Ballistic Coefficient: The manufacturer's ballistic coefficient for your bullet. Input field.
TIP: When you use one of the Applied Ballistics custom drag curves, the ballistic coefficient will display a
value of 1.000.
Bullet Diameter: The bullet diameter measured in inches. Input field.
NOTE: The diameter of the bullet may vary from the common name of the round. For example, a 300 Win
Mag is actually .308 inches in diameter.
Bullet Length: The length of the bullet measured in inches. Input field.
Bullet Weight: The bullet weight measured in grains. Input field.
Drag Curve: The Applied Ballistics custom drag curve, or the G1 or G7 standard projectile models. Input field.
NOTE: Most long range rifle bullets are closer to the G7 standard.
Profile Fields, Gun Properties
Muzzle Velocity: The speed of the bullet as it leaves the muzzle. Input field.
NOTE: This field is required for accurate calculations by the shooting solution. If you calibrate the muzzle
velocity, this field may be updated automatically for a more accurate firing solution.
Output Units: The output units of measure. A milliradian (mil) is 3.438 inches at 100 yards. A minute of angle
(MOA) is 1.047 inches at 100 yards.
Sight Height: The distance from the center axis of the rifle barrel to the center axis of the scope. Input field.
TIP: You can easily determine this value by measuring from the top of the bolt to the center of the windage
turret, and adding half of the diameter of the bolt.
Applied Ballistics
®
85
SSF - Elevation: A linear multiplier that accounts for vertical scaling. Not all rifle scopes track perfectly, so the
ballistics solution requires a correction to scale according to a particular rifle scope. For example, if a turret is
moved 10 mil but the impact is 9 mil, the sight scale is 0.9. Input field.
SSF - Windage: A linear multiplier that accounts for horizontal scaling. Not all rifle scopes track perfectly, so the
ballistics solution requires a correction to scale according to a particular rifle scope. For example, if a turret is
moved 10 mil but the impact is 9 mil, the sight scale is 0.9. Input field.
Twist Rate: The distance it takes for the rifling of your barrel to make one full rotation. Rifle twist is often
provided by the gun or barrel manufacturer. Input field.
Zero Height: An optional modification to impact elevation at zero range. This is often used when adding a
suppressor or using a subsonic load. For example, if you add a suppressor and your bullet impacts the target
1 inch higher than expected, your Zero Height is 1 inch. You must set this to zero when you remove the
suppressor. Input field.
Zero Offset: An optional modification to impact windage at zero range. This is often used when adding a
suppressor or using a subsonic load. For example, if you add a suppressor and your bullet impacts the target
1 inch to the left of the expected impact, your Zero Offset is -1 inch. You must set this to zero when you
remove the suppressor. Input field.
Zero Range: The range at which the rifle was zeroed. Input field.
Profile Fields, Gun Properties, Calibrate Muzzle Velocity
Range: The distance from the muzzle to the target. Input field.
TIP: You should enter a value as close as possible to the range suggested in the shooting solution. This is the
range where the bullet slows to Mach 1.2 and begins to enter the transonic range.
True Drop: The actual distance the bullet falls while in flight to the target, displayed in milliradians (mil) or
minute of angle (MOA). Input field.
Profile Fields, Gun Properties, Calibrate Drop Scale Factor
Range: The range from which you are shooting. Input field.
TIP: This range should be within 90% of the recommended range suggested in the shooting solution. Values
that are less than 80% of the recommended range will not provide a valid adjustment.
True Drop: The actual distance the bullet falls when fired at a specific range, displayed in milliradians (mil) or
minute of angle (MOA). Input field.
Training
Unified Training Status
When you use more than one Garmin device with your Garmin Connect account, you can choose which device is
the primary data source for everyday use and for training purposes.
From the Garmin Connect app, select > Settings.
Primary Training Device: Sets the priority data source for training metrics like your training status and load
focus.
Primary Wearable: Sets the priority data source for daily health metrics like steps and sleep. This should be the
watch you wear most often.
TIP: For the most accurate results, Garmin recommends that you sync often with your Garmin Connect account.
86 Training
Syncing Activities and Performance Measurements
You can sync activities and performance measurements from other Garmin devices to your Descent watch
using your Garmin Connect account. This allows your watch to more accurately reflect your training and fitness.
For example, you can record a ride with an Edge
®
bike computer, and view your activity details and recovery time
on your Descent watch.
Sync your Descent watch and other Garmin devices to your Garmin Connect account.
TIP: You can set a primary training device and primary wearable in the Garmin Connect app (Unified Training
Status, page86).
Recent activities and performance measurements from your other Garmin devices appear on your Descent
watch.
Training for a Race Event
Your watch can suggest daily workouts to help you train for a running or cycling event, if you have a VO2 max.
estimate (About VO2 Max. Estimates, page104).
1 From the Garmin Connect app, select .
2 Select Training & Planning > Races & Events > Find an Event.
3 Search for an event in your area.
You can also select Create an Event to create your own event.
4 Select Add to Calendar.
5 Sync your watch with your Garmin Connect account.
6 On your watch, scroll to the primary race glance to see a countdown to your primary race event.
7 From the watch face, press START, and select a running or cycling activity.
NOTE: If you have completed at least one outdoor run with heart rate data or one ride with heart rate and
power data, daily suggested workouts appear on your watch.
Race Calendar and Primary Race
When you add a race event to your Garmin Connect calendar, you can view the event on your watch by adding
the primary race glance (Glances, page98). The event date must be in the next 365 days. The watch displays a
countdown to the event, your goal time or predicted finish time (running events only), and weather information.
NOTE: Historical weather information for the location and date is available right away. Local forecast data
appears approximately 14 days before the event.
If you add more than one race event, you are prompted to choose a primary event.
Depending on the available course data for your event, you can view elevation data, the course map, and add a
PacePro
™
plan (PacePro Training, page91).
Workouts
You can create custom workouts that include goals for each workout step and for varied distances, times, and
calories. During your activity, you can view workout-specific data screens that contain workout step information,
such as the workout step distance or current pace.
On your watch: You can open the workouts app from the activity list to show all workouts currently loaded on
your watch (Activities and Apps, page42).
You can also view your workout history.
On the app: You can create and find more workouts, or select a training plan that has built-in workouts and
transfer them to your watch (Following a Workout From Garmin Connect, page88).
You can schedule workouts.
You can update and edit your current workouts.
Training 87
Starting a Workout
Your device can guide you through multiple steps in a workout.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU, and select Training.
4 Select an option:
• To start an interval workout or a workout with a training target, select Quick Workout (Starting an Interval
Workout, page89, Setting a Training Target, page90).
• To start a preloaded or saved workout, select Workout Library (Following a Workout From Garmin Connect,
page88).
• To start a scheduled workout from your Garmin Connect training calendar, select Training Calendar
(About the Training Calendar, page91).
NOTE: Not all options are available for all activity types.
5 Select a workout.
NOTE: Only workouts that are compatible with the selected activity appear in the list.
6 If necessary, select Do Workout.
7 Press START to start the activity timer.
After you begin a workout, the device displays each step of the workout, step notes (optional), the target
(optional), and the current workout data. For strength, yoga, cardio, or Pilates activities, an instructional
animation appears.
Workout Execution Score
After you complete a workout, the watch displays your workout execution score based on how accurately you
completed the workout. The active workout steps are prioritized the highest, measuring how closely your effort
level matches the step target, and also that you completed all the steps. Warm up and recovery steps have a
lower impact on your score. The cool down step does not impact your workout execution score at all.
NOTE: Your workout execution score appears only for workouts with heart rate, speed, pace, or power targets.
Good, 67 to 100%
Average, 34 to 66%
Low, 0 to 33%
Following a Workout From Garmin Connect
Before you can download a workout from Garmin Connect, you must have a Garmin Connect account (Garmin
Connect, page147).
1 Select an option:
• Open the Garmin Connect app, and select .
• Go to connect.garmin.com.
2 Select Training & Planning > Workouts.
3 Find a workout, or create and save a new workout.
4 Select or Send to Device.
5 Follow the on-screen instructions.
88 Training
Following a Daily Suggested Workout
Before the watch can suggest a daily run or bike workout, you must have a VO2 max. estimate for that activity
(About VO2 Max. Estimates, page104).
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Run or Bike.
The daily suggested workout appears.
3 Press START, and select an option:
• To do the workout, select Do Workout.
• To discard the workout, select Dismiss.
• To preview the workout steps, select Steps.
• To view workout suggestions for the upcoming week, select More Suggestions.
• To view the workout settings, such as Target Type, select Settings.
The suggested workout updates automatically to changes in training habits, recovery time, and VO2 max.
Starting an Interval Workout
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Quick Workout > Intervals.
5 Select an option:
• Select Open Repeats to mark your intervals and rest periods manually by pressing LAP.
• Select Structured Repeats > Do Workout to use an interval workout based on distance or time.
6 If necessary, select Yes to include a warm up before the workout.
7 Press START to start the activity timer.
8 When your interval workout has a warm up, press LAP to begin the first interval.
9 Follow the on-screen instructions.
10 At any time, press LAP to stop the current interval or rest period and transition to the next interval or rest
period (optional).
After you complete all of the intervals, a message appears.
Customizing an Interval Workout
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Quick Workout > Intervals > Structured Repeats > Edit.
5 Select one or more options:
• To set the interval duration and type, select Interval.
• To set the rest duration and type, select Rest.
• To set the number of repetitions, select Repeat.
• To add an open-ended warm up to your workout, select Warm Up > On.
• To add an open-ended cool down to your workout, select Cool Down > On.
6 Press BACK.
The watch saves your custom interval workout until you edit the workout again.
Training 89
Recording a Critical Swim Speed Test
Your Critical Swim Speed (CSS) value is the result of a time-trial-based test expressed as a pace per 100 meters.
Your CSS is the theoretical speed you can maintain continuously without exhaustion. You can use your CSS to
guide your training pace and monitor your improvement.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Pool Swim.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Workout Library > Critical Swim Speed > Do Critical Swim Speed Test.
5 Press DOWN to preview the workout steps (optional).
6 Press START.
7 Press START to start the activity timer.
8 Follow the on-screen instructions.
Using Virtual Partner
®
Your Virtual Partner is a training tool designed to help you meet your goals. You can set a pace for the Virtual
Partner and race against it.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Activities & Apps.
3 Select an activity.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Data Screens > Add New > Virtual Partner.
6 Enter a pace or speed value.
7 Press UP or DOWN to change the location of the Virtual Partner screen (optional).
8 Start your activity (Starting an Activity, page42).
9 Press UP or DOWN to scroll to the Virtual Partner screen and see who is leading.
Setting a Training Target
The training target feature works with the Virtual Partner feature so you can train toward a set distance,
distance and time, distance and pace, or distance and speed goal. During your training activity, the watch gives
you real-time feedback about how close you are to achieving your training target.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training.
5 Select an option:
• Select Set a Target.
• Select Quick Workout.
NOTE: Not all options are available for all activity types.
6 Select an option:
• Select Distance Only to select a preset distance or enter a custom distance.
• Select Distance and Time to select a distance and time target.
• Select Distance and Pace or Distance and Speed to select a distance and pace or speed target.
The training target screen appears and displays your estimated finish time.
7 Press START to start the activity timer.
TIP: You can hold MENU, and select Cancel Target to cancel the training target.
90 Training
Racing a Previous Activity
You can race a previously recorded or downloaded activity. This feature works with the Virtual Partner feature
so you can see how far ahead or behind you are during the activity.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Race Yourself.
5 Select an option:
• Select From History to select a previously recorded activity from your device.
• Select Downloaded to select an activity you downloaded from your Garmin Connect account.
6 Select the activity.
The Virtual Partner screen appears indicating your estimated finish time.
7 Press START to start the activity timer.
8 After you complete your activity, press STOP, and select Save.
About the Training Calendar
The training calendar on your watch is an extension of the training calendar or schedule you set up in your
Garmin Connect account. After you have added a few workouts to the Garmin Connect calendar, you can send
them to your device. All scheduled workouts sent to the device appear in the calendar glance. When you select
a day in the calendar, you can view or do the workout. The scheduled workout stays on your watch whether
you complete it or skip it. When you send scheduled workouts from Garmin Connect, they overwrite the existing
training calendar.
Using Garmin Connect Training Plans
Before you can download and use a training plan, you must have a Garmin Connect account (Garmin Connect,
page147), and you must pair the Descent watch with a compatible phone.
1 From the Garmin Connect app, select .
2 Select Training & Planning > Garmin Coach Plans.
3 Select and schedule a training plan.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions.
5 Review the training plan in your calendar.
Adaptive Training Plans
Your Garmin Connect account has an adaptive training plan and Garmin coach to fit your training goals. For
example, you can answer a few questions and find a plan to help you complete a 5 km race. The plan adjusts
to your current level of fitness, coaching and schedule preferences, and race date. When you start a plan, the
Garmin coach glance is added to the glance loop on your Descent watch.
PacePro Training
Many runners like to wear a pace band during a race to help achieve their race goal. The PacePro feature allows
you to create a custom pace band based on distance and pace or distance and time. You can also create a pace
band for a known course to optimize your pace effort based on elevation changes.
You can create a PacePro plan using the Garmin Connect app. You can preview the splits and elevation plot
before you run the course.
Training 91
Downloading a PacePro Plan from Garmin Connect
Before you can download a PacePro plan from Garmin Connect, you must have a Garmin Connect account
(Garmin Connect, page147).
1 Select an option:
• Open the Garmin Connect app, and select .
• Go to connect.garmin.com.
2 Select Training & Planning > PacePro Pacing Strategies.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions to create and save a PacePro plan.
4 Select or Send to Device.
Creating a PacePro Plan on Your Watch
Before you can create a PacePro plan on your watch, you must create a course (Creating a Course on Garmin
Connect, page165).
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select an outdoor running activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Navigation > Courses.
5 Select a course.
6 Select PacePro > Create New.
7 Select an option:
• Select Goal Pace, and enter your target pace.
• Select Goal Time, and enter your target time.
The watch displays your custom pace band.
8 Press START.
9 Select an option:
• Select Accept Plan to start the plan.
• Select View Splits to preview the splits.
• Select Elevation Plot to view an elevation plot of the course.
• Select Map to view the course on the map.
• Select Remove to discard the plan.
92 Training
Starting a PacePro Plan
Before you can start a PacePro plan, you must download a plan from your Garmin Connect account.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select an outdoor running activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > PacePro Plans.
5 Select a plan.
6 Press START.
TIP: You can preview the splits, elevation plot, and the map before you accept the PacePro plan.
7 Select Accept Plan to start the plan.
8 If necessary, select Yes to enable course navigation.
9 Press START to start the activity timer.
Target split pace
Current split pace
Completion progress for the split
Distance remaining in the split
Overall time ahead of or behind your target time
TIP:
You can hold MENU, and select Stop PacePro > Yes to stop the PacePro plan. The activity timer
continues running.
Training 93
Power Guide
You can create and use a power strategy to plan your effort on a course. Your Descent device uses your FTP,
the course elevation, and the projected time it will take you to complete the course to create a customized
power guide.
One of the most important steps in planning a successful power guide strategy is choosing your effort level.
Putting a harder effort into the course will increase the power recommendations, while choosing an easier effort
will reduce them (Creating and Using a Power Guide, page94). The primary goal of a power guide is to help you
complete the course based on what is known about your ability, not to achieve a specific target time. You can
adjust the effort level during your ride.
Power guides are always associated with a course and cannot be used with workouts or segments. You can
view and edit your strategy in the Garmin Connect app and sync it with compatible Garmin devices. This feature
requires a power meter, which must be paired with your device (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page132).
Creating and Using a Power Guide
Before you can create a power guide, you must pair a power meter with your watch (Pairing Your Wireless
Sensors, page132). You must also have a course loaded to your watch (Creating a Course on Garmin Connect,
page165).
You can also create a power guide in the Garmin Connect app.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select an outdoor biking activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Training > Power Guide > Create New.
5 Select a course (Courses, page164).
6 Select a riding position.
7 Select a gear weight.
8 Press START, and select Use Plan.
TIP: You can preview the map, elevation plot, effort, settings, and splits. You can also adjust the effort,
terrain, riding position, and gear weight before you start riding.
History
History includes time, distance, calories, average pace or speed, lap data, and optional sensor information.
NOTE: When the device memory is full, your oldest data is overwritten.
94 History
Using History
History contains previous activities you have saved on your watch.
The watch has a history glance for quick access to your activity data (Glances, page98).
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select History > Activities.
3 Select an activity.
4 Press START.
5 Select an option:
• To view additional information about the activity, select All Stats.
• To view the impact of the activity on your aerobic and anaerobic fitness, select Training Effect (About
Training Effect, page113).
• To view your time in each heart rate zone, select Heart Rate.
• To select a lap and view additional information about each lap, select Laps.
• To select a ski or snowboard run and view additional information about each run, select Runs.
• To select an exercise set and view additional information about each set, select Sets.
• To view the activity on a map, select Map.
• To view an elevation plot for the activity, select Elevation Plot.
• To delete the selected activity, select Delete.
Multisport History
Your device stores the overall multisport summary of the activity, including overall distance, time, calories, and
optional accessory data. Your device also separates the activity data for each sport segment and transition so
you can compare similar training activities and track how quickly you move through the transitions. Transition
history includes distance, time, average speed, and calories.
Personal Records
When you complete an activity, the watch displays any new personal records you achieved during that activity.
Personal records include your fastest time over several typical race distances, highest strength activity weight
for major movements, and longest run, ride, or swim.
NOTE: For cycling, personal records also include most ascent and best power (power meter required).
Viewing Your Personal Records
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select History > Records.
3 Select a sport.
4 Select a record.
5 Select View Record.
Restoring a Personal Record
You can set each personal record back to the one previously recorded.
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select History > Records.
3 Select a sport.
4 Select a record to restore.
5 Select Previous > Yes.
NOTE: This does not delete any saved activities.
History 95
Clearing Personal Records
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select History > Records.
3 Select a sport.
4 Select an option:
• To delete one record, select a record, and select Clear Record > Yes.
• To delete all records for the sport, select Clear All Records > Yes.
NOTE: This does not delete any saved activities.
Viewing Data Totals
You can view the accumulated distance and time data saved to your watch.
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select History > Totals.
3 Select an activity.
4 Select an option to view weekly or monthly totals.
Using the Odometer
The odometer automatically records the total distance traveled, elevation gained, and time in activities.
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select History > Totals > Odometer.
3 Press UP or DOWN to view odometer totals.
Deleting History
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select History > Options.
3 Select an option:
• Select Delete All Activities to delete all activities from the history.
• Select Reset Totals to reset all distance and time totals.
NOTE: This does not delete any saved activities.
Appearance
You can customize the appearance of the watch face and the quick access features in the glance loop and
controls menu.
Watch Face Settings
You can customize the appearance of the watch face by selecting the layout, colors, and additional data. You
can also download custom watch faces from the Connect IQ store.
96 Appearance
Default Watch Face
Alternate time zone pointer. References the 24-hour time markings on the watch (Adding Alternate Time
Zones, page41).
No-fly time remaining. References the 24-hour time markings on the watch (No-Fly Time, page10).
Surface interval (SI) time after a dive (Viewing the Surface Interval Glance, page29).
Customizing the Watch Face
Before you can activate a Connect IQ watch face, you must install a watch face from the Connect IQ store
(Connect IQ Features, page149).
You can customize the watch face information and appearance, or activate an installed Connect IQ watch face.
1 From the watch face, hold MENU.
2 Select Watch Face.
3 Press UP or DOWN to preview the watch face options.
4 Select Add New to create a custom digital or analog watch face.
5 Press START.
6 Select an option:
• To activate the watch face, select Apply.
• To change the style of the numbers for the analog watch face, select Dial.
• To change the style of the hands for the analog watch face, select Hands.
• To change the style of the numbers for the digital watch face, select Layout.
• To change the style of the seconds for the digital watch face, select Seconds.
• To change the data that appears on the watch face, select Data.
• To add or change an accent color for the watch face, select Accent Color.
• To enable a low brightness mode for the watch face while in dark environments, select Lume.
• To change the time zone used for the alternate time zone pointer on the default watch face, select Alt.
Time Zones (Editing an Alternate Time Zone, page42).
NOTE: The alternate time zone pointer uses the first alternate time zone from the list.
• To change the color of the data that appears on the watch face, select Data Color.
• To remove the watch face, select Delete.
Appearance 97
Glances
Your watch comes preloaded with glances that provide quick information (Viewing the Glance Loop, page102).
Some glances require a Bluetooth connection to a compatible phone.
Some glances are not visible by default. You can add them to the glances list manually (Customizing the Glance
Loop, page102). Some glances are a grouping of related metrics, such as health or activity performance.
98 Appearance
Name Description
ABC Displays combined altimeter, barometer, and compass information.
Alternate time
zones
Displays the current time of day in additional time zones (Adding Alternate Time Zones,
page41).
Altitude acclima
tion
At altitudes above 800 m (2625 ft.), displays graphs showing altitude-corrected values for
your average pulse oximeter reading, respiration rate, and resting heart rate for the last
seven days.
Altimeter Displays the approximate elevation based on pressure changes.
Barometer Displays the environmental pressure data based on elevation.
Body Battery
™
With all-day wear, displays your current Body Battery level and a graph of your level for the
last several hours (Body Battery, page103).
Calendar Displays upcoming meetings from your phone calendar.
Calories Displays your calorie information for the current day.
Camera controls
Allows you to manually take a photo and record a video clip when paired with a compat
ible Varia
™
headlight or tail light camera (Using the Varia Camera Controls, page135).
Compass Displays an electronic compass.
Cycling ability
Displays your rider type, aerobic endurance, aerobic capacity, and anaerobic capacity
(Viewing Cycling Ability, page116).
Dive log
Displays brief summaries of your recently recorded dives (Viewing the Dive Log Glance,
page30).
Dive readiness
Displays a score and a short message that helps you determine how ready you are for
diving each day (Dive Readiness, page31).
Dog tracking
Displays your dog's location information when you have a compatible dog tracking device
paired with your Descent watch.
Endurance score
Displays a score, graph, and a short message that describes your overall endurance based
on all recorded activities (Endurance Score, page115).
Fish forecast
Displays predictions for the best days and times for fishing based on your location, the
moon's position, and the moon rise and set times. You can view the rating for the day and
major and minor feeding times.
Floors climbed Tracks your floors climbed and progress toward your goal.
Garmin coach
Displays scheduled workouts when you select a Garmin coach adaptive training plan in
your Garmin Connect account. The plan adjusts to your current level of fitness, coaching
and schedule preferences, and race date.
Golf Displays golf scores and statistics for your last round.
Health Snapshot
Starts a Health Snapshot session on your watch that records several key health metrics
while you hold still for two minutes. It provides a glimpse of your overall cardiovascular
status. The watch records metrics such as your average heart rate, stress level, and
respiration rate.
Displays summaries of your saved Health Snapshot sessions (Health Snapshot
™
, page48).
Heart rate
Displays your current heart rate in beats per minute (bpm) and a graph of your average
resting heart rate (RHR).
Appearance 99
Name Description
Hill score
Displays a score, graph, contributing metrics, and a short message that describes your hill
climbing performance based on your recorded running activities (Hill Score, page116).
History Displays your activity history and a graph of your recorded activities.
HRV status
Displays your seven-day average of your overnight heart rate variability (Heart Rate Varia
bility Status, page106).
Intensity minutes
Tracks your time spent participating in moderate to vigorous activities, your weekly
intensity minutes goal, and progress toward your goal.
inReach
®
controls
Allows you to send messages on your paired inReach device (Using the inReach Remote,
page135).
Jet Lag Adviser
Displays your internal clock during travel, and provides guidance to help you acclimate to
the time zone of your destination (Using the Jet Lag Adviser, page117).
Last activity Displays a brief summary of your last recorded activity.
Last ride
Last run
Last swim
Displays a brief summary of your last recorded activity and history of the specified sport.
Messenger
Displays your Garmin Messenger
™
app conversations and allows you to reply to messages
from your watch (Garmin Messenger App, page150).
Moon phase
Displays the moonrise and moonset times, along with the moon phase, based on your GPS
position.
Music Provides music player controls for your phone or watch music.
Naps
Displays total nap time and Body Battery level gains. You can start the nap timer and set
an alarm to wake you up (Customizing Sleep Mode, page171).
Notifications
Alerts you to incoming calls, texts, social network updates, and more, based on your
phone notification settings (Enabling Bluetooth Notifications, page144).
Primary race
Displays the race event you designate as the primary race in your Garmin Connect
calendar (Race Calendar and Primary Race, page87).
Pulse oximeter
Allows you to take a manual pulse oximeter reading (Getting Pulse Oximeter Readings,
page127). If you are too active for the watch to determine your pulse oximeter reading,
the measurements are not recorded.
Race calendar
Displays your upcoming race events set in your Garmin Connect calendar (Race Calendar
and Primary Race, page87).
Recovery Displays your recovery time. The maximum time is four days.
Respiration
Your current respiration rate in breaths per minute and seven-day average. You can do a
breathing activity to help you relax.
Sleep coach
Provides recommendations for your sleep need based on sleep and activity history, HRV
status, and naps.
Sleep score
Displays total sleep time, a sleep score, and sleep stage information for the previous night.
You can also view any overnight breathing variations (Sleep Tracking, page160).
Steps Tracks your daily step count, step goal, and data for previous days.
Stocks Displays a customizable list of stocks (Adding a Stock, page116).
100 Appearance
Name Description
Stress
Displays your current stress level and a graph of your stress level. You can do a breathing
activity to help you relax. If you are too active for the watch to determine your stress level,
stress measurements are not recorded.
Sunrise and
sunset
Displays sunrise, sunset, dawn, and dusk times, along with a map of the sun's current
position and a graph of the day's sunlight.
Surface interval
Displays your surface interval time, oxygen toxicity units (OTU), central nervous system
(CNS) oxygen toxicity percentage, tissue load, and no-fly time remaining after a dive
(Viewing the Surface Interval Glance, page29).
Temperature Displays temperature data from the internal temperature sensor.
Tides
Displays information about a tide station, such as the tide height and when the next high
and low tides will occur (Viewing Tide Information, page56).
Training readiness
Displays a score and a short message that helps you determine how ready you are for
training each day (Training Readiness, page115).
Training status
Displays your current training status and training load, which shows you how your training
affects your fitness level and performance (Training Status, page110).
VIRB
®
controls
Provides camera controls when you have a VIRB device paired with your Descent watch
(VIRB Remote, page135).
Weather
Displays the current temperature and weather forecast. You can also view the current
weather conditions on the map using several map overlays.
Xero
®
device
Displays laser location information when you have a compatible Xero device paired with
your Descent watch (Xero Laser Location Settings, page137).
Appearance 101
Viewing the Glance Loop
Glances provide quick access to health data, activity information, built-in sensors, and more. When you pair your
watch, you can view data from your phone, such as notifications, weather, and calendar events.
1 Press UP or DOWN.
The watch scrolls through the glance loop and displays summary data for each glance.
TIP: You can also swipe to scroll or tap to select options.
2 Press START to view more information.
3 Select an option:
• Press DOWN to view details about a glance.
• Press START to view additional options and functions for a glance.
Customizing the Glance Loop
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Appearance > Glances.
3 Select an option:
• To change the location of a glance in the loop, select a glance, and press UP or DOWN.
• To remove a glance from the loop, select a glance, and select .
• To add a glance to the loop, select Add, and select a glance.
TIP: You can select CREATE FOLDER to create folders that contain multiple glances (Creating Glance
Folders, page102).
Creating Glance Folders
You can customize the glance loop to create folders of related glances.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Appearance > Glances > Add > CREATE FOLDER.
3 Select the glances to include in the folder, and select Done.
NOTE: If the glances are already in the glance loop, you can move or copy them into the folder.
4 Select or enter a name for the folder.
5 Select an icon for the folder.
6 If necessary, select an option:
• To edit the folder, scroll to the folder in the glance loop, and hold MENU.
• To edit the glances in the folder, open the folder and select Edit (Customizing the Glance Loop, page102).
102 Appearance
Body Battery
Your watch analyzes your heart rate variability, stress level, sleep quality, and activity data to determine your
overall Body Battery level. Like a gas gauge on a car, it indicates your amount of available reserve energy. The
Body Battery level range is from 5 to 100, where 5 to 25 is very low reserve energy, 26 to 50 is low reserve
energy, 51 to 75 is medium reserve energy, and 76 to 100 is high reserve energy.
You can sync your watch with your Garmin Connect account to view your most up-to-date Body Battery level,
long-term trends, and additional details (Tips for Improved Body Battery Data, page103).
Tips for Improved Body Battery Data
• For more accurate results, wear the watch while sleeping.
• Good sleep charges your Body Battery.
• Strenuous activity and high stress can cause your Body Battery to drain more quickly.
• Food intake, as well as stimulants like caffeine, has no impact on your Body Battery.
Performance Measurements
These performance measurements are estimates that can help you track and understand your training activities
and race performances. The measurements require a few activities using wrist-based heart rate or a compatible
chest heart rate monitor. Cycling performance measurements require a heart rate monitor and a power meter.
These estimates are provided and supported by Firstbeat Analytics
™
. For more information, go to garmin.com
/performance-data/running.
NOTE: The estimates may seem inaccurate at first. The watch requires you to complete a few activities to learn
about your performance.
VO2 max.: VO2 max. is the maximum volume of oxygen (in milliliters) you can consume per minute per kilogram
of body weight at your maximum performance (About VO2 Max. Estimates, page104).
Predicted race times: The watch uses the VO2 max. estimate and your training history to provide a target race
time based on your current state of fitness (Viewing Your Predicted Race Times, page105).
HRV status: The watch analyzes your wrist heart rate readings while you are sleeping to determine your heart
rate variability (HRV) status based on your personal, long-term HRV averages (Heart Rate Variability Status,
page106).
Performance condition: Your performance condition is a real-time assessment after 6 to 20 minutes of activity.
It can be added as a data field so you can view your performance condition during the rest of your activity. It
compares your real-time condition to your average fitness level (Performance Condition, page107).
Functional threshold power (FTP): The watch uses your user profile information from the initial setup to
estimate your FTP (Getting Your FTP Estimate, page108).
Lactate threshold: Lactate threshold requires a chest heart rate monitor. Lactate threshold is the point where
your muscles start to rapidly fatigue. Your watch measures your lactate threshold level using heart rate data
and pace (Lactate Threshold, page108).
Stamina: The watch uses your VO2 max. estimate and heart rate data to provide real-time stamina estimates.
It can be added as a data screen so you can view your potential and current stamina during your activity
(Viewing Your Real-Time Stamina, page109).
Power curve (cycling): The power curve displays your sustained power output over time. You can view your
power curve for the previous month, three months, or twelve months (Viewing Your Power Curve, page109).
Appearance 103
About VO2 Max. Estimates
VO2 max. is the maximum volume of oxygen (in milliliters) you can consume per minute per kilogram of body
weight at your maximum performance. In simple terms, VO2 max. is an indication of athletic performance
and should increase as your level of fitness improves. The Descent device requires wrist-based heart rate or
a compatible chest heart rate monitor to display your VO2 max. estimate. The device has separate VO2 max.
estimates for running and cycling. You must run either outside with GPS or ride with a compatible power meter
at a moderate level of intensity for several minutes to get an accurate VO2 max. estimate.
On the device, your VO2 max. estimate appears as a number, description, and position on the color gauge. On
your Garmin Connect account, you can view additional details about your VO2 max. estimate, such as where it
ranks for your age and sex.
Purple
Superior
Blue
Excellent
Green
Good
Orange
Fair
Red
Poor
VO2 max. data is provided by Firstbeat Analytics. VO2 max. analysis is provided with permission from The
Cooper Institute
®
. For more information, see the appendix (VO2 Max. Standard Ratings, page199), and go to
www.CooperInstitute.org.
Getting Your VO2 Max. Estimate for Running
This feature requires wrist-based heart rate or a compatible chest heart rate monitor. If you are using a chest
heart rate monitor, you must put it on and pair it with your watch (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page132).
For the most accurate estimate, complete the user profile setup (Setting Up Your User Profile, page152), and set
your maximum heart rate (Setting Your Heart Rate Zones, page154). The estimate may seem inaccurate at first.
The watch requires a few runs to learn about your running performance. You can disable VO2 max. recording for
ultra run and trail run activities if you do not want those run types to affect your VO2 max. estimate (Activities
and App Settings, page72).
1 Start a running activity.
2 Run outdoors at a moderate or high intensity, reaching at least 70% of your maximum heart rate.
3 After at least 10 minutes, select Save.
4 Press UP or DOWN to scroll through the performance measurements.
104 Appearance
Getting Your VO2 Max. Estimate for Cycling
This feature requires a power meter and wrist-based heart rate or a compatible chest heart rate monitor. The
power meter must be paired with your watch (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page132). If you are using a chest
heart rate monitor, you must put it on and pair it with your watch.
For the most accurate estimate, complete the user profile setup (Setting Up Your User Profile, page152) and set
your maximum heart rate (Setting Your Heart Rate Zones, page154). The estimate may seem inaccurate at first.
The watch requires a few rides to learn about your cycling performance.
1 Start a cycling activity.
2 Ride at a steady, high intensity for at least 20 minutes.
3 After your ride, select Save.
4 Press UP or DOWN to scroll through the performance measurements.
Viewing Your Predicted Race Times
For the most accurate estimate, complete the user profile setup (Setting Up Your User Profile, page152), and set
your maximum heart rate (Setting Your Heart Rate Zones, page154).
Your watch uses the VO2 max. estimate and your training history to provide a target race time (About VO2 Max.
Estimates, page104). The watch analyzes several weeks of your training data to refine the race time estimates.
1 From the watch face, press UP or DOWN to view the performance glance.
2 Press START to view glance details.
3 Press UP or DOWN to view a predicted race time.
4 Press START to view predictions for other distances.
NOTE: The predictions may seem inaccurate at first. The watch requires a few runs to learn about your
running performance.
Appearance 105
Heart Rate Variability Status
Your watch analyzes your wrist heart rate readings while you are sleeping to determine your heart rate variability
(HRV). Training, physical activity, sleep, nutrition, and healthy habits all impact your heart rate variability. HRV
values can vary widely based on gender, age, and fitness level. A balanced HRV status may indicate positive
signs of health such as good training and recovery balance, greater cardiovascular fitness, and resilience to
stress. An unbalanced or poor status may be a sign of fatigue, greater recovery needs, or increased stress. For
best results, you should wear the watch while sleeping. The watch requires three weeks of consistent sleep data
to display your heart rate variability status.
Color Zone Status Description
Green
Balanced Your seven-day average HRV is within your baseline range.
Orange
Unbalanced Your seven-day average HRV is above or below your baseline range.
Red
Low Your seven-day average HRV is well below your baseline range.
No color
Poor
No status
Your HRV values are averaging well below the normal range for your age.
No status means that there is insufficient data to generate a seven-day average.
You can sync your watch with your Garmin Connect account to view your current heart rate variability status,
trends, and educational feedback.
Heart Rate Variability and Stress Level
Stress level is the result of a three-minute test performed while standing still, where the Descent device
analyzes heart rate variability to determine your overall stress. Training, sleep, nutrition, and general life stress
all impact how a runner performs. The stress level range is from 1 to 100, where 1 is a very low stress state and
100 is a very high stress state. Knowing your stress level can help you decide if your body is ready for a tough
training run or yoga.
106 Appearance
Viewing Your Heart Rate Variability and Stress Level
This feature requires a Garmin chest heart rate monitor. Before you can view your heart rate variability (HRV)
stress level, you must put on a heart rate monitor and pair it with your device (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors,
page132).
TIP: Garmin recommends that you measure your stress level at approximately the same time and under the
same conditions every day.
1 If necessary, press START, and select Add > HRV Stress to add the stress app to the apps list.
2 Select Yes to add the app to your list of favorites.
3 From the watch face, press START, select HRV Stress, and press START.
4 Stand still, and rest for 3 minutes.
Performance Condition
As you complete your activity, such as running or cycling, the performance condition feature analyzes your pace,
heart rate, and heart rate variability to make a real-time assessment of your ability to perform compared to
your average fitness level. It is approximately your real-time percentage deviation from your baseline VO2 max.
estimate.
Performance condition values range from -20 to +20. After the first 6 to 20 minutes of your activity, the device
displays your performance condition score. For example, a score of +5 means that you are rested, fresh, and
capable of a good run or ride. You can add performance condition as a data field to one of your training screens
to monitor your ability throughout the activity. Performance condition can also be an indicator of fatigue level,
especially at the end of a long training run or ride.
NOTE: The device requires a few runs or rides with a heart rate monitor to get an accurate VO2 max. estimate
and learn about your running or riding ability (About VO2 Max. Estimates, page104).
Viewing Your Performance Condition
This feature requires wrist-based heart rate or a compatible chest heart rate monitor.
1 Add Performance Condition to a data screen (Customizing the Data Screens, page71).
2 Go for a run or ride.
After 6 to 20 minutes, your performance condition appears.
3 Scroll to the data screen to view your performance condition throughout the run or ride.
Appearance 107
Getting Your FTP Estimate
Before you can get your functional threshold power (FTP) estimate, you must pair a power meter with your
watch (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page132), and you must get your VO2 max. estimate (Getting Your VO2
Max. Estimate for Cycling, page105).
The watch uses your user profile information from the initial setup and your VO2 max. estimate to estimate your
FTP. The watch will automatically detect your FTP during steady, high intensity rides with a power meter. For
best results, you should also ride with a heart rate monitor.
1 From the watch face, press UP or DOWN to view the performance glance.
2 Press START.
3 Press UP or DOWN to view your FTP estimate.
Your FTP estimate appears as a value measured in watts per kilogram, your power output in watts, and a
position on the color gauge.
Purple
Superior
Blue
Excellent
Green
Good
Orange
Fair
Red
Untrained
For more information, see the appendix (FTP Ratings, page200).
Lactate Threshold
Lactate threshold is the exercise intensity at which lactate (lactic acid) starts to accumulate in the bloodstream.
In running, this intensity level is estimated in terms of pace, heart rate, or power. When a runner exceeds the
threshold, fatigue starts to increase at an accelerating rate. For experienced runners, the threshold occurs at
approximately 90% of their maximum heart rate and between 10 km and half-marathon race pace. For average
runners, the lactate threshold often occurs well below 90% of maximum heart rate. Knowing your lactate
threshold can help you determine how hard to train or when to push yourself during a race.
If you already know your lactate threshold heart rate value, you can enter it in your user profile settings (Setting
Your Heart Rate Zones, page154). You can turn on the Auto Detection feature to automatically record your
lactate threshold during an activity.
108 Appearance
Viewing Your Real-Time Stamina
Your watch can provide real-time stamina estimates based on your heart rate data and VO2 max. estimate
(About VO2 Max. Estimates, page104).
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Activities & Apps.
3 Select a run or bike activity.
4 Select the activity settings.
5 Select Data Screens > Add New > Stamina.
6 Press UP or DOWN to change the location of the data screen (optional).
7 Press START to edit the primary stamina data field (optional).
8 Start your activity (Starting an Activity, page42).
9 Press UP or DOWN to scroll to the data screen.
Primary stamina data field. Shows your current stamina percentage, distance remaining, or time
remaining.
Potential stamina.
Current stamina.
Red: Stamina is depleting.
Orange: Stamina is steady.
Green: Stamina is recharging.
Viewing Your Power Curve
Before you can view your power curve, you must record a ride that's at least one hour long using a power meter
in the last 90 days (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page132).
You can create workouts in your Garmin Connect account. The power curve displays your sustained power
output over time. You can view your power curve for the previous month, three months, or twelve months.
1 From the Garmin Connect app, select .
2 Select Performance Stats > Power Curve.
Appearance 109
Training Status
These measurements are estimates that can help you track and understand your training activities. The
measurements require you to complete activities for two weeks using wrist-based heart rate or a compatible
chest heart rate monitor. Cycling performance measurements require a heart rate monitor and a power meter.
The measurements may seem inaccurate at first when the watch is still learning about your performance.
These estimates are provided and supported by Firstbeat Analytics. For more information, go to garmin.com
/performance-data/running.
Training status: Training status shows you how your training affects your fitness and performance. Your
training status is based on changes to your VO2 max., acute load, and HRV status over an extended time
period.
VO2 max.: VO2 max. is the maximum volume of oxygen (in milliliters) you can consume per minute per kilogram
of body weight at your maximum performance (About VO2 Max. Estimates, page104). Your watch displays
heat and altitude corrected VO2 max. values when you are acclimating to high heat environments or high
altitude (Heat and Altitude Performance Acclimation, page114).
HRV: HRV is your heart rate variability status over the last seven days (Heart Rate Variability Status, page106).
Acute load: Acute load is a weighted sum of your recent exercise load scores including exercise duration and
intensity. (Acute Load, page111).
Training load focus: Your watch analyzes and distributes your training load into different categories based on
the intensity and structure of each activity recorded. Training load focus includes the total load accumulated
per category, and the focus of the training. Your watch displays your load distribution over the last 4 weeks
(Training Load Focus, page112).
Recovery time: The recovery time displays how much time remains before you are fully recovered and ready for
the next hard workout (Recovery Time, page113).
110 Appearance
Training Status Levels
Training status shows you how your training affects your fitness level and performance. Your training status is
based on changes to your VO2 max., acute load, and HRV status over an extended time period. You can use
your training status to help plan future training and continue improving your fitness level.
No Status: The watch needs you to record multiple activities over two weeks, with VO2 max. results from
running or cycling, to determine your training status.
Detraining: You have a break in your training routine or you are training much less than usual for a week
or more. Detraining means that you are unable to maintain your fitness level. You can try increasing your
training load to see improvement.
Recovery: Your lighter training load is allowing your body to recover, which is essential during extended periods
of hard training. You can return to a higher training load when you feel ready.
Maintaining: Your current training load is enough to maintain your fitness level. To see improvement, try adding
more variety to your workouts or increasing your training volume.
Productive: Your current training load is moving your fitness level and performance in the right direction. You
should plan recovery periods into your training to maintain your fitness level.
Peaking: You are in ideal race condition. Your recently reduced training load is allowing your body to recover
and fully compensate for earlier training. You should plan ahead, since this peak state can only be maintained
for a short time.
Overreaching: Your training load is very high and counterproductive. Your body needs a rest. You should give
yourself time to recover by adding lighter training to your schedule.
Unproductive: Your training load is at a good level, but your fitness is decreasing. Try focusing on rest, nutrition,
and stress management.
Strained: There is imbalance between your recovery and training load. It is a normal result after a hard training
or major event. Your body may be struggling to recover, so you should pay attention to your overall health.
Tips for Getting Your Training Status
The training status feature depends on updated assessments of your fitness level, including at least one VO2
max. measurement per week (About VO2 Max. Estimates, page104). Indoor run activities do not generate a
VO2 max. estimate in order to preserve the accuracy of your fitness level trend. You can disable VO2 max.
recording for ultra run and trail run activities if you do not want those run types to affect your VO2 max. estimate
(Activities and App Settings, page72).
To get the most out of the training status feature, you can try these tips.
• At least one time per week, run or ride outdoors with a power meter, and reach a heart rate higher than 70% of
your maximum heart rate for at least 10 minutes.
After using the watch for one or two weeks, your training status should be available.
• Record all of your fitness activities on your primary training device, allowing your watch to learn about your
performance (Syncing Activities and Performance Measurements, page87).
• Wear the watch consistently while you sleep, to continue generating an up-to-date HRV status. Having a valid
HRV status can help maintain a valid training status when you do not have as many activities with VO2 max.
measurements.
Acute Load
Acute load is a weighted sum of your excess post-exercise oxygen consumption (EPOC) for the last several
days. The gauge indicates whether your current load is low, optimal, high, or very high. The optimal range is
based on your individual fitness level and training history. The range adjusts as your training time and intensity
increase or decrease.
Appearance 111
Training Load Focus
In order to maximize performance and fitness gains, training should be distributed across three categories: low
aerobic, high aerobic, and anaerobic. Training load focus shows you how much of your training is currently in
each category and provides training targets. Training load focus requires at least 7 days of training to determine
if your training load is low, optimal, or high. After 4 weeks of training history, your training load estimate will
have more detailed target information to help you balance your training activities.
Below targets: Your 4-week training load is lower than optimal in all intensity categories.
Low aerobic shortage: Try adding more low aerobic activities to provide recovery and balance for your higher
intensity activities.
High aerobic shortage: Try adding more high aerobic activities to help improve your lactate threshold and VO2
max. over time.
Anaerobic shortage: Try adding a few more intense, anaerobic activities to improve your speed and anaerobic
capacity over time.
Balanced: Your training load is balanced and provides all-around fitness benefits as you continue training.
Low aerobic focus: Your training load is mostly low aerobic activity. This provides a solid foundation and
prepares you for adding more intense workouts.
High aerobic focus: Your training load is mostly high aerobic activity. These activities help to improve lactate
threshold, VO2 max., and endurance.
Anaerobic focus: Your training load is mostly intense activity. This leads to rapid fitness gains, but should be
balanced with low aerobic activities.
Above targets: Your 4-week training load is higher than optimal.
Load Ratio
Load ratio is the ratio of your acute (short-term) training load to your chronic (long-term) training load. It's
helpful for tracking your training load changes.
Status Value Description
No Status None Load ratio will be visible after 2 weeks of training.
Low Lower than 0.8 Your short-term training load is lower than your long-term training load.
Optimal
0.8 to 1.4
The short-term and long-term training loads are balanced. The optimal range is
based on your individual fitness level and training history.
High 1.5 to 1.9 Your short-term training load is higher than your long-term training load.
Very High 2.0 or higher
Your short-term training load is significantly higher than your long-term training
load.
112 Appearance
About Training Effect
Training Effect measures the impact of an activity on your aerobic and anaerobic fitness. Training Effect
accumulates during the activity. As the activity progresses, the Training Effect value increases. Training Effect
is determined by your user profile information and training history, and heart rate, duration, and intensity of
your activity. There are seven different Training Effect labels to describe the primary benefit of your activity.
Each label is color coded and corresponds to your training load focus (Training Load Focus, page112). Each
feedback phrase, for example, "Highly Impacting VO2 Max." has a corresponding description in your Garmin
Connect activity details.
Aerobic Training Effect uses your heart rate to measure how the accumulated intensity of an exercise affects
your aerobic fitness and indicates if the workout had a maintaining or improving effect on your fitness level.
Your excess post-exercise oxygen consumption (EPOC) accumulated during exercise is mapped to a range of
values that account for your fitness level and training habits. Steady workouts at moderate effort or workouts
involving longer intervals (>180 seconds) have a positive impact on your aerobic metabolism and result in an
improved aerobic Training Effect.
Anaerobic Training Effect uses heart rate and speed (or power) to determine how a workout affects your ability
to perform at very high intensity. You receive a value based on the anaerobic contribution to EPOC and the
type of activity. Repeated high-intensity intervals of 10 to 120 seconds have a highly beneficial impact on your
anaerobic capability and result in an improved anaerobic Training Effect.
You can add Aerobic Training Effect and Anaerobic Training Effect as data fields to one of your training screens
to monitor your numbers throughout the activity.
Training Effect Aerobic Benefit Anaerobic Benefit
From 0.0 to 0.9 No benefit. No benefit.
From 1.0 to 1.9 Minor benefit. Minor benefit.
From 2.0 to 2.9 Maintains your aerobic fitness. Maintains your anaerobic fitness.
From 3.0 to 3.9 Impacts your aerobic fitness. Impacts your anaerobic fitness.
From 4.0 to 4.9 Highly impacts your aerobic fitness. Highly impacts your anaerobic fitness.
5.0
Overreaching and potentially harmful without
enough recovery time.
Overreaching and potentially harmful without
enough recovery time.
Training Effect technology is provided and supported by Firstbeat Analytics. For more information, go to
firstbeat.com.
Recovery Time
You can use your Garmin device with wrist-based heart rate or a compatible chest heart rate monitor to display
how much time remains before you are fully recovered and ready for the next hard workout.
NOTE: The recovery time recommendation uses your VO2 max. estimate and may seem inaccurate at first. The
device requires you to complete a few activities to learn about your performance.
The recovery time appears immediately following an activity. The time counts down until it is optimal for you to
attempt another hard workout. The device updates your recovery time throughout the day based on changes in
sleep, stress, relaxation, and physical activity.
Appearance 113
Recovery Heart Rate
If you are training with wrist-based heart rate or a compatible chest heart rate monitor, you can check your
recovery heart rate value after each activity. Recovery heart rate is the difference between your exercising heart
rate and your heart rate two minutes after the exercise has stopped. For example, after a typical training run,
you stop the timer. Your heart rate is 140bpm. After two minutes of no activity or cool down, your heart rate
is 90 bpm. Your recovery heart rate is 50 bpm (140 minus 90). Some studies have linked recovery heart rate to
cardiac health. Higher numbers generally indicate healthier hearts.
TIP: For best results, you should stop moving for two minutes while the device calculates your recovery heart
rate value.
NOTE: Your recovery heart rate is not calculated for low-impact activities, such as yoga.
Heat and Altitude Performance Acclimation
Environmental factors such as high temperature and altitude impact your training and performance. For
example, high altitude training can have a positive impact on your fitness, but you may notice a temporary
VO2 max. decline while exposed to high altitudes. Your Descent watch provides acclimation notifications and
corrections to your VO2 max. estimate and training status when the temperature is above 22ºC (72ºF) and when
the altitude is above 800 m (2625 ft.). You can keep track of your heat and altitude acclimation in the training
status glance.
NOTE: The heat acclimation feature is available only for GPS activities and requires weather data from your
connected phone.
Pausing and Resuming Your Training Status
If you are injured or sick, you can pause your training status. You can continue to record fitness activities,
but your training status, training load focus, recovery feedback, and workout recommendations are temporarily
disabled.
You can resume your training status when you are ready to start training again. For best results, you need at
least one VO2 max. measurement each week (About VO2 Max. Estimates, page104).
1 When you want to pause your training status, select an option:
• From the training status glance, hold MENU, and select Options > Pause Training Status.
• From your Garmin Connect settings, select Performance Stats > Training Status > > Pause Training
Status.
2 Sync your watch with your Garmin Connect account.
3 When you want to resume your training status, select an option:
• From the training status glance, hold MENU, and select Options > Resume Training Status.
• From your Garmin Connect settings, select Performance Stats > Training Status > > Resume Training
Status.
4 Sync your watch with your Garmin Connect account.
114 Appearance
Training Readiness
Your training readiness is a score and a short message that helps you determine how ready you are for training
each day. The score is continuously calculated and updated throughout the day using these factors:
• Sleep score (last night)
• Recovery time
• HRV status
• Acute load
• Sleep history (last 3 nights)
• Stress history (last 3 days)
Color Zone Score Description
Purple
95 to 100
Prime
Best possible
Blue
75 to 94
High
Ready for challenges
Green
50 to 74
Moderate
Good to go
Orange
25 to 49
Low
Time to slow down
Red
1 to 24
Poor
Let your body recover
To view historical training readiness scores, go to your Garmin Connect account.
Endurance Score
Your endurance score helps you understand your overall endurance based on all recorded activities with heart
rate data. You can view recommendations for improving your endurance score, and the top sports contributing
to your score over time.
Color Zone Description
Pink
Elite
Purple
Superior
Blue
Expert
Green
Well Trained
Yellow
Trained
Orange
Intermediate
Red
Recreational
For more information, see the appendix
(Endurance Score Ratings, page201).
Appearance 115
Hill Score
Your hill score helps you understand your current capacity for uphill running based on your training history and a
VO2 max. estimate from the last two months. Your watch detects uphill segments with 2% grade or more during
an outdoor running, walking, or hiking activity. You can view your hill endurance, hill strength, and changes to
your hill score over time.
Color Zone Score Description
Pink
95 to 100 Elite
Purple
85 to 94 Expert
Blue
70 to 84 Skilled
Green
50 to 69 Trained
Orange
25 to 49 Challenger
Red
1 to 24 Recreational
Viewing Cycling Ability
Before you can view your cycling ability, you must have a 7-day training history, VO2 max. data recorded in your
user profile (About VO2 Max. Estimates, page104), and power curve data from a paired power meter (Viewing
Your Power Curve, page109).
Cycling ability is a measurement of your performance across three categories: aerobic endurance, aerobic
capacity, and anaerobic capacity. Cycling ability includes your current rider type, such as climber. Information
you enter in your user profile, such as body weight, also helps determine your rider type (Setting Up Your User
Profile, page152).
1 Press UP or DOWN to view the cycling ability glance.
NOTE: You may need to add the glance to your glance loop (Customizing the Glance Loop, page102).
2 Press START to view your current rider type.
3 Press START to view a detailed analysis of your cycling ability (optional).
Adding a Stock
Before you can customize the stocks list, you must add the stocks glance to the glance loop (Customizing the
Glance Loop, page102).
1 From the watch face, press UP or DOWN to view the stocks glance.
2 Press START.
3 Select Add Stock.
4 Enter the company name or stock symbol for the stock you want to add, and select .
The watch displays search results.
5 Select the stock you want to add.
6 Select the stock to view more information.
TIP: To display the stock on the glance loop, you can press START, and select Set as Favorite.
116 Appearance
Adding Weather Locations
1 From the watch face, press UP or DOWN to view the weather glance.
2 Press START.
3 On the first glance screen, press START.
4 Select Add Location, and search for a location.
5 If necessary, repeat steps 3 and 4 to add more locations.
6 Press START, and select a location to show the weather for that location.
Using the Jet Lag Adviser
Before you can use the Jet Lag Adviser glance, you must plan a trip in the Garmin Connect app (Planning a Trip
in the Garmin Connect App, page117).
You can use the Jet Lag Adviser glance while traveling to see how your internal clock compares to the local
time, and to receive guidance on how to reduce the effects of jet lag.
1 From the watch face, press UP or DOWN to view the Jet Lag Adviser glance.
2 Press START to see how your internal clock compares to the local time, and the overall level of your jet lag.
3 Select an option:
• To see an informational message about your current jet lag level, press START.
• To see a timeline for recommended actions to help reduce symptoms of jet lag, press DOWN.
Planning a Trip in the Garmin Connect App
1 From the Garmin Connect app, select .
2 Select Training & Planning > Jet Lag Adviser > Add Trip Details.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.
Controls
The controls menu lets you quickly access watch features and options. You can add, reorder, and remove the
options in the controls menu (Customizing the Controls Menu, page120).
From any screen, hold LIGHT.
Appearance 117
Icon Name Description
ABC Select to open the altimeter, barometer, and compass app.
Airplane Mode Select to enable airplane mode to turn off all wireless communications.
Alarm Clock Select to add or edit an alarm (Setting an Alarm, page39).
Alt. Time Zones
Select to view the current time of day in additional time zones (Adding Alternate
Time Zones, page41).
Altimeter Select to open the altimeter screen.
Applied Ballistics Select to open the Applied Ballistics app (Applied Ballistics
®
, page79).
Assistance Select to send an assistance request (Requesting Assistance, page157).
Auto Dive
Select to set the type of dive activity that starts automatically when you begin
your descent. You can use the Snooze option to temporarily disable this feature.
Barometer Select to open the barometer screen.
Battery Saver
Select to enable the battery saver feature (Customizing the Battery Saver Feature,
page168).
Brightness Select to adjust the screen brightness (Changing the Screen Settings, page170).
Broadcast Heart
Rate
Select to turn on heart rate broadcasting to a paired device (Broadcasting Heart
Rate Data, page125).
Calendar Select to view upcoming events from your phone calendar.
RCT Camera
Select to manually take a photo and record a video clip (Using the Varia Camera
Controls, page135).
Clocks
Select to open the Clocks app to set an alarm, timer, stopwatch, or view alternate
time zones (Clocks, page39).
Compass Select to open the compass screen.
Display
Select to turn off the screen for alerts, gestures, and Always On Display mode
(Changing the Screen Settings, page170).
Do Not Disturb
Select to enable do not disturb mode to dim the screen and disable alerts and
notifications. For example, you can use this mode while watching a movie.
Find My Phone
Select to play an audible alert on your paired phone, if it is within Bluetooth
range. The Bluetooth signal strength appears on the Descent watch screen, and it
increases as you move closer to your phone.
Select to navigate to your lost phone during a GPS activity (Locating a Phone Lost
During a GPS Activity, page146).
Flashlight
Select to turn on the screen to use your watch as a flashlight. On the Descent
Mk3i - 51 mm watch, the LED flashlight turns on.
118 Appearance
Icon Name Description
Garmin Share Select to open the Garmin Share app (Garmin Share, page151).
History Select to view your activity history, records, and totals.
Kill Switch
Select to quickly remove all saved user data and reset all settings to the factory
default values.
Lock Device
Select to lock the buttons and the touchscreen to prevent inadvertent presses and
swipes.
Messenger Select to open the Messenger app (Using the Messenger Feature, page151).
Moon Phase
Select to view moonrise and moonset times, along with the moon phase, based
on your GPS position.
Music Controls Select to control music playback on your watch or phone.
Night Vision
Select to adjust the screen for compatibility with night vision goggles and disable
the wrist heart rate monitor.
Notifications
Select to view calls, texts, social network updates, and more, based on your phone
notification settings (Enabling Bluetooth Notifications, page144).
Phone Select to disable Bluetooth technology and your connection to your paired phone.
Pool Mode
Select to enable the pool mode for diving. When the watch is in pool dive mode,
the tissue load and decompression lockout features function normally, but dives
are not saved to the dive log. The pool dive mode turns off automatically at
midnight.
Power Off Select to turn off the watch.
Pulse Ox Select to open the pulse oximeter app (Pulse Oximeter, page126).
Red Shift Select to turn the screen to shades of red to use the watch in low light conditions.
Reference Point
Select to set a reference point for navigation (Setting a Reference Point,
page161).
Save Location Select to save your current location to navigate back to it later.
Settings Select to open the settings menu.
Sleep Mode Select to enable or disable Sleep Mode (Customizing Sleep Mode, page171).
Stealth Mode
Select to enable stealth mode to turn off wireless communications and prevent
the storage and sharing of your GPS position.
Stopwatch Select to start the stopwatch (Using the Stopwatch, page41).
Appearance 119
Icon Name Description
Strobe
Select to turn on the LED flashlight strobe. You can create a custom strobe mode.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all product models.
Sunrise & Sunset Select to view sunrise, sunset, and twilight times.
Sync Select to sync your watch with your paired phone.
Time Sync Select to sync your watch with the time on your phone or using satellites.
Timers Select to set a countdown timer (Starting the Countdown Timer, page40).
Touch Select to disable touchscreen controls.
Wallet
Select to open your GarminPay
™
wallet and pay for purchases with your watch
(GarminPay, page121).
Weather Select to view the current weather forecast and current conditions.
Wi-Fi Select to disable Wi‑Fi
®
communications.
Customizing the Controls Menu
You can add, remove, and change the order of the shortcut menu options in the controls menu (Controls,
page117).
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Appearance > Controls.
3 Select a shortcut to customize.
4 Select an option:
• Select Reorder to change the location of the shortcut in the controls menu.
• Select Remove to remove the shortcut from the controls menu.
5 If necessary, select Add New to add an additional shortcut to the controls menu.
120 Appearance
Using the LED Flashlight
WARNING
This device may have a flashlight that can be programmed to flash at various intervals. Consult your physician if
you have epilepsy or are sensitive to bright or flashing lights.
NOTE: This feature is only available for Descent Mk3i - 51 mm models.
Using the flashlight can reduce battery life. You can reduce the brightness to extend the life of the battery.
1 Hold LIGHT.
2 Select .
3 If necessary, press START to turn on the flashlight.
4 Select an option:
• To adjust the brightness or color of the flashlight, press UP or DOWN.
TIP: From any screen, you can quickly press LIGHT twice to turn on the flashlight. For the first three
seconds, you can press UP or DOWN to adjust the brightness or color of the flashlight.
• To program the flashlight to flash in a selected pattern, hold MENU, select Strobe, select a mode, and
press START.
• To display your emergency contact information and program the flashlight to flash in a distress pattern,
hold MENU, select Distress Pattern, and press START.
CAUTION
Programming the flashlight to flash in a distress pattern will not contact your emergency contacts or emergency
services on your behalf. Your emergency contact information will only appear if it has been configured in the
Garmin Connect app.
Editing the Custom Flashlight Strobe
1 Hold LIGHT.
2 Select > CUSTOM.
3 Press START to turn on the flashlight strobe (optional).
4 Select .
5 Press UP or DOWN to scroll to a strobe setting.
6 Press START to scroll through the setting options.
7 Press BACK to save.
Using the Flashlight Screen
NOTE: This feature is only available for Descent Mk3/Mk3i - 43 mm models.
Using the flashlight can reduce battery life. You can reduce the brightness to extend the life of the battery.
1 Hold LIGHT.
2 Select .
3 Press UP or DOWN to adjust the brightness and color.
TIP: You can quickly press LIGHT twice to turn on the flashlight at this setting in the future.
GarminPay
The GarminPay feature allows you to use your watch to pay for purchases in participating locations using credit
or debit cards from a participating financial institution.
Appearance 121
Setting Up Your GarminPay Wallet
You can add one or more participating credit or debit cards to your GarminPay wallet. Go to garmin.com
/garminpay/banks to find participating financial institutions.
1 From the Garmin Connect app, select .
2 Select Garmin Pay > Get Started.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.
Paying for a Purchase Using Your Watch
Before you can use your watch to pay for purchases, you must set up at least one payment card.
You can use your watch to pay for purchases in a participating location.
1 Hold LIGHT.
2 Select .
3 Enter your four-digit passcode.
NOTE: If you enter your passcode incorrectly three times, your wallet locks, and you must reset your
passcode in the Garmin Connect app.
Your most recently used payment card appears.
4 If you have added multiple cards to your GarminPay wallet, swipe to change to another card (optional).
5 If you have added multiple cards to your GarminPay wallet, select DOWN to change to another card
(optional).
6 Within 60 seconds, hold your watch near the payment reader, with the watch facing the reader.
The watch vibrates and displays a check mark when it is finished communicating with the reader.
7 If necessary, follow the instructions on the card reader to complete the transaction.
TIP: After you successfully enter your passcode, you can make payments without a passcode for 24 hours while
you continue to wear your watch. If you remove the watch from your wrist or disable heart rate monitoring, you
must enter the passcode again before making a payment.
Adding a Card to Your GarminPay Wallet
You can add up to 10 credit or debit cards to your GarminPay wallet.
1 From the Garmin Connect app, select .
2 Select Garmin Pay > > Add Card.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.
After the card is added, you can select the card on your watch when you make a payment.
Managing Your GarminPay Cards
You can temporarily suspend or delete a card.
NOTE: In some countries, participating financial institutions may restrict the GarminPay features.
1 From the Garmin Connect app, select .
2 Select Garmin Pay.
3 Select a card.
4 Select an option:
• To temporarily suspend or unsuspend the card, select Suspend Card.
The card must be active to make purchases using your Descent watch.
• To delete the card, select .
122 Appearance
Changing Your GarminPay Passcode
You must know your current passcode to change it. If you forget your passcode, you must reset the GarminPay
feature for your Descent watch, create a new passcode, and reenter your card information.
1 From the Garmin Connect app, select .
2 Select Garmin Pay > Change Passcode.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.
The next time you pay using your Descent watch, you must enter the new passcode.
Morning Report
Your watch displays a morning report based on your normal wake time. Press DOWN to view the report, which
includes weather, sleep, overnight heart rate variability status, and more (Customizing Your Morning Report,
page123).
Customizing Your Morning Report
NOTE: You can customize these settings on you watch or in your Garmin Connect account.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Appearance > Morning Report.
3 Select an option:
• Select Show Report to enable or disable the morning report.
• Select Edit Report to customize the order and type of data that appears in your morning report.
Sensors and Accessories
The Descent watch has several internal sensors, and you can pair additional wireless sensors for your activities.
Wrist Heart Rate
Your watch has a wrist-based heart rate monitor, and you can view your heart rate data on the heart rate glance
(Viewing the Glance Loop, page102).
The watch is also compatible with chest heart rate monitors. If both wrist-based heart rate and chest heart rate
data are available when you start an activity, your watch uses the chest heart rate data.
Sensors and Accessories 123
Wearing the Watch
CAUTION
Some users may experience skin irritation after prolonged use of the watch, especially if the user has sensitive
skin or allergies. If you notice any skin irritation, remove the watch and give your skin time to heal. To help
prevent skin irritation, ensure the watch is clean and dry, and do not overtighten the watch on your wrist. For
more information, go to garmin.com/fitandcare.
• Wear the watch above your wrist bone.
NOTE: The watch should be snug but comfortable. For more accurate heart rate readings, the watch should
not shift while running or exercising. For pulse oximeter readings, you should remain motionless.
NOTE: While diving, the watch should stay in contact with your skin, and it should not bump into other
wrist-worn devices.
NOTE: The optical sensor is located on the back of the watch.
• See Tips for Erratic Heart Rate Data, page124 for more information about wrist-based heart rate.
• See Tips for Erratic Pulse Oximeter Data, page127 for more information about the pulse oximeter sensor.
• For more information about accuracy, go to garmin.com/ataccuracy.
• For more information about watch wear and care, go to garmin.com/fitandcare.
Tips for Erratic Heart Rate Data
If the heart rate data is erratic or does not appear, you can try these tips.
• Clean and dry your arm before putting on the watch.
• Avoid wearing sunscreen, lotion, and insect repellent under the watch.
• Avoid scratching the heart rate sensor on the back of the watch.
• Wear the watch above your wrist bone. The watch should be snug but comfortable.
• Wait until the icon is solid before starting your activity.
• Warm up for 5 to 10 minutes and get a heart rate reading before starting your activity.
NOTE: In cold environments, warm up indoors.
• Rinse the watch with fresh water after each workout.
124 Sensors and Accessories
Wrist Heart Rate Monitor Settings
Hold MENU, and select Sensors & Accessories > Wrist Heart Rate.
Status: Enables or disables the wrist heart rate monitor. The default value is Auto, which automatically uses the
wrist heart rate monitor unless you pair an external heart rate monitor.
NOTE: Disabling the wrist heart rate monitor also disables the wrist-based pulse oximeter sensor. You can
perform a manual reading from the pulse oximeter glance.
Source Switching: Allows the watch to select the best source of heart rate data when wearing your watch and
an external heart rate monitor. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/dynamicsourceswitching/.
While Swimming: Enables or disables the wrist heart rate monitor during swimming activities.
Abnormal Heart Rate Alerts: Allows you to set the watch to alert you when your heart rate exceeds or drops
below a target value (Setting an Abnormal Heart Rate Alert, page125).
Broadcast Heart Rate: Allows you to begin broadcasting your heart rate data to a paired device (Broadcasting
Heart Rate Data, page125).
Setting an Abnormal Heart Rate Alert
CAUTION
This feature only alerts you when your heart rate exceeds or drops below a certain number of beats per minute,
as selected by the user, after at least ten minutes of inactivity. This feature does not notify you when your heart
rate drops below the selected threshold during your chosen sleep window configured in the Garmin Connect
app. This feature does not notify you of any potential heart condition and is not intended to treat or diagnose
any medical condition or disease. Always defer to your health care provider for any heart-related issues.
You can set the heart rate threshold value.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Sensors & Accessories > Wrist Heart Rate > Abnormal Heart Rate Alerts.
3 Select High Alert or Low Alert.
4 Set the heart rate threshold value.
Each time your heart rate exceeds or drops below the threshold value, a message appears and the watch
vibrates.
Broadcasting Heart Rate Data
You can broadcast your heart rate data from your watch and view it on paired devices. Broadcasting heart rate
data decreases battery life.
TIP: You can customize the activity settings to broadcast your heart rate data automatically when you begin an
activity (Activities and App Settings, page72). For example, you can broadcast your heart rate data to an Edge
device while cycling.
NOTE: Broadcasting heart rate data is not available for dive activities.
1 Select an option:
• Hold MENU, and select Sensors & Accessories > Wrist Heart Rate > Broadcast Heart Rate.
• Hold LIGHT to open the controls menu, and select .
NOTE: You can add options to the controls menu (Customizing the Controls Menu, page120).
2 Press START.
The watch starts broadcasting your heart rate data.
3 Pair your watch with your compatible device.
NOTE: The pairing instructions differ for each Garmin compatible device. See your owner's manual.
4 Press STOP to stop broadcasting your heart rate data.
Sensors and Accessories 125
Pulse Oximeter
Your watch has a wrist-based pulse oximeter to gauge the peripheral saturation of oxygen in your blood (SpO2).
As your altitude increases, the level of oxygen in your blood can decrease. Knowing your oxygen saturation can
help you determine how your body is acclimating to high altitudes for alpine sport and expedition.
You can manually begin a pulse oximeter reading by viewing the pulse oximeter glance (Getting Pulse Oximeter
Readings, page127). You can also turn on all-day readings (Setting the Pulse Oximeter Mode, page127). When
you view the pulse oximeter glance while you are not moving, your watch analyzes your oxygen saturation and
your elevation. The elevation profile helps indicate how your pulse oximeter readings are changing, relative to
your to elevation.
On the watch, your pulse oximeter reading appears as an oxygen saturation percentage and color on the graph.
On your Garmin Connect account, you can view additional details about your pulse oximeter readings, including
trends over multiple days.
For more information about pulse oximeter accuracy, go to garmin.com/ataccuracy.
The elevation scale.
A graph of your average oxygen saturation readings for the last 24 hours.
Your most recent oxygen saturation reading.
The oxygen saturation percentage scale.
A graph of your elevation readings for the last 24 hours.
126 Sensors and Accessories
Getting Pulse Oximeter Readings
You can manually begin a pulse oximeter reading by viewing the pulse oximeter glance. The glance displays
your most recent blood oxygen saturation percentage, a graph of your hourly average readings for the last 24
hours, and a graph of your elevation for the last 24 hours.
NOTE: The first time you view the pulse oximeter glance, the watch must acquire satellite signals to determine
your elevation. You should go outside, and wait while the watch locates satellites.
1 While you are sitting or inactive, press UP or DOWN to view the pulse oximeter glance.
2 Press START to view glance details and begin a pulse oximeter reading.
3 Remain motionless for up to 30 seconds.
NOTE: If you are too active for the watch to get a pulse oximeter reading, a message appears instead of a
percentage. You can check again after several minutes of inactivity. For best results, hold the arm wearing
the watch at heart level while the watch reads your blood oxygen saturation.
4 Press DOWN to view a graph of your pulse oximeter readings for the last seven days.
Setting the Pulse Oximeter Mode
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Sensors & Accessories > Pulse Oximeter > Pulse Ox Mode.
3 Select an option:
• To turn off automatic measurements, select Manual Check.
• To turn on continuous measurements while you sleep, select During Sleep.
NOTE: Unusual sleep positions can cause abnormally low sleep-time SpO2 readings.
• To turn on measurements while you are inactive during the day, select All Day.
NOTE: Turning on All Day mode decreases battery life.
Tips for Erratic Pulse Oximeter Data
If the pulse oximeter data is erratic or does not appear, you can try these tips.
• Remain motionless while the watch reads your blood oxygen saturation.
• Wear the watch above your wrist bone. The watch should be snug but comfortable.
• Hold the arm wearing the watch at heart level while the watch reads your blood oxygen saturation.
• Use a silicone or nylon band.
• Clean and dry your arm before putting on the watch.
• Avoid wearing sunscreen, lotion, and insect repellent under the watch.
• Avoid scratching the optical sensor on the back of the watch.
• Rinse the watch with fresh water after each workout.
Compass
The watch has a 3-axis compass with automatic calibration. The compass features and appearance change
depending on your activity, whether GPS is enabled, and whether you are navigating to a destination. You can
change the compass settings manually (Compass Settings, page128).
Setting the Compass Heading
1 From the compass glance, press START.
2 Select Lock Heading.
3 Point the top of the watch toward your heading, and press START.
When you deviate from the heading, the compass displays the direction from the heading and degree of
deviation.
Sensors and Accessories 127
Compass Settings
Hold MENU, and select Sensors & Accessories > Compass.
Calibrate: Allows you to manually calibrate the compass sensor (Calibrating the Compass Manually, page128).
Display: Sets the directional heading on the compass to letters, degrees, or milliradians.
North Ref.: Sets the north reference of the compass (Setting the North Reference, page128).
Mode: Sets the compass to use electronic-sensor data only (On), a combination of GPS and electronic-sensor
data when moving (Auto), or GPS data only (Off).
Calibrating the Compass Manually
NOTICE
Calibrate the electronic compass outdoors. To improve heading accuracy, do not stand near objects that
influence magnetic fields, such as vehicles, buildings, and overhead power lines.
Your watch was already calibrated at the factory, and the watch uses automatic calibration by default. If you
experience irregular compass behavior, for example, after moving long distances or after extreme temperature
changes, you can manually calibrate the compass.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Sensors & Accessories > Compass > Calibrate.
3 Select an option:
• To perform a calibration that rotates the watch through all orientations, select Full Calibration.
• To perform a short calibration that rotates the watch in a figure eight motion, select Quick Calibration >
Start.
NOTE: The Full Calibration option provides better accuracy for diving. The Quick Calibration option is
suitable for other activities.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions.
Setting the North Reference
You can set the directional reference used in calculating heading information.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Sensors & Accessories > Compass > North Ref..
3 Select an option:
• To set geographic north as the heading reference, select True.
• To set magnetic north as the heading without declination, select Magnetic.
• To set grid north (000º) as the heading reference, select Grid.
• To set the magnetic variation value manually, select User > Mag. Variation, enter the magnetic variation,
and select Done.
Altimeter and Barometer
The watch contains an internal altimeter and barometer. The watch collects elevation and pressure data
continuously, even in low-power mode. The altimeter displays your approximate elevation based on pressure
changes. The barometer displays environmental pressure data based on the fixed elevation where the altimeter
was most recently calibrated (Altimeter Settings, page129).
128 Sensors and Accessories
Altimeter Settings
Hold MENU, and select Sensors & Accessories > Altimeter.
Calibrate: Allows you to manually calibrate the altimeter sensor.
Auto Cal.: Allows the altimeter to self-calibrate each time you use satellite systems.
Sensor Mode: Sets the mode for the sensor. The Auto option uses both the altimeter and barometer according
to your movement. You can use the Altimeter Only option when your activity involves changes in altitude, or
the Barometer Only option when your activity does not involve changes in altitude.
Elevation: Sets the units of measure for elevation.
Calibrating the Barometric Altimeter
Your watch was already calibrated at the factory, and the watch uses automatic calibration at your GPS starting
point by default. You can manually calibrate the barometric altimeter if you know the correct elevation.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Sensors & Accessories > Altimeter.
3 Select an option:
• To calibrate automatically from your GPS starting point, select Auto Cal..
• To enter the current elevation manually, select Calibrate > Enter Manually.
• To enter the current elevation from the digital elevation model, select Calibrate > Use DEM.
• To enter the current elevation from your GPS location, select Calibrate > Use GPS.
Barometer Settings
Hold MENU, and select Sensors & Accessories > Barometer.
Calibrate: Allows you to manually calibrate the barometer sensor.
Plot: Sets the time scale for the chart in the barometer glance.
Storm Alert: Sets the rate of barometric pressure change that triggers a storm alert.
Sensor Mode: Sets the mode for the sensor. The Auto option uses both the altimeter and barometer according
to your movement. You can use the Altimeter Only option when your activity involves changes in altitude, or
the Barometer Only option when your activity does not involve changes in altitude.
Pressure: Sets how the watch displays pressure data.
Calibrating the Barometer
Your watch was already calibrated at the factory, and the watch uses automatic calibration at your GPS starting
point by default. You can manually calibrate the barometer if you know the correct elevation or the correct sea
level pressure.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Sensors & Accessories > Barometer > Calibrate.
3 Select an option:
• To enter the current elevation and sea level pressure (optional), select Enter Manually.
• To calibrate automatically from the digital elevation model, select Use DEM.
• To calibrate automatically from your GPS starting point, select Use GPS.
Sensors and Accessories 129
Setting a Storm Alert
WARNING
This alert is an informational feature and is not intended to be the primary source for tracking changes
in the weather. It is your responsibility to review weather reports and conditions, to remain aware of your
surroundings, and to use safe judgment, especially during times of severe weather. Failure to heed this warning
could result in serious personal injury or death.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Notifications & Alerts > System Alerts > Barometer > Storm Alert.
3 Select an option:
• Select Status to turn the alert on or off.
• Select Rate to update the rate of barometric pressure change that triggers a storm alert.
Wireless Sensors
Your watch can be paired and used with wireless sensors using ANT+ or Bluetooth technology (Pairing
Your Wireless Sensors, page132). After the devices are paired, you can customize the optional data fields
(Customizing the Data Screens, page71). If your watch was packaged with a sensor, they are already paired.
For information about specific Garmin sensor compatibility, purchasing, or to view the owner's manual, go to
buy.garmin.com for that sensor.
130 Sensors and Accessories
Sensor Type Description
Applied Ballis
tics
You can use Applied Ballistics devices, such as rangefinders or wind sensors, and view
additional ballistics information on your watch.
Club Sensors
You can use Approach CT10 golf club sensors to automatically track your golf shots,
including location, distance, and club type.
DogTrack Allows you to receive data from a compatible handheld dog tracking device.
eBike
You can use your watch with your eBike and view bike data, such as battery and range
information, during your rides.
Extended
Display
You can use the Extended Display mode to display data screens from your Descent watch on
a compatible Edge bike computer during a ride or triathlon.
External Heart
Rate
You can use an external sensor, such as the HRM 200, HRM 600, HRM-Fit
™
, or HRM-Pro series
heart rate monitor, to view heart rate data during your activities. Some heart rate monitors
can also store data or provide advanced running data (Running Dynamics, page133) (Running
Power, page134).
Foot Pod
You can use a foot pod to record pace and distance instead of using GPS when you are
training indoors or when your GPS signal is weak.
Headphones
You can use Bluetooth headphones to listen to music loaded onto your Descent watch
(Connecting Bluetooth Headphones, page143).
inReach
The inReach remote function allows you to control your inReach satellite communicator using
your Descent watch (Using the inReach Remote, page135).
Lights
You can use Varia smart bike lights to improve situational awareness. With a Varia headlight
camera, you can also take photos and record video during a ride (Using the Varia Camera
Controls, page135).
Muscle O2
You can use a muscle oxygen sensor to view hemoglobin and muscle oxygen saturation data
while you train.
PC
You can play video games on your computer and see real-time statistics on your device
(Using the Garmin GameOn
™
App, page50).
Power
You can use the Rally
™
or Vector
™
power meter bike pedals to view your power data on your
watch. You can adjust your power zones to match your goals and abilities (Setting Your Power
Zones, page155), or use range alerts to be notified when you reach a specified power zone
(Setting an Alert, page75).
Radar
You can use a Varia rearview bike radar to improve situational awareness and send alerts
about approaching vehicles. With a Varia radar camera tail light, you can also take photos and
record video during a ride (Using the Varia Camera Controls, page135).
Rangefinder You can use a compatible laser rangefinder to view your distance to the flag while golfing.
RD Pod
You can use a Running Dynamics Pod to record running dynamics data and view it on your
watch (Running Dynamics, page133).
Shifting
You can use electronic shifters to display shifting information during a ride. The Descent
watch displays current adjustment values when the sensor is in adjustment mode.
Shimano Di2
You can use Shimano
®
Di2
™
electronic shifters to display shifting information during a ride.
The Descent watch displays current adjustment values when the sensor is in adjustment
mode.
Sensors and Accessories 131
Sensor Type Description
Smart Trainer
You can use your watch with an indoor bike smart trainer to simulate resistance while
following a course, ride, or workout (Using an Indoor Trainer, page49).
Speed/
Cadence
You can attach speed or cadence sensors to your bike and view the data during your ride. If
necessary, you can manually enter your wheel circumference (Wheel Size and Circumference,
page202).
Tempe
You can attach the tempe temperature sensor to a secure strap or loop where it is exposed to
ambient air, so it provides a consistent source of accurate temperature data.
Trolling Motor
You can use your device as a remote control for your Garmin trolling motor (Pairing Your
Watch and Trolling Motor, page58).
Vectronix You can use Vectronix
®
rangefinders, and view additional ballistics information on your watch.
VIRB
The VIRB remote function allows you to control your VIRB action camera using your watch
(VIRB Remote, page135).
XERO Laser
Locations
You can view and share laser location information from a Xero device (Xero Laser Location
Settings, page137).
Pairing Your Wireless Sensors
The first time you connect a wireless sensor to your watch using ANT+ or Bluetooth technology, you must
pair the watch and sensor. After they are paired, the watch connects to the sensor automatically when you
start an activity and the sensor is active and within range. For more information about connection types, go to
garmin.com/hrm_connection_types.
NOTE: The Descent transceivers can be paired through the dive setup menu (Pairing a Transceiver with a
Descent Dive Computer, page11).
1 Put on the heart rate monitor, install the sensor, or press the button to wake up the sensor.
NOTE: See your wireless sensor owner's manual for pairing information.
2 Bring the watch within 3m (10ft.) of the sensor.
NOTE: Stay 10m (33ft.) away from other wireless sensors while pairing.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Sensors & Accessories > Add New.
5 Select an option:
• Select Search All Sensors.
• Select your sensor type.
After the sensor is paired with your watch, the sensor status changes from Searching to Connected. Sensor
data appears in the data screen loop or a custom data field. You can customize the optional data fields
(Customizing the Data Screens, page71).
132 Sensors and Accessories
Heart Rate Accessory Running Pace and Distance
The HRM 600, HRM-Fit, and HRM-Pro series accessories calculate your running pace and distance based on
your user profile and the motion measured by the sensor on every stride. The heart rate monitor provides
running pace and distance when GPS is not available, such as during treadmill running. You can view your
running pace and distance on your compatible Descent watch when connected using ANT+ technology or
secure Bluetooth technology. You can also view it on compatible third-party training apps.
The pace and distance accuracy improves with calibration.
Automatic calibration: The default setting for your watch is Auto Calibrate. The heart rate accessory calibrates
each time you run outside with it connected to your compatible Descent watch.
NOTE: Automatic calibration does not work for indoor, trail, or ultra run activities (Tips for Recording Running
Pace and Distance, page133).
Manual calibration: You can select Calibrate & Save after a treadmill run with your connected heart rate
accessory (Calibrating the Treadmill Distance, page44).
Tips for Recording Running Pace and Distance
• Update your Descent watch software (Product Updates, page177).
• Complete several outdoor runs with GPS and your connected HRM 600, HRM-Fit, or HRM-Pro series
accessory. It's important that your outdoor range of paces matches your range of paces on the treadmill.
• If your run includes sand or deep snow, go to the sensor settings, and turn off Auto Calibrate.
• If you previously connected a compatible foot pod using ANT+ technology, set the foot pod status to Off, or
remove it from the list of connected sensors.
• Complete a treadmill run with manual calibration (Calibrating the Treadmill Distance, page44).
• If automatic and manual calibrations don't seem accurate, go to the sensor settings, and select HRM Pace &
Distance > Reset Calibration Data.
NOTE: You can try turning off Auto Calibrate, and then manually calibrate again (Calibrating the Treadmill
Distance, page44).
Running Dynamics
Running dynamics is real-time feedback about your running form. Your Descent watch has an accelerometer to
calculate five running form metrics. For all six running form metrics, you must pair your Descent watch with the
HRM-Fit, HRM-Pro series accessory, or other running dynamics accessory that measures torso movement. For
more information, go to garmin.com/performance-data/running.
Sensors and Accessories 133
Metric Sensor Type Description
Cadence
Watch or compatible
accessory
Cadence is the number of steps per minute. It displays the total
steps (right and left combined).
Vertical oscil
lation
Watch or compatible
accessory
Vertical oscillation is your bounce while running. It displays the
vertical motion of your torso, measured in centimeters.
Ground contact
time
Watch or compatible
accessory
Ground contact time is the amount of time in each step that you
spend on the ground while running. It is measured in milliseconds.
NOTE: Ground contact time and balance are not available while
walking.
Ground contact
time balance
Compatible accessory
only
Ground contact time balance displays the left/right balance of your
ground contact time while running. It displays a percentage. For
example, 53.2 with an arrow pointing left or right.
Stride length
Watch or compatible
accessory
Stride length is the length of your stride from one footfall to the next.
It is measured in meters.
Vertical ratio
Watch or compatible
accessory
Vertical ratio is the ratio of vertical oscillation to stride length. It
displays a percentage. A lower number typically indicates better
running form.
Tips for Missing Running Dynamics Data
This topic provides tips for using a compatible running dynamics accessory. If the accessory is not connected
to your watch, the watch automatically switches to wrist-based running dynamics.
• Make sure you have a running dynamics accessory, such as the HRM-Fit or HRM-Pro series accessory.
• Pair the running dynamics accessory with your watch again, according to the instructions.
• If you are using an HRM-Fit or HRM-Pro series accessory, pair it with your watch using ANT+ technology,
rather than Bluetooth technology.
• If the running dynamics data display shows only zeros, make sure the accessory is worn right-side up.
NOTE: Ground contact time and balance appears only while running. It is not calculated while walking.
REMEMBER: Ground contact time balance is not calculated with wrist-based running dynamics.
Running Power
Garmin running power is calculated using measured running dynamics information, user mass, environmental
data, and other sensor data. The power measurement estimates the amount of power a runner applies to the
road surface, and it is displayed in watts. Using running power as a gauge of effort may suit some runners
better than using either pace or heart rate. Running power can be more responsive than heart rate for indicating
the level of effort, and it can account for the uphills, downhills, and wind, which a pace measurement does not
do. For more information, go to garmin.com/performance-data/running.
Running power can be measured using a compatible running dynamics accessory or the watch sensors. You
can customize the running power data fields to view your power output and make adjustments to your training
(Data Fields, page182). You can set up power alerts to be notified when you reach a specified power zone
(Activity Alerts, page74).
Running power zones are similar to cycling power zones. The values for the zones are default values based on
gender, weight, and average ability, and may not match your personal abilities. You can manually adjust your
zones on the watch or using your Garmin Connect account (Setting Your Power Zones, page155).
134 Sensors and Accessories
Running Power Settings
Hold MENU, select Activities & Apps, select a running activity, select the activity settings, and select Running
Power.
Status: Enables or disables recording Garmin running power data. You can use this setting if you prefer to use
third-party running power data.
Source: Allows you to select which device to use to record running power data. The Smart Mode option
automatically detects and uses the running dynamics accessory, when available. The watch uses wrist-based
running power data when an accessory is not connected.
Account for Wind: Enables or disables using wind data when calculating your running power. Wind data is a
combination of the speed, heading, and barometer data from your watch and the available wind data from
your phone.
Using the Varia Camera Controls
NOTICE
Some jurisdictions may prohibit or regulate the recording of video, audio, or photographs, or may require that
all parties have knowledge of the recording and provide consent. It is your responsibility to know and follow all
laws, regulations, and any other restrictions in jurisdictions where you plan to use this device.
Before you can use the Varia camera controls, you must pair the accessory with your watch (Pairing Your
Wireless Sensors, page132).
1 Select an option:
• Add the RCT Camera control to your watch (Customizing the Controls Menu, page120).
• Add the RCT Camera glance to your watch (Customizing the Glance Loop, page102).
2 From the RCT Camera control or glance, select an option:
• Select > to view the camera settings.
• Select > to record the ride.
• Select to take a photo.
• Select to save a clip.
inReach Remote
The inReach remote function allows you to control your inReach satellite communicator using your Descent
watch. Go to buy.garmin.com for more information about compatible devices.
Using the inReach Remote
Before you can use the inReach remote function, you must add the inReach glance to the glances list
(Customizing the Glance Loop, page102).
1 Turn on the inReach satellite communicator.
2 On your Descent watch, press UP or DOWN from the watch face to view the inReach glance.
3 Press START to search for your inReach satellite communicator.
4 Press START to pair your inReach satellite communicator.
5 Press START, and select an option:
• To send an SOS message, select Initiate SOS.
NOTE: You should only use the SOS function in a real emergency situation.
• To send a text message, select Messages > New Message, select the message contacts, and enter the
message text or select a quick text option.
• To send a preset message, select Send Preset, and select a message from the list.
• To view the timer and distance traveled during an activity, select Tracking.
VIRB Remote
The VIRB remote function allows you to control your VIRB action camera using your device.
Sensors and Accessories 135
Controlling a VIRB Action Camera
Before you can use the VIRB remote function, you must enable the remote setting on your VIRB camera. See the
VIRB Series Owner's Manual for more information.
1 Turn on your VIRB camera.
2 Pair your VIRB camera with your Descent watch (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page132).
The VIRB glance is automatically added to the glance loop.
3 Press UP or DOWN from the watch face to view the VIRB glance.
4 If necessary, wait while your watch connects to your camera.
5 Select an option:
• To record video, select Start Recording.
The video counter appears on the Descent screen.
• To take a photo while recording video, press DOWN.
• To stop recording video, press STOP.
• To take a photo, select Take Photo.
• To take multiple photos in burst mode, select Take Burst.
• To send the camera to sleep mode, select Sleep Camera.
• To wake the camera from sleep mode, select Wake Camera.
• To change video and photo settings, select Settings.
Controlling a VIRB Action Camera During an Activity
Before you can use the VIRB remote function, you must enable the remote setting on your VIRB camera. See the
VIRB Series Owner's Manual for more information.
1 Turn on your VIRB camera.
2 Pair your VIRB camera with your Descent watch (Pairing Your Wireless Sensors, page132).
When the camera is paired, a VIRB data screen is automatically added to activities.
NOTE: The VIRB data screen is not available for dive activities.
3 During an activity, press UP or DOWN to view the VIRB data screen.
4 If necessary, wait while your watch connects to your camera.
5 Hold MENU.
6 Select VIRB.
7 Select an option:
• To control the camera using the activity timer, select Settings > Recording Mode > Timer Start/Stop.
NOTE: Video recording automatically starts and stops when you start and stop an activity.
• To control the camera using the menu options, select Settings > Recording Mode > Manual.
• To manually record video, select Start Recording.
The video counter appears on the Descent screen.
• To take a photo while recording video, press DOWN.
• To manually stop recording video, press STOP.
• To take multiple photos in burst mode, select Take Burst.
• To send the camera to sleep mode, select Sleep Camera.
• To wake the camera from sleep mode, select Wake Camera.
136 Sensors and Accessories
Xero Laser Location Settings
Before you can customize laser location settings, you must pair a compatible Xero device (Pairing Your Wireless
Sensors, page132).
Hold MENU, and select Sensors & Accessories > XERO Laser Locations > Laser Locations.
During Activity: Enables the display of laser location information from a compatible, paired Xero device during
an activity.
Share Mode: Allows you to share laser location information publicly or broadcast it privately.
Map
Your watch can display several types of Garmin map data, including topographical contours, nearby points of
interest, ski resort maps, and golf courses. You can use the Map Manager to download additional maps or
manage map storage.
To purchase additional map data and view compatibility information, go to garmin.com/maps.
represents your location on the map. When you are navigating to a destination, your route is marked with a
line on the map.
Viewing the Map
1 Select an option to open the map:
• Press START, and select Map to view the map without starting an activity.
• Go outside, start a GPS activity (Starting an Activity, page42), and press UP or DOWN to scroll to the map
screen.
2 If necessary, wait while the watch locates satellites.
3 Select an option to pan and zoom the map:
• To use the touchscreen, tap the map, tap and drag to position the crosshairs, and press UP or DOWN to
zoom in or out.
• To use the buttons, hold MENU, select Pan/Zoom, and press UP or DOWN to zoom in or out.
NOTE: You can press START to toggle between panning up and down, panning left and right, or zooming.
4 Hold START to select the point indicated by the crosshairs.
Map 137
Saving or Navigating to a Location on the Map
You can select any location on the map. You can save the location or start navigating to it.
1 From the map, select an option:
• To use the touchscreen, tap the map, tap and drag to position the crosshairs, and press UP or DOWN to
zoom in or out.
• To use the buttons, hold MENU, select Pan/Zoom, and press UP or DOWN to zoom in or out.
NOTE: You can press START to toggle between panning up and down, panning left and right, or zooming.
2 Pan and zoom the map to center the location in the crosshairs.
3 Hold START to select the point indicated by the crosshairs.
4 If necessary, select a nearby point of interest.
5 Select an option:
• To start navigating to the location, select Go.
• To save the location, select Save Location.
• To view information about the location, select Review.
Navigating with the Around Me Feature
You can use the around me feature to navigate to nearby points of interest and waypoints.
NOTE: The map data installed on your watch must include points of interest to navigate to them.
1 From the map, hold MENU.
2 Select Around Me.
Icons indicating points of interest and waypoints appear on the map.
3 Press UP or DOWN to highlight a section of the map.
4 Press START.
A list of points of interest and waypoints in the highlighted map section appear.
5 Select a location.
6 Select an option:
• To start navigating to the location, select Go.
• To view the location on the map, select Map.
• To save the location, select Save Location.
• To view information about the location, select Review.
138 Map
Map Settings
You can customize how the map appears in the map app and data screens.
NOTE: If necessary, you can customize the map settings for specific activities instead of using the system
settings (Activity Map Settings, page76).
Hold MENU, and select Map.
Map Manager: Shows the downloaded map versions and allows you to download additional maps (Managing
Maps, page139).
Dark Mode: Sets the map colors to either a white or black background for daytime or nighttime visibility. The
Auto option adjusts the map colors based on the time of day.
High Contrast: Sets the map to display data with higher contrast, for better visibility in challenging
environments.
Orientation: Sets the orientation of the map. The North Up option shows north at the top of the screen. The
Track Up option shows your current direction of travel at the top of the screen.
Auto Zoom: Automatically selects the zoom level for optimal use of your map. When disabled, you must zoom
in or out manually.
Track Color: Changes the track log color.
Lock on Road: Locks the position icon, which represents your position on the map, onto the nearest road.
Detail: Sets the amount of detail shown on the map. Showing more detail may cause the map to redraw more
slowly.
Symbol Set: Sets the chart symbols in marine mode. The NOAA option displays the National Oceanic and
Atmospheric Administration chart symbols. The International option displays the International Association of
Lighthouse Authorities chart symbols.
Managing Maps
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Map > Map Manager.
3 Select an option:
• To download premium maps and activate your Outdoor Maps+ subscription for this device, select
Outdoor Maps+ (Downloading Maps with Outdoor Maps+, page140).
• To download TopoActive maps, select TopoActive Maps (Downloading TopoActive Maps, page140).
Map 139
Downloading Maps with Outdoor Maps+
Before you can download maps to your device, you must connect to a wireless network (Connecting to a Wi‑Fi
Network, page147).
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Map > Map Manager > Outdoor Maps+.
3 If necessary, press START, and select Check Subscription to activate your Outdoor Maps+ subscription for
this watch.
NOTE: Go to garmin.com/outdoormaps for information about purchasing a subscription.
4 Select Add Map, and select a location.
A preview of the map region appears.
5 From the map, complete one or more actions:
• Drag the map to view different areas.
• Pinch or spread two fingers on the touchscreen to zoom in and out of the map.
• Select and to zoom in and out of the map.
6 Press BACK, and select .
7 Select .
8 Select an option:
• To edit the map name, select Name.
• To change the map layers to download, select Layers.
TIP: You can select to view details about the map layers.
• To modify the map region, select Selected Area.
9 Select to download the map.
NOTE: To prevent battery drain, the watch queues the map download for later, and the download starts when
you connect the watch to an external power source.
Downloading TopoActive Maps
Before you can download maps to your device, you must connect to a wireless network (Connecting to a Wi‑Fi
Network, page147).
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Map > Map Manager > TopoActive Maps > Add Map.
3 Select a map.
4 Press START, and select Download.
NOTE: To prevent battery drain, the watch queues the map download for later, and the download starts when
you connect the watch to an external power source.
Deleting Maps
You can remove maps to increase the available device storage.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Map > Map Manager.
3 Select an option:
• Select TopoActive Maps, select a map, press START, and select Remove.
• Select Outdoor Maps+, select a map, press START, and select Delete.
140 Map
Map Themes
You can change the map theme to display data optimized for your activity type.
Hold MENU, and select Map > Map Theme.
None: Uses the preferences from the system map settings, with no additional theme applied.
Marine: Sets the map to display data in marine mode.
High Contrast: Sets the map to display data with higher contrast, for better visibility in challenging
environments.
Dark: Sets the map to display data with a dark background, for better visibility at night.
Popularity: Highlights the most popular roads or trails on the map.
Resort Ski: Sets the map to display the most relevant ski data at a glance.
Aviation: Sets the map to display data in aviation mode.
Marine Map Settings
You can customize how the map appears in marine mode.
Hold MENU, and select Map > Marine.
Spot Soundings: Enables depth measurements on the chart.
Light Sectors: Shows and configures the appearance of light sectors on the chart.
Symbol Set: Sets the chart symbols in marine mode. The NOAA option displays the National Oceanic and
Atmospheric Administration chart symbols. The International option displays the International Association of
Lighthouse Authorities chart symbols.
Showing and Hiding Map Data
You can choose the map data to show on the map and save map data themes for multiple activities.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Map.
3 Press START.
4 Select Map Layers.
5 Select an option:
• To customize the map data for an activity type, select Activity Theme, and select an activity.
Changes you make to the map data settings are saved to the selected activity theme.
• To turn on specific map features, such as contour lines or saved locations, select the map feature, and
select Status > On.
TIP: You can select Apply to all Activities to apply the setting to all activity themes.
Music
NOTE: There are three different music playback options for your Descent watch.
• Third-party provider music
• Personal audio content
• Music stored on your phone
On a Descent watch, you can download audio content to your watch from your computer or from a third-party
provider, so you can listen when your phone is not nearby. To listen to audio content stored on your watch, you
can connect Bluetooth headphones.
Music 141
Connecting to a Third-Party Provider
Before you can download music or other audio files to your watch from a supported third-party provider, you
must connect the provider to your watch.
Some third-party music provider options are already installed on your watch.
For more options, you can download the Connect IQ app on your phone (Downloading Connect IQ Features,
page149).
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Connect IQ Store.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions to install a third-party music provider.
4 Hold DOWN from any screen to open the music controls.
5 Select the music provider.
NOTE: If you want to select another provider, hold MENU, select Music Providers, and follow the on-screen
instructions.
Downloading Audio Content from a Third-Party Provider
Before you can download audio content from a third-party provider, you must connect to a Wi‑Fi network
(Connecting to a Wi‑Fi Network, page147).
1 Hold DOWN from any screen to open the music controls.
2 Hold MENU.
3 Select Music Providers.
4 Select a connected provider, or select Add Provider to add a music provider from the Connect IQ store.
5 Select a playlist or other item to download to the watch.
6 If necessary, press BACK until you are prompted to sync with the service.
NOTE: Downloading audio content can drain the battery. You may be required to connect the watch to an
external power source if the battery is low.
Downloading Personal Audio Content
Before you can send your personal music to your watch, you must install the Garmin Express application on
your computer (garmin.com/express).
You can load your personal audio files, such as .mp3 and .m4a files, to a Descent watch from your computer.
For more information, go to garmin.com/musicfiles.
1 Connect the watch to your computer using the included USB cable.
2 On your computer, open the Garmin Express application, select your watch, and select Music.
TIP: For Windows
®
computers, you can select and browse to the folder with your audio files. For Apple
®
computers, the Garmin Express application uses your iTunes
®
library.
3 In the My Music or iTunes Library list, select an audio file category, such as songs or playlists.
4 Select the checkboxes for the audio files, and select Send to Device.
5 If necessary, in the Descent list, select a category, select the checkboxes, and select Remove From Device to
remove audio files.
142 Music
Listening to Music
1 Hold DOWN from any screen to open the music controls.
2 If necessary, connect your Bluetooth headphones (Connecting Bluetooth Headphones, page143).
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Music Providers, and select an option:
• To listen to music downloaded to the watch from your computer, select My Music (Downloading Personal
Audio Content, page142).
• To control music playback on your phone, select Control Phone.
• To listen to music from a third-party provider, select the name of the provider, and select a playlist.
5 Select .
Music Playback Controls
NOTE: Music playback controls may look different, depending on the selected music source.
Select to view more music playback controls.
Select to browse the audio files and playlists for the selected source.
Select to adjust the volume.
Select to play and pause the current audio file.
Select to skip to the next audio file in the playlist.
Hold to fast forward through the current audio file.
Select to restart the current audio file.
Select twice to skip to the previous audio file in the playlist.
Hold to rewind through the current audio file.
Select to change the repeat mode.
Select to change the shuffle mode.
Connecting Bluetooth Headphones
To listen to music loaded onto your Descent watch, you must connect Bluetooth headphones.
1 Bring the headphones within 2m (6.6ft.) of your watch.
2 Enable pairing mode on the headphones.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Music > Headphones > Add New.
5 Select your headphones to complete the pairing process.
Changing the Audio Mode
You can change the music playback mode from stereo to mono.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Music > Audio.
3 Select an option.
Music 143
Connectivity
Connectivity features are available for your watch when you pair with your compatible phone (Pairing
Your Phone, page144). Additional features are available when you connect your watch to a Wi‑Fi network
(Connecting to a Wi‑Fi Network, page147).
Phone Connectivity Features
Phone connectivity features are available for your Descent watch when you pair it using the Garmin Dive app
(Pairing Your Phone, page144).
• App features from the Garmin Dive app (Garmin Dive App, page149)
• App features from the Garmin Connect app, the Connect IQ app, and more (Phone Apps and Computer
Applications, page147)
• Glances (Glances, page98)
• Controls menu features (Controls, page117)
• Safety and tracking features (Safety and Tracking Features, page156)
• Phone interactions, such as notifications (Enabling Bluetooth Notifications, page144)
Pairing Your Phone
To use the connected features on your watch, you must pair it directly through the Garmin Dive app, instead of
from the Bluetooth settings on your phone.
1 During the initial setup on your watch, select when you are prompted to pair with your phone.
NOTE: If you previously skipped the pairing process, you can hold MENU, and select Connectivity > Phone >
Pair Phone.
2 Scan the QR code with your phone, and follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing and setup
process.
Enabling Bluetooth Notifications
Before you can enable notifications, you must pair the watch with a compatible phone (Pairing Your Phone,
page144).
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Connectivity > Phone > Smart Notifications > Status > On.
3 Select During Activity or General Use.
4 Select a notification type.
5 Select status, tone, and vibration preferences.
6 Press BACK.
7 Select privacy and timeout preferences.
8 Press BACK.
9 Select Signature to add a signature to your text message replies.
Viewing Notifications
1 From the watch face, press UP or DOWN to view the notifications glance.
2 Press START.
3 Select a notification.
4 Press START for more options.
5 Press BACK to return to the previous screen.
144 Connectivity
Receiving an Incoming Phone Call
When you receive a phone call on your connected phone, the Descent watch displays the name or phone
number of the caller.
• To accept the call, select .
NOTE: To talk to the caller, you must use your connected phone.
• To decline the call, select .
• To decline the call and immediately send a text message reply, select Reply, and select a message from the
list.
NOTE: To send a text message reply, you must be connected to a compatible Android
™
phone using
Bluetooth technology.
Replying to a Text Message
NOTE: This feature is available only for compatible Android phones.
When you receive a text message notification on your watch, you can send a quick reply by selecting from a list
of messages. You can customize messages in the Garmin Connect app.
NOTE: This feature sends text messages using your phone. Regular text message limits and charges from your
carrier and phone plan may apply. Contact your mobile carrier for more information about text message charges
or limits.
1 From the watch face, press UP or DOWN to view the notifications glance.
2 Press START, and select a text message notification.
3 Press START.
4 Select Reply.
5 Select a message from the list.
Your phone sends the selected message as an SMS text message.
Managing Notifications
You can use your compatible phone to manage notifications that appear on your Descent watch.
Select an option:
• If you are using an iPhone
®
, go to the iOS
®
notifications settings, and select the notifications to show on
your phone and watch.
NOTE: All notifications that you enable on your iPhone also appear on your watch.
• If you are using an Android phone, from the Garmin Connect app, select > Settings > Notifications >
App Notifications, and select the notifications that you want to appear on your watch.
Turning Off the Bluetooth Phone Connection
You can turn off the Bluetooth phone connection from the controls menu.
NOTE: You can add options to the controls menu (Customizing the Controls Menu, page120).
1 Hold LIGHT to view the controls menu.
2 Select to turn off the Bluetooth phone connection on your Descent watch.
Refer to the owner's manual for your phone to turn off Bluetooth technology on your phone.
Turning On and Off Phone Connection Alerts
You can set the Descent watch to alert you when your paired phone connects and disconnects using Bluetooth
technology.
NOTE: Phone connection alerts are turned off by default.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Connectivity > Phone > Alerts.
Connectivity 145
Turning On and Off Find My Phone Alerts
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Notifications & Alerts > System Alerts > Find My Phone Alerts.
Locating a Phone Lost During a GPS Activity
Your Descent watch automatically stores a GPS location when your paired phone is disconnected during a GPS
activity. You can use this feature to help locate a phone that is lost during an activity.
1 Start a GPS activity.
2 When prompted to navigate to the last known location of your device, select .
3 Navigate to the location on the map (Saving or Navigating to a Location on the Map, page138).
4 Press DOWN to view a compass pointing to the location (optional).
5 When your watch is within Bluetooth range of your phone, the Bluetooth signal strength appears on the
screen.
The signal strength increases as you move closer to your phone.
Playing Audio Prompts During an Activity
You can enable your Descent watch to play motivational status announcements during a run or other activity.
Audio prompts play on your connected Bluetooth headphones, if available. Otherwise, audio prompts play on
your phone paired through the Garmin Connect app. During an audio prompt, the watch or phone lowers the
volume of the primary audio to play the announcement.
NOTE: This feature is not available for all activities.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Audio Prompts.
3 Select an option:
• To hear a prompt for each lap, select Lap Alert.
• To customize prompts with your pace and speed information, select Pace/Speed Alert.
• To customize prompts with your heart rate information, select Heart Rate Alert.
• To customize prompts with power data, select Power Alert.
• To hear prompts when you start and stop the activity timer, including the Auto Pause feature, select Timer
Events.
• To hear workout alerts play as an audio prompt, select Workout Alerts.
• To hear activity alerts play as an audio prompt, select Activity Alerts (Activity Alerts, page74).
• To hear a sound play right before an audio alert or prompt, select Audio Tones.
• To change the language or the dialect of the voice prompts, select Dialect.
• To change the voice of the prompts to male or female, select Voice.
Wi‑Fi Connectivity Features
Activity uploads to your Garmin Connect account: Automatically sends your activity to your Garmin Connect
account as soon as you finish recording the activity.
Audio content: Allows you to sync audio content from third-party providers.
Course updates: Allows you to download and install golf course updates.
Map downloads: Allows you to download and install maps.
Software updates: You can download and install the latest software.
Workouts and training plans: You can browse for and select workouts and training plans on your Garmin
Connect account. The next time your watch has a Wi‑Fi connection, the files are sent to your watch.
146 Connectivity
Connecting to a Wi‑Fi Network
You must connect your watch to the Garmin Connect app on your phone or to the Garmin Express application
on your computer before you can connect to a Wi‑Fi network.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Connectivity > Wi-Fi > My Networks > Add Network.
The watch displays a list of nearby Wi‑Fi networks.
3 Select a network.
4 If necessary, enter the password for the network.
The watch connects to the network, and the network is added to the list of saved networks. The watch
reconnects to this network automatically when it is within range.
Phone Apps and Computer Applications
You can connect your watch to multiple Garmin phone apps and computer applications using the same Garmin
account.
Garmin Connect
You can connect with your friends on Garmin Connect. Garmin Connect gives you the tools to track, analyze,
share, and encourage each other. Record the events of your active lifestyle including runs, walks, rides, swims,
hikes, triathlons, and more. To sign up for a free account, you can download the app from the app store on your
phone (garmin.com/connectapp), or go to connect.garmin.com.
Store your activities: After you complete and save an activity with your watch, you can upload that activity to
your Garmin Connect account and keep it as long as you want.
Analyze your data: You can view more detailed information about your activity, including time, distance,
elevation, heart rate, calories burned, cadence, running dynamics, an overhead map view, pace and speed
charts, and customizable reports.
NOTE: Some data requires an optional accessory such as a heart rate monitor.
Plan your training: You can choose a fitness goal and load one of the day-by-day training plans.
Track your progress: You can track your daily steps, join a friendly competition with your connections, and meet
your goals.
Share your activities: You can connect with friends to follow each other's activities or share links to your
activities.
Manage your settings: You can customize your watch and user settings on your Garmin Connect account.
Connectivity 147
Using the Garmin Connect App
After you pair your watch with your phone (Pairing Your Phone, page144), you can use the Garmin Connect app
to upload all of your activity data to your Garmin Connect account.
1 Verify the Garmin Connect app is running on your phone.
2 Bring your watch within 10m (30ft.) of your phone.
Your watch automatically syncs your data with the Garmin Connect app and your Garmin Connect account.
Updating the Software Using the Garmin Connect App
Before you can update your watch software using the Garmin Connect app, you must have a Garmin Connect
account, and you must pair the watch with a compatible phone (Pairing Your Phone, page144).
Sync your watch with the Garmin Connect app (Using the Garmin Connect App, page148).
When new software is available, the Garmin Connect app automatically sends the update to your watch.
Using Garmin Connect on Your Computer
The Garmin Express application connects your watch to your Garmin Connect account using a computer. You
can use the Garmin Express application to upload your activity data to your Garmin Connect account and
to send data, such as workouts or training plans, from the Garmin Connect website to your watch. You can
also add music to your watch (Downloading Personal Audio Content, page142). You can also install software
updates and manage your Connect IQ apps.
1 Connect the watch to your computer using the USB cable.
2 Go to garmin.com/express.
3 Download and install the Garmin Express application.
4 Open the Garmin Express application, and select Add Device.
5 Follow the on-screen instructions.
Updating the Software Using Garmin Express
Before you can update your device software, you must have a Garmin Connect account, and you must download
the Garmin Express application.
1 Connect the device to your computer using the USB cable.
When new software is available, Garmin Express sends it to your device.
2 Follow the on-screen instructions.
3 Do not disconnect your device from the computer during the update process.
NOTE: If you have already set up your device with Wi‑Fi connectivity, Garmin Connect can automatically
download available software updates to your device when it connects using Wi‑Fi.
Manually Syncing Data with Garmin Connect
NOTE: You can add options to the controls menu (Customizing the Controls Menu, page120).
1 Hold LIGHT to view the controls menu.
2 Select Sync.
148 Connectivity
Garmin Connect+ Subscription
You can enhance the data, connections, and training available on your Garmin Connect account with a Garmin
Connect+ subscription. To sign up, you can download the Garmin Connect app from the app store on your
phone, or go to connect.garmin.com.
Active Intelligence (AI): Receive AI insights about your data and activities.
LiveTrack+: Send LiveTrack text messages, receive a personalized profile page, and view previous LiveTrack
sessions.
Follow Garmin Trails: Access outdoor trails and courses recommended by Garmin databases and other Garmin
users, with pictures, ratings, trip reports, and more.
Training guidance: Get additional expert support and guidance for select Garmin Coach training plans.
Performance dashboard: View your training data your way with customized charts and graphs.
Social features: Gain access to exclusive badges, badge challenges, and double points for challenges. You can
update your profile avatar with customizable frames.
Connect IQ Features
You can add Connect IQ apps, data fields, glances, music providers, and watch faces to your watch using the
Connect IQ store on your watch or phone (garmin.com/connectiqapp).
NOTE: For your safety, Connect IQ features are not available while diving. This ensures that all dive capabilities
function as designed.
Watch Faces: Customize the appearance of the clock.
Device Apps: Add interactive features to your watch, such as glances and new outdoor and fitness activity
types.
Data Fields: Download new data fields that present sensor, activity, and history data in new ways. You can add
Connect IQ data fields to built-in features and pages.
Music: Add music providers to your watch.
Downloading Connect IQ Features
Before you can download features from the Connect IQ app, you must pair your Descent watch with your phone
(Pairing Your Phone, page144).
1 From the app store on your phone, install and open the Connect IQ app.
2 If necessary, select your watch.
3 Select a Connect IQ feature.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions.
Downloading Connect IQ Features Using Your Computer
1 Connect the watch to your computer using a USB cable.
2 Go to apps.garmin.com, and sign in.
3 Select a Connect IQ feature, and download it.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions.
Garmin Dive App
The Garmin Dive app allows you to upload your dive logs from your compatible Garmin device. You can
add more detailed information about your dives, including environmental conditions, photos, notes, and dive
buddies. You can use the map to browse for new dive locations, and view the location details and photos shared
by other users.
The Garmin Dive app syncs your data with your Garmin Connect account. You can download the Garmin Dive
app from the app store on your phone (garmin.com/diveapp).
Connectivity 149
Garmin Explore
™
The Garmin Explore website and app allow you to create courses, waypoints, and collections, plan trips, and use
cloud storage. They offer advanced planning both online and offline, allowing you to share and sync data with
your compatible Garmin device. You can use the app to download maps for offline access, and then navigate
anywhere without using your cellular service.
You can download the Garmin Explore app from the app store on your phone (garmin.com/exploreapp), or you
can go to explore.garmin.com.
Garmin Messenger App
WARNING
The inReach features of the Garmin Messenger app, including SOS, tracking, and inReach Weather, are not
available without a connected inReach satellite communicator and an active satellite subscription. Always test
the app outdoors before using it on a trip.
CAUTION
The non-satellite messaging features of the Garmin Messenger app alone should not be relied on as a primary
method to obtain emergency assistance.
NOTICE
The app works over both the internet (using a wireless connection or cellular data on your phone) and the
Iridium
®
satellite network. If you are using cellular data, your paired phone must be equipped with a data plan
and be in an area of network coverage where data is available. If you are in an area without network coverage,
you must have an active satellite subscription for your inReach satellite communicator to use the Iridium
satellite network.
You can use the app to message other Garmin Messenger app users, including friends and family without
Garmin devices. Anyone can download the app and connect their phone, allowing them to communicate with
other app users over the internet (no login is required). App users can also create group messaging threads
with other SMS phone numbers. New members added to the group message can download the app to see what
others are saying.
Messages sent using a wireless connection or cellular data on your phone do not incur data charges or
additional charges on your satellite subscription. Messages received may incur charges if message delivery
is attempted over both the Iridium satellite network and the internet. Standard text messaging rates for your
cellular data plan apply.
You can download the Garmin Messenger app from the app store on your phone (garmin.com/messengerapp).
150 Connectivity
Using the Messenger Feature
CAUTION
The non-satellite messaging features of the Garmin Messenger app alone should not be relied on as a primary
method to obtain emergency assistance.
NOTICE
To use the Messenger feature, your Descent watch must be connected to the Garmin Messenger app on your
compatible phone using Bluetooth technology.
The Messenger feature on your watch allows you to view, compose, and reply to messages from the Garmin
Messenger phone app.
1 From the watch face, press UP or DOWN to view the Messenger glance.
TIP: The Messenger feature is available as a glance, app, or controls menu option on your watch.
2 Select the glance.
3 If this is your first time using the Messenger feature, scan the QR code with your phone, and follow the
on-screen instructions to complete the pairing and setup process.
4 On your watch, select an option:
• To compose a new message, select New Message, select a recipient, and either select a pre-defined
message or compose your own.
• To view a conversation, scroll down, and select a conversation.
• To reply to a message, select a conversation, select Reply, and either select a pre-defined message or
compose your own.
Garmin Golf App
The Garmin Golf app allows you to upload scorecards from your Descent device to view detailed statistics and
shot analyses. Golfers can compete with each other at different courses using the Garmin Golf app. More than
43,000 courses have leaderboards that anyone can join. You can set up a tournament event and invite players to
compete. With a Garmin Golf membership, you can view green contour data on your phone and Descent device.
The Garmin Golf app syncs your data with your Garmin Connect account. You can download the Garmin Golf
app from the app store on your phone (garmin.com/golfapp).
Garmin Share
NOTICE
It is your responsibility to use discretion when sharing information with others. Always ensure you are aware of
and comfortable with the individual with whom you share information.
The Garmin Share feature allows you to use Bluetooth technology to wirelessly share your data with other
compatible Garmin devices. With Garmin Share enabled and compatible Garmin devices in range of each other,
you can select saved locations, courses, and workouts to transfer to another device through a direct, secured
device-to-device connection, without the need for a phone or Wi‑Fi connectivity.
Connectivity 151
Sharing Data with Garmin Share
Before you can use this feature, you must have Bluetooth technology enabled on both compatible devices, and
they must be within 3m (10 ft.) of each other. When prompted, you must also consent to share your data with
other Garmin devices using Garmin Share.
Your Descent watch can send and receive data when connected to another compatible Garmin device
(Receiving Data with Garmin Share, page152). You can also transfer your data between different devices. For
example, you can share a favorite course from your Edge bike computer to your compatible Garmin watch.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Garmin Share > Share.
3 Select a category, and select one item.
4 Select an option:
• Select Share.
• Select Add More > Share to select more than one item to share.
5 Wait while the device locates compatible devices.
6 Select a device.
7 Confirm the six-digit PIN matches on both devices, and select .
8 Wait while the devices transfer the data.
9 Select Share Again to share the same items with another user (optional).
10 Select Done.
Receiving Data with Garmin Share
Before you can use this feature, you must have Bluetooth technology enabled on both compatible devices, and
they must be within 3m (10 ft.) of each other. When prompted, you must also consent to share your data with
other Garmin devices using Garmin Share.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Garmin Share.
3 Wait while the device locates compatible devices in range.
4 Select .
5 Confirm the six-digit PIN matches on both devices, and select .
6 Wait while the devices transfer the data.
7 Select Done.
Garmin Share Settings
Hold MENU, and select Connectivity > Garmin Share.
Status: Enables the watch to send and receive items through Garmin Share.
Forget Devices: Removes all of the devices the watch has previously shared items with.
User Profile
You can update your user profile on your watch or on the Garmin Connect app.
Setting Up Your User Profile
You can update your sex, date of birth, height, weight, wrist, heart rate zone, power zone, and Critical Swim
Speed (CSS) settings. The watch uses this information to calculate accurate training data.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select User Profile.
3 Select an option.
152 User Profile
Gender Settings
When you first set up the watch, you must choose a sex. Most fitness and training algorithms are binary. For the
most accurate results, Garmin recommends selecting your sex assigned at birth. After the initial setup, you can
customize the profile settings in your Garmin Connect account.
Profile & Privacy: Enables you to customize the data on your public profile.
User Settings: Sets your sex. If you select Not Specified, the algorithms that require a binary input will use the
sex you specified when you first set up the watch.
Viewing Your Fitness Age
Your fitness age gives you an idea of how your fitness compares with a person of the same sex. Your watch
uses information, such as your age, body mass index (BMI), resting heart rate data, and vigorous activity history
to provide a fitness age. If you have an Index
™
scale, your watch uses the body fat percentage metric instead of
BMI to determine your fitness age. Exercise and lifestyle changes can impact your fitness age.
NOTE: For the most accurate fitness age, complete the user profile setup (Setting Up Your User Profile,
page152).
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select User Profile > Fitness Age.
About Heart Rate Zones
Many athletes use heart rate zones to measure and increase their cardiovascular strength and improve their
level of fitness. A heart rate zone is a set range of heartbeats per minute. The five commonly accepted
heart rate zones are numbered from 1 to 5 according to increasing intensity. Generally, heart rate zones are
calculated based on percentages of your maximum heart rate.
Fitness Goals
Knowing your heart rate zones can help you measure and improve your fitness by understanding and applying
these principles.
• Your heart rate is a good measure of exercise intensity.
• Training in certain heart rate zones can help you improve cardiovascular capacity and strength.
If you know your maximum heart rate, you can use the table (Heart Rate Zone Calculations, page155) to
determine the best heart rate zone for your fitness objectives.
If you do not know your maximum heart rate, use one of the calculators available on the Internet. Some gyms
and health centers can provide a test that measures maximum heart rate. The default maximum heart rate is
220 minus your age.
User Profile 153
Setting Your Heart Rate Zones
The watch uses your user profile information from the initial setup to determine your default heart rate zones.
You can set separate heart rate zones for sport profiles, such as running, cycling, and swimming. For the most
accurate calorie data during your activity, set your maximum heart rate. You can also set each heart rate zone
and enter your resting heart rate manually. You can manually adjust your zones on the watch or using your
Garmin Connect account.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select User Profile > Heart Rate & Power Zones > Heart Rate.
3 Select Max. HR, and enter your maximum heart rate.
You can use the Auto Detection feature to automatically record your maximum heart rate during an activity
(Detecting Performance Measurements Automatically, page155).
4 Select LTHR, and enter your lactate threshold heart rate (Lactate Threshold, page108).
You can use the Auto Detection feature to automatically record your lactate threshold during an activity
(Detecting Performance Measurements Automatically, page155).
5 Select Resting HR > Set Custom, and enter your resting heart rate.
You can use the average resting heart rate measured by your watch, or you can set a custom resting heart
rate.
6 Select Zones > Based On.
7 Select an option:
• Select BPM to view and edit the zones in beats per minute.
• Select %Max. HR to view and edit the zones as a percentage of your maximum heart rate.
• Select %HRR to view and edit the zones as a percentage of your heart rate reserve (maximum heart rate
minus resting heart rate).
• Select %LTHR to view and edit the zones as a percentage of your lactate threshold heart rate.
8 Select a zone, and enter a value for each zone.
9 Select Sport Heart Rate, and select a sport profile to add separate heart rate zones (optional).
10 Repeat the steps to add sport heart rate zones (optional).
Letting the Watch Set Your Heart Rate Zones
The default settings allow the watch to detect your maximum heart rate and set your heart rate zones as a
percentage of your maximum heart rate.
• Verify that your user profile settings are accurate (Setting Up Your User Profile, page152).
• Run often with the wrist or chest heart rate monitor.
• View your heart rate trends and time in zones using your Garmin Connect account.
154 User Profile
Heart Rate Zone Calculations
Zone
% of Maximum Heart
Rate
Perceived Exertion Benefits
1 50–60% Relaxed, easy pace, rhythmic breathing
Beginning-level aerobic training,
reduces stress
2 60–70%
Comfortable pace, slightly deeper
breathing, conversation possible
Basic cardiovascular training, good
recovery pace
3 70–80%
Moderate pace, more difficult to hold
conversation
Improved aerobic capacity, optimal
cardiovascular training
4 80–90%
Fast pace and a bit uncomfortable,
breathing forceful
Improved anaerobic capacity and
threshold, improved speed
5 90–100%
Sprinting pace, unsustainable for long
period of time, labored breathing
Anaerobic and muscular endurance,
increased power
Setting Your Power Zones
The power zones use default values based on gender, weight, and average ability, and may not match your
personal abilities. If you know your functional threshold power (FTP) or threshold power (TP) value, you can
enter it and allow the software to calculate your power zones automatically. You can manually adjust your
zones on the watch or using your Garmin Connect account.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select User Profile > Heart Rate & Power Zones > Power.
3 Select an activity.
4 Select Based On.
5 Select an option:
• Select Watts to view and edit the zones in watts.
• Select % FTP or % TP to view and edit the zones as a percentage of your threshold power.
6 Select FTP or Threshold Power, and enter your value.
You can use the Auto Detection feature to automatically record your threshold power during an activity
(Detecting Performance Measurements Automatically, page155).
7 Select a zone, and enter a value for each zone.
8 If necessary, select Minimum, and enter a minimum power value.
Detecting Performance Measurements Automatically
The Auto Detection feature is turned on by default. The watch can automatically detect your maximum heart
rate and lactate threshold during an activity. When paired with a compatible power meter, the watch can
automatically detect your functional threshold power (FTP) during an activity.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select User Profile > Heart Rate & Power Zones > Auto Detection.
3 Select an option.
User Profile 155
Safety and Tracking Features
CAUTION
The safety and tracking features are supplemental features and should not be relied on as a primary method to
obtain emergency assistance. The Garmin Connect app does not contact emergency services on your behalf.
NOTICE
To use the safety and tracking features, the Descent watch must be connected to the Garmin Connect app
using Bluetooth technology. Your paired phone must be equipped with a data plan and be in an area of network
coverage where data is available. You can enter emergency contacts in your Garmin Connect account.
For more information about safety and tracking features, go to garmin.com/safety.
Assistance: Allows you to send a message with your name, LiveTrack link, and GPS location (if available) to
your emergency contacts.
Incident detection: When the Descent watch detects an incident during certain outdoor activities, the watch
sends an automated message, LiveTrack link, and GPS location (if available) to your emergency contacts.
LiveTrack: Allows friends and family to follow your races and training activities in real time. You can invite
followers using email or social media, allowing them to view your live data on a web page.
Live Event Sharing: Allows you to send messages to friends and family during an event, providing real-time
updates.
NOTE: This feature is available only if your watch is connected to a compatible Android phone.
GroupTrack: Allows you to keep track of your connections using LiveTrack directly on screen and in real time.
Adding Emergency Contacts
Emergency contact phone numbers are used for the safety and tracking features.
1 From the Garmin Connect app, select .
2 Select Safety & Tracking > Safety Features > Emergency Contacts > Add Emergency Contacts.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.
Your emergency contacts receive a notification when you add them as an emergency contact, and can accept or
decline your request. If a contact declines, you must choose another emergency contact.
Adding Contacts
You can add up to 50 contacts to the Garmin Connect app. Contact emails can be used with the LiveTrack
feature. Three of these contacts can be used as emergency contacts (Adding Emergency Contacts, page156).
1 From the Garmin Connect app, select .
2 Select Contacts.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions.
After you add contacts, you must sync your data to apply the changes to your Descent device (Using the Garmin
Connect App, page148).
156 Safety and Tracking Features
Turning Incident Detection On and Off
CAUTION
Incident detection is a supplemental feature available only for certain outdoor activities. Incident detection
should not be relied on as a primary method to obtain emergency assistance. The Garmin Connect app does not
contact emergency services on your behalf.
NOTICE
Before you can enable incident detection on your watch, you must set up emergency contacts in the Garmin
Connect app (Adding Emergency Contacts, page156). Your paired phone must be equipped with a data plan and
be in an area of network coverage where data is available. Your emergency contacts must be able to receive
emails or text messages (standard text messaging rates may apply).
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Safety & Tracking > Incident Detection.
3 Select a GPS activity.
NOTE: Incident detection is available only for certain outdoor activities.
When an incident is detected by your Descent watch and your phone is connected, the Garmin Connect app can
send an automated text message and email with your name and GPS location (if available) to your emergency
contacts. A message appears on your device and paired phone indicating your contacts will be informed after
15 seconds have elapsed. If assistance is not needed, you can cancel the automated emergency message.
Requesting Assistance
CAUTION
Assistance is a supplemental feature and should not be relied upon as a primary method to obtain emergency
assistance. The Garmin Connect app does not contact emergency services on your behalf.
NOTICE
Before you can request assistance, you must set up emergency contacts in the Garmin Connect app (Adding
Emergency Contacts, page156). Your paired phone must be equipped with a data plan and be in an area of
network coverage where data is available. Your emergency contacts must be able to receive emails or text
messages (standard text messaging rates may apply).
1 Hold LIGHT.
2 When you feel three vibrations, release the button to activate the assistance feature.
The countdown screen appears.
TIP: You can select Cancel before the countdown is complete to cancel the message.
Safety and Tracking Features 157
Starting a GroupTrack Session
NOTICE
Your paired phone must be equipped with a data plan and be in an area of network coverage where data is
available.
Before you can start a GroupTrack session, you must pair the watch with a compatible phone (Pairing Your
Phone, page144).
These instructions are for starting a GroupTrack session with a Descent watch. If your connections have other
compatible devices, you can see them on the map. The other devices may not be able to display GroupTrack
riders on the map.
1 On the Descent watch, hold MENU, and select Safety & Tracking > GroupTrack > Show on Map to enable
viewing connections on the map screen.
2 In the Garmin Connect app, select > Safety & Tracking > LiveTrack > > Settings > GroupTrack.
3 Select All Connections or Invite Only and select your connections.
4 Select Start LiveTrack.
5 On the watch, start an outdoor activity.
6 Scroll to the map to view your connections.
TIP: From the map, you can hold MENU and select Nearby Connections to view distance, direction, and pace
or speed information for other connections in the GroupTrack session.
Tips for GroupTrack Sessions
The GroupTrack feature allows you to keep track of other connections in your group using LiveTrack directly on
the screen. All members of the group must be your connections in your Garmin Connect account.
• Start your activity outside using GPS.
• Pair your Descent device with your phone using Bluetooth technology.
• In the Garmin Connect app, select > Connections to update the list of connections for your GroupTrack
session.
• Make sure all of your connections pair with their phones and start a LiveTrack session in the Garmin Connect
app.
• Make sure all your connections are in range (40km or 25mi.).
• During a GroupTrack session, scroll to the map to view your connections (Adding a Map to an Activity,
page71).
GroupTrack Settings
Hold MENU, and select Safety & Tracking > GroupTrack.
Show on Map: Enables you to view connections on the map screen during a GroupTrack session.
Activity Types: Allows you to select which activity types appear on the map screen during a GroupTrack
session.
158 Safety and Tracking Features
Health and Wellness Settings
Hold MENU, and select Health & Wellness.
Heart Rate: Allows you to customize the wrist heart rate monitor settings (Wrist Heart Rate Monitor Settings,
page125).
Pulse Ox Mode: Allows you to select a pulse oximeter mode (Setting the Pulse Oximeter Mode, page127).
Daily Summary: Enables the Body Battery daily summary that appears a few hours before the start of your sleep
window. The daily summary provides insight on how your daily stress and activity history impacted your Body
Battery level (Body Battery, page103).
Stress Alerts: Notifies you when periods of stress have drained your Body Battery level.
Rest Alerts: Notifies you after you have a restful period and its impact on your Body Battery level.
Move Alert: Enables or disables the Move Alert feature (Using the Move Alert, page159).
Goal Alerts: Allows you to turn on and off goal alerts, or turn them off only during activities. Goal alerts appear
for your daily steps goal, daily floors climbed goal, and weekly intensity minutes goal.
Move IQ: Allows you to turn on and off Move IQ
®
events. When your movements match familiar exercise
patterns, the Move IQ feature automatically detects the event and displays it in your timeline. The Move IQ
events show activity type and duration, but they do not appear in your activities list or newsfeed. For more
detail and accuracy, you can record a timed activity on your device.
Auto Goal
Your device creates a daily step goal automatically, based on your previous activity levels. As you move during
the day, the device shows your progress toward your daily goal.
If you choose not to use the auto goal feature, you can set a personalized step goal on your Garmin Connect
account.
Using the Move Alert
Sitting for prolonged periods of time can trigger undesirable metabolic state changes. The move alert reminds
you to keep moving. After one hour of inactivity, Move! and the move bar appear. Additional segments appear
after every 15 minutes of inactivity. The device also beeps or vibrates if audible tones are turned on (System
Settings, page169).
Go for a short walk (at least a couple of minutes) to reset the move alert.
Intensity Minutes
To improve your health, organizations such as the World Health Organization recommend at least 150 minutes
per week of moderate intensity activity, such as brisk walking, or 75 minutes per week of vigorous intensity
activity, such as running.
The watch monitors your activity intensity and tracks your time spent participating in moderate to vigorous
intensity activities (heart rate data is required to quantify vigorous intensity). The watch adds the amount of
moderate activity minutes with the amount of vigorous activity minutes. Your total vigorous intensity minutes
are doubled when added.
Earning Intensity Minutes
Your Descent watch calculates intensity minutes by comparing your heart rate data to your average resting
heart rate. If heart rate is turned off, the watch calculates moderate intensity minutes by analyzing your steps
per minute.
• Start a timed activity for the most accurate calculation of intensity minutes.
• Wear your watch all day and night for the most accurate resting heart rate.
Health and Wellness Settings 159
Sleep Tracking
While you are sleeping, the watch automatically detects your sleep and monitors your movement during
your normal sleep hours. You can set your normal sleep hours in the Garmin Connect app or in the watch
settings (Customizing Sleep Mode, page171). Sleep statistics include total hours of sleep, sleep stages, sleep
movement, and sleep score. Your sleep coach provides sleep need recommendations based on your sleep and
activity history, HRV status, and naps (Glances, page98). Naps are added to your sleep statistics, and can also
impact your recovery. You can view detailed sleep statistics on your Garmin Connect account.
NOTE: You can use do not disturb mode to turn off notifications and alerts, with the exception of alarms
(Controls, page117).
Using Automated Sleep Tracking
1 Wear your watch while sleeping.
2 Upload your sleep tracking data to your Garmin Connect account (Using the Garmin Connect App, page148).
You can view your sleep statistics on your Garmin Connect account.
You can view sleep information, including naps, on your Descent watch (Glances, page98).
Breathing Variations
CAUTION
The Descent device is not a medical device and is not intended for use in the diagnosis or monitoring of any
medical condition. For more information on pulse oximeter accuracy, go to garmin.com/ataccuracy.
The optical heart rate sensor on the Descent device has a pulse oximeter feature that can measure your
overnight breathing variations. Breathing variation insights are provided to enhance awareness of your sleep
environment and general wellness. Occasional or frequent breathing variations may be due to your individual
lifestyle factors or your sleeping environment. Contact your doctor or healthcare provider if you're concerned
about your level of breathing variations.
NOTE: You must turn on pulse oximeter sleep tracking to detect breathing variations (Setting the Pulse Oximeter
Mode, page127).
The sleep score glance displays your current breathing variations data.
NOTE: You may need to add the glance to your glances list (Customizing the Glance Loop, page102).
On your Garmin Connect account, you can view additional details about breathing variations, including trends
over multiple days.
Navigation
Viewing and Editing Your Saved Locations
TIP: You can save a location from the controls menu (Controls, page117).
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Navigate > Saved Locations.
3 Select a saved location.
4 Select an option to view or edit the location details.
Saving a Dual Grid Location
You can save your current location using dual grid coordinates to navigate back to the same location later.
1 Customize a button or button combination for the Dual Grid feature (Customizing the Hot Keys, page171).
2 Hold the button or button combination you customized to save a dual grid location.
3 Wait while the watch locates satellites.
4 Press START to save the location.
5 If necessary, press DOWN to edit the location details.
160 Navigation
Setting a Reference Point
You can set a reference point to provide the heading and distance to a location or bearing.
1 Select an option:
• Hold LIGHT.
TIP: You can set a reference point while you are recording an activity.
• From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Reference Point.
3 Wait while the watch locates satellites.
4 Press START, and select Add Point.
5 Select a location or bearing to use as a reference point for navigation.
The compass arrow and distance to your destination appear.
6 Point the top of the watch toward your heading.
When you deviate from the heading, the compass displays the direction from the heading and degree of
deviation.
7 If necessary, press START, and select Change Point to set a different reference point.
Navigating to a Destination
You can use your device to navigate to a destination or follow a course.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Navigation.
5 Select a category.
6 Respond to the on-screen prompts to choose a destination.
7 Select Go To.
Navigation information appears.
8 Press START to begin navigation.
Navigating to a Point of Interest
If the map data installed on your watch includes points of interest, you can navigate to them.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Navigation > Points of Interest, and select a category.
A list of points of interest near your current location appears.
5 If necessary, select an option:
• To search near a different location, select Search Near, and select a location.
• To search for a point of interest by name, select Spell Search, and enter a name.
• To search for nearby points of interest, select Around Me (Navigating with the Around Me Feature,
page138).
6 Select a point of interest from the search results.
7 Select Go.
Navigation information appears.
8 Press START to begin navigation.
Navigation 161
Navigating to the Starting Point of a Saved Activity
You can navigate back to the starting point of a saved activity in a straight line or along the path you traveled.
This feature is available only for activities that use GPS.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Navigation > Activities.
5 Select an activity.
6 Select Back to Start, and select an option:
• To navigate back to the starting point of your activity along the path you traveled, select TracBack.
• If you do not have a supported map or are using direct routing, select Route to navigate back to the
starting point of your activity in a straight line.
• If you are not using direct routing, select Route to navigate back to the starting point of your activity using
turn-by-turn directions.
Turn-by-turn directions help you navigate to the starting point of your last saved activity if you have a
supported map or are using direct routing. A line appears on the map from your current location to the
starting point of the last saved activity if you are not using direct routing.
NOTE: You can start the timer to prevent the device from timing out to watch mode.
7 Press DOWN to view the compass (optional).
The arrow points toward your starting point.
Navigating to Your Starting Point During an Activity
You can navigate back to the starting point of your current activity in a straight line or along the path you
traveled. This feature is available only for activities that use GPS.
1 During an activity, press STOP.
2 Select Back to Start, and select an option:
• To navigate back to the starting point of your activity along the path you traveled, select TracBack.
• If you do not have a supported map or are using direct routing, select Route to navigate back to the
starting point of your activity in a straight line.
• If you are not using direct routing, select Route to navigate back to the starting point of your activity using
turn-by-turn directions.
Your current location , the track to follow , and your destination appear on the map.
162 Navigation
Viewing Route Directions
You can view a list of turn-by-turn directions for your route.
1 While navigating a route, hold MENU.
2 Select Turn By Turn.
A list of turn-by-turn directions appears.
3 Press DOWN to view additional directions.
Navigating with Sight 'N Go
You can point the device at an object in the distance, such as a water tower, lock in the direction, and then
navigate to the object.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Navigation > Sight 'N Go.
5 Point the top of the watch at an object, and press START.
Navigation information appears.
6 Press START to begin navigation.
Marking and Starting Navigation to a Man Overboard Location
You can save a man overboard (MOB) location, and automatically start navigation back to it.
TIP: You can customize the hold function of the keys to access the MOB function (Customizing the Hot Keys,
page171).
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Navigation > Last MOB.
Navigation information appears.
Sharing a Location From a Map Using the Garmin Connect App
NOTICE
It is your responsibility to use discretion when sharing location information with others. Always ensure you are
aware of and comfortable with the individual with whom you share location information.
NOTE: This feature is available only if your course-compatible Garmin device is connected to an iPhone device
using Bluetooth technology.
You can share location information and data from Apple Maps to your compatible Garmin device.
1 From Apple Maps, select a location.
2 Select > .
3 If necessary, from the Garmin Connect app, select the Garmin device.
A notification appears in the Garmin Connect app indicating that the location in now available on your device
(Starting a GPS Activity From a Shared Location, page164).
Navigation 163
Starting a GPS Activity From a Shared Location
You can use the Garmin Connect app to share a location from Apple Maps to your watch, and navigate to that
location (Sharing a Location From a Map Using the Garmin Connect App, page163).
1 When you receive the location notification on your watch, select .
Your watch displays location information.
TIP: The location is saved to your watch. To view the location later, press START, and select Navigate >
Saved Locations.
2 Select Go To, and choose an activity.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions to proceed to your destination.
Navigating to a Shared Location During an Activity
This feature is designed for activities using GPS. If GPS is turned off for your activity, you can view the location
later.
TIP: The location is saved to your watch. To view the location later, press START, and select Navigate > Saved
Locations.
You can receive shared locations on your watch and navigate to those locations (Sharing a Location From a Map
Using the Garmin Connect App, page163).
1 Start a GPS activity (Starting an Activity, page42).
Your watch displays a notification indicating the name of a shared location.
2 Select to navigate to the shared location.
3 Follow the on-screen instructions to proceed to your destination.
Stopping Navigation
1 During an activity, hold MENU.
2 Select Stop Navigation.
Courses
WARNING
This feature allows users to download courses created by other users. Garmin makes no representations about
the safety, accuracy, reliability, completeness, or timeliness of courses created by third parties. Any use or
reliance on courses created by third parties is at your own risk.
You can send a course from your Garmin Connect account to your device. After it is saved to your device, you
can navigate the course on your device.
You can follow a saved course simply because it is a good route. For example, you can save and follow a bike
friendly commute to work.
You can also follow a saved course, trying to match or exceed previously set performance goals. For example,
if the original course was completed in 30 minutes, you can race against a Virtual Partner trying to complete the
course in under 30 minutes.
164 Navigation
Creating and Following a Course on Your Device
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Navigation > Courses > Create New.
5 Enter a name for the course, and select .
6 Select Add Location.
7 Select an option.
8 If necessary, repeat steps 6 and 7.
9 Select Done > Do Course.
Navigation information appears.
10 Press START to begin navigation.
Creating a Round-Trip Course
The device can create a round-trip course based on a specified distance and direction of navigation.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Run or Bike.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Navigation > Round-Trip Course.
5 Enter the total distance for the course.
6 Select a direction heading.
The device creates up to three courses. You can press DOWN to view the courses.
7 Press START to select a course.
8 Select an option:
• To begin navigation, select Go.
• To view the course on the map and pan or zoom the map, select Map.
• To view a list of turns in the course, select Turn By Turn.
• To view an elevation plot of the course, select Elevation Plot.
• To save the course, select Save.
• To view a list of ascents in the course, select View Climbs.
Creating a Course on Garmin Connect
Before you can create a course on the Garmin Connect app, you must have a Garmin Connect account (Garmin
Connect, page147).
1 From the Garmin Connect app, select .
2 Select Training & Planning > Courses > Create Course.
3 Select a course type.
4 Follow the on-screen instructions.
5 Select Done.
NOTE: You can send this course to your device (Sending a Course to Your Device, page166).
Navigation 165
Sending a Course to Your Device
You can send a course you created using the Garmin Connect app to your device (Creating a Course on Garmin
Connect, page165).
1 From the Garmin Connect app, select .
2 Select Training & Planning > Courses.
3 Select a course.
4 Select .
5 Select your compatible device.
6 Follow the on-screen instructions.
Viewing or Editing Course Details
You can view or edit course details before you navigate a course.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select an activity.
3 Hold MENU.
4 Select Navigate > Courses.
5 Select a course.
6 Select an option:
• To begin navigation, select Do Course.
• To create a custom pace band, select PacePro.
• To create or view an analysis of your effort for the course, select Power Guide.
• To view the course on the map and pan or zoom the map, select Map.
• To begin the course in reverse, select Do Course in Reverse.
• To view an elevation plot of the course, select Elevation Plot.
• To change the course name, select Name.
• To edit the course path, select Edit.
• To view a list of ascents in the course, select View Climbs.
• To delete the course, select Delete.
Projecting a Waypoint
You can create a new location by projecting the distance and bearing from your current location to a new
location.
NOTE: You may need to add the Project Wpt. app to the activities and apps list.
1 From the watch face, press START.
2 Select Project Wpt..
3 Press UP or DOWN to set the heading.
4 Press START.
5 Press DOWN to select a unit of measure.
6 Press UP to enter the distance.
7 Press START to save.
The projected waypoint is saved with a default name.
Navigation Settings
You can customize the map features and appearance when navigating to a destination.
166 Navigation
Customizing Navigation Data Screens
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Navigation > Data Screens.
3 Select an option:
• Select Map > Status to turn on or off the map.
• Select Map > Data Field to turn on or off a data field that shows routing information on the map.
• Select Up Ahead to turn on or off information about upcoming course points.
• Select Guide to turn on or off the guide screen that displays the compass bearing or course to follow while
navigating.
• Select Elevation Plot to turn on or off the elevation plot.
• Select a screen to add, remove, or customize.
Setting Up a Heading Bug
You can set up a heading indicator to display on your data pages while navigating. The indicator points to your
target heading.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Navigation > Heading Bug.
Setting Navigation Alerts
You can set alerts to help you navigate to your destination.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Navigation > Alerts.
3 Select an option:
• To set an alert for a specified distance from your final destination, select Final Distance.
• To set an alert for the estimated time remaining until you reach your final destination, select Final ETE.
• To set an alert when you stray from the course, select Off Course.
• To enable turn-by-turn navigation prompts, select Turn Prompts.
4 If necessary, select Status to turn on the alert.
5 If necessary, enter a distance or time value, and select .
Power Manager Settings
Hold MENU, and select Power Manager.
Battery Saver: Allows you to customize system settings to extend battery life in watch mode (Customizing the
Battery Saver Feature, page168).
Power Modes: Allows you to customize system settings, activity settings, and GPS settings to extend battery
life during an activity (Customizing Power Modes, page168).
Battery Percentage: Displays remaining battery life as a percentage.
Battery Estimates: Displays remaining battery life as an estimated number of days or hours.
Power Manager Settings 167
Customizing the Battery Saver Feature
The battery saver feature allows you to quickly adjust system settings to extend battery life in watch mode.
You can turn on the battery saver feature from the controls menu (Controls, page117).
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Power Manager > Battery Saver.
3 Select Status to turn on the battery saver feature.
4 Select Edit, and select an option:
• Select Watch Face to enable a low-power watch face that updates once per minute.
• Select Music to disable listening to music from your watch.
• Select Phone to disconnect your paired phone.
• Select Wi-Fi to disconnect from a Wi‑Fi network.
• Select Wrist Heart Rate to turn off the wrist heart rate monitor.
• Select Pulse Oximeter to turn off the pulse oximeter sensor.
• Select Always On Display to turn off the screen when not in use.
• Select Brightness to reduce the screen brightness.
The watch displays the hours of battery life gained with each setting change.
5 Select Low Battery Alert to receive an alert when the battery power is low.
Changing the Power Mode
You can change the power mode to extend battery life during an activity.
1 During an activity, hold MENU.
2 Select Power Mode.
3 Select an option.
The watch displays the hours of battery life available with the selected power mode.
Customizing Power Modes
Your device comes preloaded with several power modes, allowing you to quickly adjust system settings, activity
settings, and GPS settings to extend battery life during an activity. You can customize existing power modes
and create new custom power modes.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Power Manager > Power Modes.
3 Select an option:
• Select a power mode to customize.
• Select Add New to create a custom power mode.
4 If necessary, enter a custom name.
5 Select an option to customize specific power mode settings.
For example, you can change the GPS setting or disconnect your paired phone.
The watch displays the hours of battery life gained with each setting change.
6 If necessary, select Done to save and use the custom power mode.
Restoring a Power Mode
You can reset a preloaded power mode to the factory default settings.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Power Manager > Power Modes.
3 Select a preloaded power mode.
4 Select Restore > Yes.
168 Power Manager Settings
System Settings
Hold MENU, and select System.
Language: Sets the language displayed on the watch.
Time: Adjusts the time settings (Time Settings, page169).
Display: Adjusts the screen settings (Changing the Screen Settings, page170).
Touch: Enables the touchscreen during general use, activities, or sleep.
Satellites: Sets the default satellite system to use for activities. If necessary, you can customize the satellite
setting for each activity (Satellite Settings, page77).
Sound and Vibe: Sets the watch sounds, such as button tones, alerts, and vibrations.
Sleep Mode: Sets your sleep hours and sleep mode preferences (Customizing Sleep Mode, page171).
Night Vision: Enables the touchscreen and sets your display preferences for night vision mode.
Do Not Disturb: Enables the Do Not Disturb mode. You can edit your preferences for the screen, notifications,
alerts, and wrist gestures.
Hot Keys: Assigns shortcuts to buttons (Customizing the Hot Keys, page171).
Auto Lock: Locks the buttons and touchscreen automatically to prevent accidental button presses and
touchscreen swipes. Use the During Activity option to lock the buttons and touchscreen during a timed
activity. Use the Not During Activity option to lock the buttons and touchscreen when you are not recording a
timed activity.
Format: Sets general format preferences, such as the units of measure, pace and speed shown during activities,
the start of the week, and geographical position format and datum options (Changing the Units of Measure,
page171).
Perf. Condition: Enables the performance condition feature during an activity (Performance Condition,
page107).
Data Recording: Sets how the watch records activity data. The Smart recording option (default) allows for
longer activity recordings. The Every Second recording option provides more detailed activity recordings, but
may not record entire activities that last for longer periods of time.
USB Mode: Sets the watch to use MTP (media transfer protocol) or Garmin mode when connected to a
computer.
Back Up & Restore: Configures watch data backups (Back Up and Restore Settings, page171).
Reset: Resets user data and settings (Resetting All Default Settings, page179).
Software Update: Installs downloaded software updates, enables automatic updates, or manually checks for
updates (Product Updates, page177). You can select What's New to view a list of new features from the last
software update you installed.
About: Displays device, software, license, and regulatory information.
Time Settings
Hold MENU, and select System > Time.
Time Format: Sets the watch to show time in a 12-hour, 24-hour, or military format.
Date Format: Sets the display order for the day, month, and year for dates.
Set Time: Sets the time zone for the watch. The Auto option sets the time zone automatically based on your
GPS position.
Time: Allows you to adjust the time if the Set Time option is set to Manual.
Alerts: Allows you to set hourly alerts, as well as sunrise and sunset alerts that sound a specific number of
minutes or hours before the actual sunrise or sunset occurs (Setting Time Alerts, page170).
Time Sync: Allows you to manually sync the time when you change time zones, and to update for daylight
saving time (Syncing the Time, page170).
System Settings 169
Setting Time Alerts
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select System > Time > Alerts.
3 Select an option:
• To set an alert to sound a specific number of minutes or hours before the actual sunset occurs, select Til
Sunset > Status > On, select Time, and enter the time.
• To set an alert to sound a specific number of minutes or hours before the actual sunrise occurs, select Til
Sunrise > Status > On, select Time, and enter the time.
• To set an alert to sound every hour, select Hourly > On.
Syncing the Time
Each time you turn on the watch and acquire satellites or open the Garmin Connect app on your paired phone,
the watch automatically detects your time zone and the current time of day. You can also manually sync the
time when you change time zones, and to update for daylight saving time.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select System > Time > Time Sync.
3 Wait while the watch connects to your paired phone or locates satellites (Acquiring Satellite Signals,
page180).
TIP: You can press DOWN to switch the source.
Changing the Screen Settings
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select System > Display.
3 Select Large Fonts to increase the size of the text on the screen.
4 Select an option:
• Select In-Dive.
• Select During Activity.
• Select General Use.
• Select During Sleep.
• Select Night Vision.
5 Select an option:
NOTE: Not all options are available for all modes.
• Select Always On Display to keep the watch face data visible and turn down the brightness and
background. This option impacts the battery and display life.
• Select Brightness to set the brightness level of the screen.
• Select Red Shift to turn the screen to shades of red, green, or orange so that you can use the watch in low
light conditions and help preserve your night vision.
• Select Wrist Gesture to turn on the screen by raising and turning your arm to look at your wrist.
• Select Timeout to set the length of time before the screen turns off.
170 System Settings
Customizing Sleep Mode
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select System > Sleep Mode.
3 Select an option:
• Select Schedule, select a day, and enter your normal sleep hours.
• Select Watch Face to use the sleep watch face.
• Select Display to configure the screen settings.
• Select Nap Alarm to set nap alarms to play as a tone, vibration, or both.
• Select Touch to turn the touchscreen on or off.
• Select Do Not Disturb to enable or disable do not disturb mode.
• Select Battery Saver to enable or disable battery saver mode (Customizing the Battery Saver Feature,
page168).
Customizing the Hot Keys
You can customize the hold function of individual buttons and combinations of buttons.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select System > Hot Keys.
3 Select a button or combination of buttons to customize.
4 Select a function.
Changing the Units of Measure
You can customize units of measure for distance, pace and speed, elevation, and more.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select System > Format > Units.
3 Select a measurement type.
4 Select a unit of measure.
Back Up and Restore Settings
You can back up the settings from an existing Garmin watch and restore those settings to a different,
compatible Garmin watch using the Garmin Connect app (Restoring Your Settings and Data from Garmin
Connect, page171). Settings include sport profiles, widgets, user settings, workouts, and more.
Hold MENU, and select System > Back Up & Restore.
Automatic Backups: Periodically backs up your settings to your Garmin Connect account.
Back Up Now: Allows you to manually back up your settings to your Garmin Connect account.
Backup Contents: Displays the type of data that is saved.
Restoring Your Settings and Data from Garmin Connect
1 From the Garmin Connect app, select .
2 Select Garmin Devices, and select your watch.
3 Select System > Back Up & Restore > Device Backups.
4 Select a backup from the list.
5 Select Restore from Backup > Restore.
6 Follow the on-screen instructions.
7 Wait for your watch to sync with the app.
8 On your watch, press START, and select .
The watch restarts and restores your settings and data.
9 Follow the on-screen instructions.
System Settings 171
Viewing Device Information
You can view device information, such as the unit ID, software version, regulatory information, and license
agreement.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select System > About.
Viewing E-label Regulatory and Compliance Information
The label for this device is provided electronically. The e-label may provide regulatory information, such as
identification numbers provided by the FCC or regional compliance markings, as well as applicable product and
licensing information.
1 Hold MENU.
2 From the system menu, select About.
Device Information
About the AMOLED Display
By default, the watch settings are optimized for battery life and performance (Tips for Maximizing the Battery
Life, page180).
Image persistence, or pixel "burn-in," is normal behavior for AMOLED devices. To extend the display life, you
should avoid displaying static images at high brightness levels for long time periods. To minimize burn-in, the
Descent display turns off after the selected timeout (Changing the Screen Settings, page170). You can turn your
wrist toward your body, tap the touchscreen, or press a button to wake the watch.
Charging the Watch
WARNING
This device contains a lithium-ion battery. See the Important Safety and Product Information guide in the product
box for product warnings and other important information.
NOTICE
To prevent corrosion, thoroughly clean and dry the contacts and the surrounding area before charging or
connecting to a computer. Refer to the cleaning instructions (Device Care, page175).
1 Pinch the sides of the charging clip.
2 Align the clip with the contacts on the back of the watch, and release the clip.
3 Plug the USB cable into a USB charging port.
The watch displays the current battery charge level.
172 Device Information
Specifications
Battery type Rechargeable, built-in lithium-ion battery
Water rating
20ATM
1
Dive (EN 13319)
2
Decompression model Bühlmann ZHL-16C
Operating and storage temperature
range
From -20º to 45ºC (from -4º to 113ºF)
Underwater operating temperature
range
From 0° to 40°C (from 32° to 104°F)
USB charging temperature range From 0º to 45ºC (from 32º to 113ºF)
European Union (EU) wireless frequen
cies (power)
2.4 GHz @ 0 dBm maximum
13.56 MHz @ -30 dBm maximum
EU SAR values 0.11 W/kg limb, 0.11 W/kg torso
Depth sensor
Accurate from 0 m to 200 m (0 ft. to 656 ft.) complying with EN 13319
Resolution (m): 0.1 m until 99.9 m, 1 m at 100 m
Resolution (ft.): 1 ft.
Inspection interval Inspect parts before each use for damage. Replace parts as needed.
3
1
The device withstands pressure equivalent to a depth of 200m. For more information, go to www.garmin.com/waterrating.
2
Designed to comply with CSN EN 13319.
3
Aside from normal wear and tear, performance is not affected by aging.
Device Information 173
Battery Information
The actual battery life depends on the features enabled on your watch, such as wrist-based heart rate, phone
notifications, GPS, internal sensors, and connected sensors.
Mode Descent Mk3/Mk3i - 43 mm Battery Life Descent Mk3i - 51 mm Battery Life
Smartwatch mode
Up to 10 days with Wrist Gesture
Up to 4 days with Always On Display
Up to 25 days with Wrist Gesture
Up to 10 days with Always On Display
Battery saver watch mode
Up to 12 days with Wrist Gesture
Not applicable for Always On Display
Up to 31 days with Wrist Gesture
Not applicable for Always On Display
GPS only mode
Up to 28 hours with Wrist Gesture
Up to 22 hours with Always On Display
Up to 76 hours with Wrist Gesture
Up to 56 hours with Always On Display
All satellite systems mode
Up to 20 hours with Wrist Gesture
Up to 16 hours with Always On Display
Up to 55 hours with Wrist Gesture
Up to 43 hours with Always On Display
All satellite systems plus
multi-band mode
Up to 17 hours with Wrist Gesture
Up to 14 hours with Always On Display
Up to 48 hours with Wrist Gesture
Up to 38 hours with Always On Display
All satellite systems with
music mode
Up to 6 hours with Wrist Gesture
Up to 6 hours with Always On Display
Up to 17 hours with Wrist Gesture
Up to 17 hours with Always On Display
Max. battery GPS mode
Up to 44 hours with Wrist Gesture
Not applicable for Always On Display
Up to 118 hours with Wrist Gesture
Not applicable for Always On Display
Expedition GPS mode
Up to 10 days with Wrist Gesture
Not applicable for Always On Display
Up to 24 days with Wrist Gesture
Not applicable for Always On Display
Dive mode
Not applicable for Wrist Gesture
Up to 30 hours with Always On Display
Not applicable for Wrist Gesture
Up to 66 hours with Always On Display
Dive mode with air integra
tion
NOTE: This mode is only
available for the Descent
Mk3i models.
Not applicable for Wrist Gesture
Up to 15 hours with Always On Display
Not applicable for Wrist Gesture
Up to 40 hours with Always On Display
174 Device Information
Device Care
CAUTION
Do not remove the exterior guard piece on the right side of the watch between the two buttons. Doing so
could damage the watch barometer and cause degraded barometer performance and/or adversely affect other
measurements, such as air pressure and dive features, which could result in property damage or personal injury.
NOTICE
Do not use a sharp object to clean the device.
Never use a hard or sharp object to operate the touchscreen, or damage may result.
Avoid chemical cleaners, solvents, and insect repellents that can damage plastic components and finishes.
Thoroughly rinse the device with fresh water after exposure to chlorine, salt water, sunscreen, cosmetics,
alcohol, or other harsh chemicals. Prolonged exposure to these substances can damage the case.
Do not wash the device under high pressure, because jets of water or air may cause damage to the depth
sensor or barometer.
Avoid extreme shock and harsh treatment, because it can degrade the life of the product.
Do not store the device where prolonged exposure to extreme temperatures can occur, because it can cause
permanent damage.
Discontinue use if the device is damaged or if it is stored at a temperature outside the specified storage
temperature range.
Cleaning the Watch
CAUTION
Some users may experience skin irritation after prolonged use of the watch, especially if the user has sensitive
skin or allergies. If you notice any skin irritation, remove the watch and give your skin time to heal. To help
prevent skin irritation, ensure the watch is clean and dry, and do not overtighten the watch on your wrist.
NOTICE
Even small amounts of sweat or moisture can cause corrosion of the electrical contacts when connected to a
charger. Corrosion can prevent charging and data transfer.
TIP: For more information, go to garmin.com/fitandcare.
1 Rinse with water, or use a damp lint-free cloth.
2 Allow the watch to dry completely.
Device Information 175
Changing the QuickFit
®
Bands
1 Slide the latch on the QuickFit band, and remove the band from the watch.
2 Align the new band with the watch.
3 Press the band into place.
NOTE: Make sure the band is secure. The latch should close over the watch pin.
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to change the other band.
Extra Long Diving Band
Your device comes with an extra long band you can wear over a thick exposure suit.
Metal Watch Band Adjustment
If your watch includes a metal watch band, you should take your watch to a jeweler or other professional to
adjust the length of the metal band.
Data Management
Deleting Files
NOTICE
If you do not know the purpose of a file, do not delete it. Your device memory contains important system files
that should not be deleted.
1 Open the Garmin drive or volume.
2 If necessary, open a folder or volume.
3 Select a file.
4 Press the Delete key on your keyboard.
NOTE: Mac
®
operating systems provide limited support for MTP file transfer mode. You must open the
Garmin drive on a Windows operating system. You should use the Garmin Express application to remove
music files from your device.
176 Device Information
Troubleshooting
Product Updates
Your device automatically checks for updates when connected to Bluetooth or Wi‑Fi. You can manually check
for updates from the system settings (System Settings, page169). On your computer, install Garmin Express
(www.garmin.com/express). On your phone, install the Garmin Connect app.
This provides easy access to these services for Garmin devices:
• Software updates
• Map updates
• Course updates
• Data uploads to Garmin Connect
• Product registration
Getting More Information
You can find more information about this product on the Garmin website.
• Go to support.garmin.com for additional manuals, articles, and software updates.
• Go to buy.garmin.com, or contact your Garmin dealer for information about optional accessories and
replacement parts.
• Go to www.garmin.com/ataccuracy for information about feature accuracy.
This is not a medical device.
My device is in the wrong language
You can change the device language selection if you have accidently selected the wrong language on the
device.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Scroll down to the last item in the list, and press START.
3 Press START.
4 Select your language.
Is my phone compatible with my watch?
The Descent watch is compatible with phones using Bluetooth technology.
Go to garmin.com/ble for Bluetooth compatibility information.
My phone will not connect to the watch
If your phone will not connect to the watch, you can try these tips.
• Turn off your phone and your watch, and turn them back on again.
• Enable Bluetooth technology on your phone.
• Update the Garmin Dive app to the latest version.
• Remove your watch from the Garmin Dive app and the Bluetooth settings on your phone to retry the pairing
process.
• If you bought a new phone, remove your watch from the Garmin Dive app on the phone you intend to stop
using.
• Bring your phone within 10m (33ft.) of the watch.
• On your phone, open the Garmin Dive app, and select > Garmin Devices > Add Device to enter pairing
mode.
• From the watch face, hold MENU, and select Connectivity > Phone > Pair Phone.
Troubleshooting 177
Can I use my Bluetooth sensor with my watch?
The watch is compatible with some Bluetooth sensors. The first time you connect a sensor to your Garmin
watch, you must pair the watch and sensor. After they are paired, the watch connects to the sensor
automatically when you start an activity and the sensor is active and within range.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select Sensors & Accessories > Add New.
3 Select an option:
• Select Search All Sensors.
• Select your sensor type.
You can customize the optional data fields (Customizing the Data Screens, page71).
My headphones will not connect to the watch
If your Bluetooth headphones were previously connected to your phone, they may connect to your phone
automatically instead of connecting to your watch. You can try these tips.
• Turn off Bluetooth technology on your phone.
Refer to the owner's manual for your phone for more information.
• Stay 10m (33ft.) away from your phone while connecting your headphones to your watch.
• Pair your headphones with your watch (Connecting Bluetooth Headphones, page143).
My music cuts out or my headphones won't stay connected
When using a Descent watch connected to Bluetooth headphones, the signal is strongest when there is a direct
line of sight between the watch and the antenna on the headphones.
• If the signal passes through your body, you may experience signal loss or your headphones may become
disconnected.
• If you wear your Descent watch on your left wrist, you should make sure the headphone's Bluetooth antenna
is on your left ear.
• Since headphones vary by model, you can try wearing the watch on your other wrist.
• If you are using metal or leather watch bands, you can switch to silicone watch bands to improve signal
strength.
Restarting Your Watch
1 Hold LIGHT until the watch turns off.
2 Hold LIGHT to turn on the watch.
178 Troubleshooting
Resetting All Default Settings
Before you reset all default settings, you should sync the watch with the Garmin Connect app to upload your
activity data.
You can reset all of the watch settings to the factory default values.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select System > Reset.
3 Select an option:
• To reset all of the watch settings to the factory default values and save all user-entered information and
activity history, select Reset Default Settings.
• To delete all activities from the history, select Delete All Activities.
• To reset all distance and time totals, select Reset Totals.
• To delete your tissue load data for scuba diving, select Reset Tissues.
NOTE: You should reset your tissue load only if you do not plan to use the device again in the future. This
can be useful for dive shops that provide devices for rent.
• To reset all of the watch settings to the factory default values and delete all user-entered information and
activity history, select Delete Data and Reset Settings.
NOTE: If you have set up a GarminPay wallet, this option deletes the wallet from your watch. If you have
music stored on your watch, this option deletes your stored music.
Diving
Resetting Your Tissue Load
You can reset your current tissue load saved on the device. You should reset your tissue load only if you do not
plan to use the device again in the future. This can be useful for dive shops that provide devices for rent.
1 Hold MENU.
2 Select System > Reset > Reset Tissues.
Resetting the Surface Pressure
The device automatically determines the surface pressure using the barometric altimeter. Large pressure
changes, such as during a flight, can cause the watch to automatically start a dive activity. If the watch starts a
dive activity incorrectly, you can reset the surface pressure by connecting the watch to a computer. If you do not
have access to a computer, you can reset the surface pressure manually.
1 Hold LIGHT until the watch turns off.
2 Hold LIGHT to turn on the watch.
3 When the product logo appears, hold MENU until you are prompted to reset the surface pressure.
Troubleshooting 179
Tips for Maximizing the Battery Life
To extend the life of the battery, you can try these tips.
• Change the power mode during an activity (Changing the Power Mode, page168).
• Turn on the battery saver feature from the controls menu (Controls, page117).
• Reduce the screen timeout (Changing the Screen Settings, page170).
• Stop using the Always On Display screen timeout option, and select a shorter timeout (Changing the Screen
Settings, page170).
• Reduce the screen brightness (Changing the Screen Settings, page170).
• Use UltraTrac satellite mode for your activity (Satellite Settings, page77).
• Turn off Bluetooth technology when you are not using connected features (Controls, page117).
• When pausing your activity for a longer period of time, use the Resume Later option (Stopping an Activity,
page43).
• Use a watch face that is not updated every second.
For example, use a watch face without a second hand (Customizing the Watch Face, page97).
• Limit the phone notifications the watch displays (Managing Notifications, page145).
• Stop broadcasting heart rate data to paired devices (Broadcasting Heart Rate Data, page125).
• Turn off wrist-based heart rate monitoring (Wrist Heart Rate Monitor Settings, page125).
NOTE: Wrist-based heart rate monitoring is used to calculate vigorous intensity minutes and calories burned.
• Turn on manual pulse oximeter readings (Setting the Pulse Oximeter Mode, page127).
How can I undo a lap button press?
During an activity, you might accidently press the lap button. In most cases, appears on the screen next to
a button, and you will have a few seconds to press the button and discard the most recent lap or sport change.
The lap undo feature is available for activities that support manual laps, manual sport changes, and automatic
sport changes. The lap undo feature is not available for activities that trigger automatic laps, runs, rests, or
pauses, such as gym activities, pool swimming, and workouts.
Acquiring Satellite Signals
The device may need a clear view of the sky to acquire satellite signals. The time and date are set automatically
based on the GPS position.
TIP: For more information about GPS, go to garmin.com/aboutGPS.
1 Go outdoors to an open area.
The front of the device should be oriented toward the sky.
2 Wait while the device locates satellites.
It may take 30–60 seconds to locate satellite signals.
Improving GPS Satellite Reception
• Frequently sync the watch to your Garmin account:
◦ Connect your watch to a computer using the USB cable and the Garmin Express application.
◦ Sync your watch to the Garmin Dive app using your Bluetooth enabled phone.
◦ Connect your watch to your Garmin account using a Wi‑Fi wireless network.
While connected to your Garmin account, the watch downloads several days of satellite data, allowing it to
quickly locate satellite signals.
• Take your watch outside to an open area away from tall buildings and trees.
• Remain stationary for a few minutes.
The heart rate on my watch is not accurate
For more information on your heart rate sensor, go to garmin.com/heartrate.
180 Troubleshooting
The activity temperature reading is not accurate
Your body temperature affects the temperature reading for the internal temperature sensor. To get the most
accurate temperature reading, you should remove the watch from your wrist and wait 20 to 30 minutes.
You can also use an optional tempe external temperature sensor to view accurate ambient temperature
readings while wearing the watch.
Exiting Demo Mode
Demo mode shows a preview of features on your watch.
1 Quickly press LIGHT eight times.
2 Select .
Activity Tracking
For more information about activity tracking accuracy, go to garmin.com/ataccuracy.
My step count does not seem accurate
If your step count does not seem accurate, you can try these tips.
• Wear the watch on your non-dominant wrist.
• Carry the watch in your pocket when pushing a stroller or lawn mower.
• Carry the watch in your pocket when actively using your hands or arms only.
NOTE: The watch may interpret some repetitive motions, such as washing dishes, folding laundry, or clapping
your hands, as steps.
The step counts on my watch and my Garmin Connect account don't match
The step count on your Garmin Connect account updates when you sync your watch.
1 Select an option:
• Sync your step count with the Garmin Express application (Using Garmin Connect on Your Computer,
page148).
• Sync your step count with the Garmin Connect app (Using the Garmin Connect App, page148).
2 Wait while your data syncs.
Syncing can take several minutes.
NOTE: Refreshing the Garmin Connect app or the Garmin Express application does not sync your data or
update your step count.
The floors climbed amount does not seem accurate
Your watch uses an internal barometer to measure elevation changes as you climb floors. A floor climbed is
equal to 3m (10ft.).
• Avoid holding handrails or skipping steps while climbing stairs.
• In windy environments, cover the watch with your sleeve or jacket as strong gusts can cause erratic readings.
Troubleshooting 181
Appendix
Data Fields
NOTE: Not all data fields are available for all activity types. Some data fields require ANT+ or Bluetooth
accessories to display data. Some data fields appear in more than one category on the watch.
TIP: You can also customize the data fields from the watch settings in the Garmin Connect app.
Cadence Fields
Name Description
Average Cadence Cycling. The average cadence for the current activity.
Average Cadence Running. The average cadence for the current activity.
Cadence
Cycling. The number of revolutions of the crank arm. Your device must be connected to a
cadence accessory for this data to appear.
Cadence Running. The steps per minute (right and left).
Lap Cadence Cycling. The average cadence for the current lap.
Lap Cadence Running. The average cadence for the current lap.
Last Lap Cadence Cycling. The average cadence for the last completed lap.
Last Lap Cadence Running. The average cadence for the last completed lap.
Charts
Name Description
Barometer Chart A chart showing the barometric pressure over time.
Elevation Chart A chart showing the elevation over time.
Heart Rate Chart A chart showing your heart rate throughout the activity.
Pace Chart A chart showing your pace throughout the activity.
Power Chart A chart showing your power throughout the activity.
Speed Chart A chart showing your speed throughout the activity.
Compass Fields
Name Description
Compass Heading The direction you are moving based on the compass.
GPS Heading The direction you are moving based on GPS.
Heading The direction you are moving.
182 Appendix
Distance Fields
Name Description
Distance The distance traveled for the current track or activity.
Interval Distance The distance traveled for the current interval.
Lap Distance The distance traveled for the current lap.
Last Lap Distance The distance traveled for the last completed lap.
Diving Fields
Name Description
Air Time Remaining
The amount of time you can remain at the current depth before a 9 m/min. (30
ft./min.) ascent to the surface would result in surfacing with reserve pressure. If
multiple tanks are included in gas consumption calculations, air time remaining is
calculated using the combined pressure and reserve pressure of all tanks.
Ascent Rate The current rate of ascent toward the surface.
Avg Temperature The average temperature during the activity.
Bailout TTS
The amount of time required to reach the surface if you switch to an open-circuit
bailout gas.
CNS Your current central nervous system oxygen toxicity percentage.
Current Gas PO2
The partial pressure of oxygen (PO2) of the diluent gas during a closed-circuit
rebreather (CCR) dive.
Diluent PO2
The partial pressure of oxygen (PO2) of the diluent gas during a closed-circuit
rebreather (CCR) dive, even if you are bailed out to an open-circuit gas.
Dive Number The number of dives you have completed.
FiO2
The fraction of inspired oxygen, which is the percentage composition of oxygen in
the current gas.
Gas Consumption Rate
The gas consumption rate for your transceiver, calculated using the pressure
change over the last two minutes.
Gas Density
The density of the selected gas at the current depth and temperature. It displays
in yellow when over 5.2 g/L, and in red when over 6.2 g/L, indicating it is difficult
to fully exhale accumulated CO2 due to the density of the gas blends.
GF99
The current gradient factor. If you follow the dive computer's guidance, the
selected low gradient factor should display when you approach your first decom
pression stop, and the selected high gradient factor value should display when
you approach the surface. On-Gassing displays when you take on additional
tissue load.
Last Dive Ascent Time The amount of time you spent ascending to the surface during the last dive.
Last Dive Avg. Asc. Rate The average rate of ascent during the last dive.
Last Dive Avg. Desc. Rate The average rate of descent during the last dive.
Last Dive Avg Heart Rate Your average heart rate during the last dive.
Last Dive Avg Temperature The average temperature during the last dive.
Appendix 183
Name Description
Last Dive Beginning Heart
Rate
Your heart rate at the beginning of the last dive.
Last Dive Depth The maximum depth achieved during the last dive.
Last Dive Descent Time
The amount of time you spent descending to the maximum depth during the last
dive.
Last Dive Ending Heart
Rate
Your heart rate at the end of the last dive.
Last Dive Hang Time
The amount of time you spent neither ascending nor descending during the last
dive.
Last Dive Max Asc. Rate The maximum rate of ascent during the last dive.
Last Dive Max Desc. Rate The maximum rate of descent during the last dive.
Last Dive Max Heart Rate Your maximum heart rate during the last dive.
Last Dive Max Tempera
ture
The maximum temperature during the last dive.
Last Dive Min Heart Rate Your minimum heart rate during the last dive.
Last Dive Min Temperature The minimum temperature during the last dive.
Last Dive Time The amount of time you spent below the surface during the last dive.
Maximum Depth The maximum depth descended during a dive.
Max Temperature The maximum temperature during the activity.
Min Temperature The minimum temperature during the activity.
N2/He Load Your current nitrogen and helium tissue load level.
OTU Your current oxygen toxicity units.
Raw Ceiling The unrounded depth the diver should not ascend past.
Surface Distance
The surface distance between the dive entry and exit points during the dive
activity.
Surface Gradient Factor The expected gradient factor if the diver were to instantaneously surface.
Surface Time The amount of time elapsed since surfacing from a dive.
Time to Surface The amount of time required to safely ascend to the surface.
Total Dive Time The total amount of time spent below the surface during the dive activity.
TTS @ +5 min.
The amount of time required to safely ascend to the surface if you remain at your
current depth for five more minutes.
TTS Δ +5 min.
The difference between the amount of time required to safely ascend to the
surface now, and the amount of time required to safely ascend to the surface if
you remain at your current depth for five more minutes.
184 Appendix
Elevation Fields
Name Description
Average Ascent The average vertical distance of ascent since the last reset.
Average Descent The average vertical distance of descent since the last reset.
Elevation The altitude of your current location above or below sea level.
Glide Ratio The ratio of horizontal distance traveled to the change in vertical distance.
GPS Elevation The altitude of your current location using GPS.
Grade
The calculation of rise (elevation) over run (distance). For example, if for every 3m
(10ft.) you climb you travel 60m (200ft.), the grade is 5%.
Lap Ascent The vertical distance of ascent for the current lap.
Lap Descent The vertical distance of descent for the current lap.
Last Lap Ascent The vertical distance of ascent for the last completed lap.
Last Lap Descent The vertical distance of descent for the last completed lap.
Maximum Ascent The maximum rate of ascent in feet per minute or meters per minute since the last reset.
Maximum Descent
The maximum rate of descent in meters per minute or feet per minute since the last
reset.
Maximum Elevation The highest elevation reached since the last reset.
Minimum Elevation The lowest elevation reached since the last reset.
Total Ascent The total elevation distance ascended since the last reset.
Total Descent The total elevation distance descended since the last reset.
Floors Fields
Name Description
Floors Climbed The total number of floors climbed up for the day.
Floors Descended The total number of floors climbed down for the day.
Floors per Minute The number of floors climbed up per minute.
Appendix 185
Gears
Name Description
Di2 Battery The remaining battery power of a Di2 sensor.
eBike Battery The remaining battery power of an ebike.
eBike Range The estimated remaining distance the ebike can provide assistance.
Front The front bike gear from a gear position sensor.
Gear Battery The battery status of a gear position sensor.
Gear Combo The current gear combination from a gear position sensor.
Gears The front and rear bike gears from a gear position sensor.
Gear Ratio The number of teeth on the front and rear bike gears, as detected by a gear position sensor.
Rear The rear bike gear from a gear position sensor.
Graphical
Name Description
Cadence Gauge Running. A color gauge showing your current cadence range.
Compass Gauge The direction you are moving based on the compass.
GCT Balance Gauge
A color gauge showing the left/right balance of ground contact time while
running.
Ground Contact Time Gauge
A color gauge showing the amount of time in each step that you spend on the
ground while running, measured in milliseconds.
Heart Rate Gauge A color gauge showing your current heart rate zone.
Heart Rate Zones Ratio A color gauge showing the ratio of time spent in each heart rate zone.
PacePro Gauge Running. Your current split pace and your target split pace.
Power Gauge A color gauge showing your current power zone.
Stamina Gauge (Dist.) A gauge showing your current stamina distance remaining.
Stamina Gauge (Time) A gauge showing your current stamina time remaining.
Total Ascent/Descent
Gauge
The total elevation distances ascended and descended during the activity or
since the last reset.
Training Effect Gauge The impact of the current activity on your aerobic and anaerobic fitness levels.
Vertical Oscillation Gauge A color gauge showing the amount of bounce while you are running.
Vertical Ratio Gauge A color gauge showing the ratio of vertical oscillation to stride length.
186 Appendix
Heart Rate Fields
Name Description
% Heart Rate Reserve
The percentage of heart rate reserve (maximum heart rate minus resting heart
rate).
Aerobic Training Effect The impact of the current activity on your aerobic fitness level.
Anaerobic Training Effect The impact of the current activity on your anaerobic fitness level.
Average % Heart Rate
Reserve
The average percentage of heart rate reserve (maximum heart rate minus
resting heart rate) for the current activity.
Average Heart Rate The average heart rate for the current activity.
Average Heart Rate %Max. The average percentage of maximum heart rate for the current activity.
Heart Rate
Your heart rate in beats per minute (bpm). Your device must have wrist-based
heart rate or be connected to a compatible heart rate monitor.
Heart Rate %Max. The percentage of maximum heart rate.
Heart Rate Zone
The current range of your heart rate (1 to 5). The default zones are based on
your user profile and maximum heart rate (220 minus your age).
Interval Average %HRR
The average percentage of heart rate reserve (maximum heart rate minus
resting heart rate) for the current swim interval.
Interval Average %Max. The average percentage of maximum heart rate for the current swim interval.
Interval Average Heart Rate The average heart rate for the current swim interval.
Interval Maximum %HRR
The maximum percentage of heart rate reserve (maximum heart rate minus
resting heart rate) for the current swim interval.
Interval Maximum %Max. The maximum percentage of maximum heart rate for the current swim interval.
Interval Maximum Heart
Rate
The maximum heart rate for the current swim interval.
Lap % Heart Rate Reserve
The average percentage of heart rate reserve (maximum heart rate minus
resting heart rate) for the current lap.
Lap Heart Rate The average heart rate for the current lap.
Lap Heart Rate %Max. The average percentage of maximum heart rate for the current lap.
Last Lap %HRR
The average percentage of heart rate reserve (maximum heart rate minus
resting heart rate) for the last completed lap.
Last Lap Heart Rate The average heart rate for the last completed lap.
Last Lap Heart Rate %Max. The average percentage of maximum heart rate for the last completed lap.
Time in Zone The time elapsed in each heart rate zone.
Lengths Fields
Name Description
Interval Lengths The number of pool lengths completed during the current interval.
Lengths The number of pool lengths completed during the current activity.
Appendix 187
Muscle Oxygen Fields
Name Description
Muscle O2 Saturation % The estimated muscle oxygen saturation percentage for the current activity.
Total Hemoglobin The estimated total hemoglobin concentration in the muscle.
Navigation Fields
Name Description
Bearing
The direction from your current location to a destination. You must be navigating for this
data to appear.
Course
The direction from your starting location to a destination. Course can be viewed as a
planned or set route. You must be navigating for this data to appear.
Destination Location The position of your final destination.
Destination
Waypoint
The last point on the route to the destination. You must be navigating for this data to
appear.
Distance Remaining
The remaining distance to the final destination. You must be navigating for this data to
appear.
Distance To Next
The remaining distance to the next waypoint on the route. You must be navigating for
this data to appear.
Estimated Total
Distance
The estimated distance from the start to the final destination. You must be navigating
for this data to appear.
ETA
The estimated time of day when you will reach the final destination (adjusted to the
local time of the destination). You must be navigating for this data to appear.
ETA at Next
The estimated time of day when you will reach the next waypoint on the route (adjusted
to the local time of the waypoint). You must be navigating for this data to appear.
ETE
The estimated time remaining until you reach the final destination. You must be navi
gating for this data to appear.
Glide Ratio to Desti
nation
The glide ratio required to descend from your current position to the destination
elevation. You must be navigating for this data to appear.
Lat/Lon
The current position in latitude and longitude regardless of the selected position format
setting.
Location The current position using the selected position format setting.
Next Fork The distance to the next fork on a trail.
Next Waypoint The next point on the route. You must be navigating for this data to appear.
Off Course
The distance to the left or right by which you have strayed from the original path of
travel. You must be navigating for this data to appear.
Time to Next
The estimated time remaining before you reach the next waypoint in the route. You must
be navigating for this data to appear.
Velocity Made Good
The speed at which you are closing on a destination along a route. You must be navi
gating for this data to appear.
188 Appendix
Name Description
Vertical Dist. to
Dest.
The elevation distance between your current position and the final destination. You
must be navigating for this data to appear.
Vertical Speed to
Target
The rate of ascent or descent to a predetermined altitude. You must be navigating for
this data to appear.
Other Fields
Name Description
Active Calories The calories burned during the activity.
Ambient Pressure The uncalibrated environmental pressure.
Barometric Pressure The current calibrated environmental pressure.
Battery Hours The number of hours remaining before the battery power is depleted.
Battery Percentage The percentage of the battery power remaining.
COG
The actual direction of travel, regardless of the course steered and temporary varia
tions in heading.
Distance to Start Line
The remaining distance to the race starting line. You must be navigating for this data
to appear.
Flow
The measurement of how consistently you maintain speed and smoothness through
turns in the current activity.
GPS The strength of the GPS satellite signal.
Grit
The measurement of difficulty for the current activity based on elevation, gradient,
and rapid changes in direction.
Lap Flow The overall flow score for the current lap.
Lap Grit The overall grit score for the current lap.
Laps The number of laps completed for the current activity.
Last Round Reps The number of repetitions in the last round of the activity.
Lift The amount of lift time during a sailing activity.
Load
The training load for the current activity. Training load is the amount of excess post-
exercise oxygen consumption (EPOC), which indicates the strenuousness of your
workout.
Performance Condition The performance condition score is a real-time assessment of your ability to perform.
Reps During a gym activity, the number of repetitions in a workout set.
Respiration Rate Your respiration rate in breaths per minute (brpm).
Rounds The number of exercise groups performed in an activity, such as jump rope.
Runs The number of runs for the activity.
Steps The number of steps taken during the current activity.
Stress Your current stress level.
Appendix 189
Name Description
Sunrise The time of sunrise based on your GPS position.
Sunset The time of sunset based on your GPS position.
Tack Assist A gauge to help you determine if your boat is being lifted or headed.
Time of Day
The time of day based on your current location and time settings (format, time zone,
daylight saving time).
Time of Day (Seconds) The time of day including seconds.
Total Calories The amount of total calories burned for the day.
Pace Fields
Name Description
500m Pace The current rowing pace per 500 meters.
Average 500m Pace The average rowing pace per 500meters for the current activity.
Average Pace The average pace for the current activity.
Grade Adjusted Pace The average pace adjusted by the steepness of the terrain.
Interval Pace The average pace for the current interval.
Lap 500m Pace The average rowing pace per 500meters for the current lap.
Lap Pace The average pace for the current lap.
Last Lap 500m Pace The average rowing pace per 500meters for the last lap.
Last Lap Pace The average pace for the last completed lap.
Last Length Pace The average pace for your last completed pool length.
Pace The current pace.
PacePro Fields
Name Description
Next Split Distance Running. The total distance of the next split.
Next Split Target Pace Running. The target pace for the next split.
Split Distance Running. The total distance of the current split.
Split Distance Remaining Running. The remaining distance of the current split.
Split Pace Running. The pace for the current split.
Split Target Pace Running. The target pace for the current split.
190 Appendix
Power Fields
Name Description
% Functional Threshold
Power
The current power output as a percentage of functional threshold power.
3s Balance The 3-second moving average of the left/right power balance.
3s Power The 3-second moving average of power output.
10s Balance The 10-second moving average of the left/right power balance.
10s Power The 10-second moving average of power output.
30s Balance The 30-second moving average of the left/right power balance.
30s Power The 30-second moving average of power output.
Average Balance The average left/right power balance for the current activity.
Average Left Power Phase The average power phase angle for the left leg for the current activity.
Average Power The average power output for the current activity.
Average Right Power Phase The average power phase angle for the right leg for the current activity.
Avg. Left Peak Power Phase The average power phase peak angle for the left leg for the current activity.
Avg. Platform Center Offset The average platform center offset for the current activity.
Avg. Right Peak Power
Phase
The average power phase peak angle for the right leg for the current activity.
Balance The current left/right power balance.
Intensity Factor The Intensity Factor
™
for the current activity.
Lap Balance The average left/right power balance for the current lap.
Lap Left Peak Power Phase The average power phase peak angle for the left leg for the current lap.
Lap Left Power Phase The average power phase angle for the left leg for the current lap.
Lap Normalized Power The average Normalized Power
™
for the current lap.
Lap Platform Center Offset The average platform center offset for the current lap.
Lap Power The average power output for the current lap.
Lap Right Peak Power
Phase
The average power phase peak angle for the right leg for the current lap.
Lap Right Power Phase The average power phase angle for the right leg for the current lap.
Last Lap Max. Power The top power output for the last completed lap.
Last Lap Normalized Power The average Normalized Power for the last completed lap.
Last Lap Power The average power output for the last completed lap.
Left Peak Power Phase
The current power phase peak angle for the left leg. Power phase peak is the
angle range over which the rider produces the peak portion of the driving force.
Left Power Phase
The current power phase angle for the left leg. Power phase is the pedal stroke
region where positive power is produced.
Appendix 191
Name Description
Maximum Lap Power The top power output for the current lap.
Maximum Power The top power output for the current activity.
Normalized Power The Normalized Power for the current activity.
Pedal Smoothness
The measurement of how evenly a rider is applying force to the pedals
throughout each pedal stroke.
Platform Center Offset
The platform center offset. Platform center offset is the location on the pedal
platform where force is applied.
Power
The current power output in watts. For skiing activities, your device must be
connected to a compatible heart rate monitor.
Power to Weight The current power measured in watts per kilogram.
Power Zone The current range of power output based on your FTP or custom settings.
Right Peak Power Phase
The current power phase peak angle for the right leg. Power phase peak is the
angle range over which the rider produces the peak portion of the driving force.
Right Power Phase
The current power phase angle for the right leg. Power phase is the pedal stroke
region where positive power is produced.
Time in Zone The time elapsed in each power zone.
Time Seated The time spent seated while pedaling for the current activity.
Time Seated Lap The time spent seated while pedaling for the current lap.
Time Standing The time spent standing while pedaling for the current activity.
Time Standing Lap The time spent standing while pedaling for the current lap.
Training Stress Score The Training Stress Score
™
for the current activity.
Torque Efficiency The measurement of how efficiently a rider is pedaling.
Work The accumulated work performed (power output) in kilojoules.
Rest Fields
Name Description
Repeat On The timer for the last interval plus the current rest (pool swimming).
Rest Timer The timer for the current rest (pool swimming).
192 Appendix
Run Dynamics
Name Description
Average GCT Balance The average ground contact time balance for the current session.
Average Ground Contact
Time
The average amount of ground contact time for the current activity.
Average Stride Length The average stride length for the current session.
Average Vertical Oscilla
tion
The average amount of vertical oscillation for the current activity.
Average Vertical Ratio The average ratio of vertical oscillation to stride length for the current session.
GCT Balance The left/right balance of ground contact time while running.
Ground Contact Time
The amount of time in each step that you spend on the ground while running,
measured in milliseconds. Ground contact time is not calculated while walking.
Lap GCT Balance The average ground contact time balance for the current lap.
Lap Ground Contact Time The average amount of ground contact time for the current lap.
Lap Stride Length The average stride length for the current lap.
Lap Vertical Oscillation The average amount of vertical oscillation for the current lap.
Lap Vertical Ratio The average ratio of vertical oscillation to stride length for the current lap.
Stride Length The length of your stride from one footfall to the next, measured in meters.
Vertical Oscillation
The amount of bounce while you are running. The vertical motion of your torso,
measured in centimeters for each step.
Vertical Ratio The ratio of vertical oscillation to stride length.
Appendix 193
Speed Fields
Name Description
Average Moving Speed The average speed when moving for the current activity.
Average Overall Speed The average speed for the current activity, including both moving and stopped speeds.
Average Speed The average speed for the current activity.
Avg. SOG
The average speed of travel for the current activity, regardless of the course steered
and temporary variations in heading.
Lap SOG
The average speed of travel for the current lap, regardless of the course steered and
temporary variations in heading.
Lap Speed The average speed for the current lap.
Last Lap SOG
The average speed of travel for the last completed lap, regardless of the course
steered and temporary variations in heading.
Last Lap Speed The average speed for the last completed lap.
Maximum SOG
The maximum speed of travel for the current activity, regardless of the course steered
and temporary variations in heading.
Maximum Speed The top speed for the current activity.
Speed The current rate of travel.
Speed Over Ground
The actual speed of travel, regardless of the course steered and temporary variations
in heading.
Vertical Speed The rate of ascent or descent over time.
Stamina Fields
Name Description
Stamina The current remaining stamina.
Distance Remaining The current stamina distance remaining at the current effort.
Stamina Potential The remaining potential stamina.
Time Remaining The current stamina time remaining at the current effort.
194 Appendix
Stroke Fields
Name Description
Average Distance Per Stroke Swimming. The average distance traveled per stroke during the current activity.
Average Distance Per Stroke
Paddle sports. The average distance traveled per stroke during the current
activity.
Average Stroke Rate
Paddle sports. The average number of strokes per minute (spm) during the
current activity.
Average Strokes Per Length The average number of strokes per pool length during the current activity.
Distance Per Stroke Paddle sports. The distance traveled per stroke.
Interval Stroke Rate The average number of strokes per minute (spm) during the current interval.
Interval Strokes Per Length The average number of strokes per pool length during the current interval.
Interval Stroke Type The current stroke type for the interval.
Lap Distance Per Stroke Swimming. The average distance traveled per stroke during the current lap.
Lap Distance Per Stroke Paddle sports. The average distance traveled per stroke during the current lap.
Lap Stroke Rate
Swimming. The average number of strokes per minute (spm) during the current
lap.
Lap Stroke Rate
Paddle sports. The average number of strokes per minute (spm) during the
current lap.
Lap Strokes Swimming. The total number of strokes for the current lap.
Lap Strokes Paddle sports. The total number of strokes for the current lap.
Last Lap Distance Per Stroke
Swimming. The average distance traveled per stroke during the last completed
lap.
Last Lap Distance Per Stroke
Paddle sports. The average distance traveled per stroke during the last
completed lap.
Last Lap Stroke Rate
Swimming. The average number of strokes per minute (spm) during the last
completed lap.
Last Lap Stroke Rate
Paddle sports. The average number of strokes per minute (spm) during the last
completed lap.
Last Lap Strokes Swimming. The total number of strokes for the last completed lap.
Last Lap Strokes Paddle sports. The total number of strokes for the last completed lap.
Last Length Stroke Rate
The average number strokes per minute (spm) during the last completed pool
length.
Last Length Strokes The total number of strokes for the last completed pool length.
Last Length Stroke Type The stroke type used during the last completed pool length.
Stroke Rate Swimming. The number of strokes per minute (spm).
Stroke Rate Paddle sports. The number of strokes per minute (spm).
Strokes Swimming. The total number of strokes for the current activity.
Appendix 195
Name Description
Strokes Paddle sports. The total number of strokes for the current activity.
Swolf Fields
Name Description
Average Swolf
The average swolf score for the current activity. Your swolf score is the sum of the time for
one length plus the number of strokes for that length (Swim Terminology, page45). In open
water swimming, 25 meters is used to calculate your swolf score.
Interval Swolf The average swolf score for the current interval.
Lap Swolf The swolf score for the current lap.
Last Lap Swolf The swolf score for the last completed lap.
Last Length Swolf The swolf score for the last completed pool length.
Temperature Fields
Name Description
24-Hour Maximum
The maximum temperature recorded in the last 24hours from a compatible temperature
sensor.
24-Hour Minimum
The minimum temperature recorded in the last 24hours from a compatible temperature
sensor.
Temperature
The temperature of the air. Your body temperature affects the temperature sensor. You
can pair a tempe sensor with your device to provide a consistent source of accurate
temperature data.
196 Appendix
Timer Fields
Name Description
Active Time The total time of active movement for the current activity.
Average Lap Time The average lap time for the current activity.
Elapsed Time
The total time recorded. For example, if you start the activity timer and run for 10
minutes, then stop the timer for 5 minutes, then start the timer and run for 20 minutes,
your elapsed time is 35 minutes.
Interval Time The stopwatch time for the current interval.
Lap Time The stopwatch time for the current lap.
Last Lap Time The stopwatch time for the last completed lap.
Moving Time The total time moving for the current activity.
Multisport Time The total time for all sports in a multisport activity, including transitions.
Overall Ahead/Behind The overall time ahead or behind of the target pace or speed.
Race Timer The time elapsed in the current sail race.
Set Timer During a strength training activity, the amount of time spent in the current workout set.
Stopped Time The total time stopped for the current activity.
Swim Time The swimming time for the current activity, not including rest time.
Timer The current time of the activity timer.
Workout Fields
Name Description
Repetition The number of repetitions remaining for the workout.
Step Distance The current distance traveled during the workout step.
Step Pace The current pace during the workout step.
Step Speed The current speed during the workout step.
Step Time The time elapsed for the workout step.
Appendix 197
Color Gauges and Running Dynamics Data
The running dynamics screens display a color gauge for the primary metric. You can display cadence, vertical
oscillation, ground contact time, ground contact time balance, or vertical ratio as the primary metric. The color
gauge shows you how your running dynamics data compare to those of other runners. The color zones are
based on percentiles.
Garmin has researched many runners of all different levels. The data values in the red or orange zones are
typical for less experienced or slower runners. The data values in the green, blue, or purple zones are typical
for more experienced or faster runners. More experienced runners tend to exhibit shorter ground contact times,
lower vertical oscillation, lower vertical ratio, and higher cadence than less experienced runners. However, taller
runners typically have slightly slower cadences, longer strides, and slightly higher vertical oscillation. Vertical
ratio is your vertical oscillation divided by stride length. It is not correlated with height.
Go to garmin.com/runningdynamics for more information on running dynamics. For additional theories and
interpretations of running dynamics data, you can search reputable running publications and websites.
Color Zone Percentile in Zone Cadence Range Ground Contact Time Range
Purple
>95 >183spm <218ms
Blue
70–95 174–183spm 218–248ms
Green
30–69 164–173spm 249–277ms
Orange
5–29 153–163spm 278–308ms
Red
<5 <153spm >308ms
Ground Contact Time Balance Data
Ground contact time balance measures your running symmetry and appears as a percentage of your total
ground contact time. For example, 51.3% with an arrow pointing left indicates the runner is spending more time
on the ground when on the left foot. If your data screen displays both numbers, for example 48–52, 48% is the
left foot and 52% is the right foot.
Color Zone
Red Orange Green Orange Red
Symmetry Poor Fair Good Fair Poor
Percent of Other Runners 5% 25% 40% 25% 5%
Ground Contact Time Balance >52.2%L 50.8–52.2%L 50.7%L–50.7%R 50.8–52.2%R >52.2%R
While developing and testing running dynamics, the Garmin team found correlations between injuries and
greater imbalances with certain runners. For many runners, ground contact time balance tends to deviate
further from 50–50 when running up or down hills. Most running coaches agree that a symmetrical running
form is good. Elite runners tend to have quick and balanced strides.
You can watch the gauge or data field during your run or view the summary on your Garmin Connect account
after your run. As with the other running dynamics data, ground contact time balance is a quantitative
measurement to help you learn about your running form.
198 Appendix
Vertical Oscillation and Vertical Ratio Data
The data ranges for vertical oscillation and vertical ratio are slightly different depending on the sensor and
whether it is positioned at the chest (HRM-Fit or HRM-Pro series accessories) or at the waist (Running
Dynamics Pod accessory).
Color Zone
Percentile in
Zone
Vertical Oscillation
Range at Chest
Vertical Oscillation
Range at Waist
Vertical Ratio at
Chest
Vertical Ratio at
Waist
Purple
>95 <6.4cm <6.8cm <6.1% <6.5%
Blue
70–95 6.4–8.1cm 6.8–8.9cm 6.1–7.4% 6.5–8.3%
Green
30–69 8.2–9.7cm 9.0–10.9cm 7.5–8.6% 8.4–10.0%
Orange
5–29 9.8–11.5cm 11.0–13.0cm 8.7–10.1% 10.1–11.9%
Red
<5 >11.5cm >13.0cm >10.1% >11.9%
VO2 Max. Standard Ratings
These tables include standardized classifications for VO2 max. estimates by age and sex.
Males Percentile 20–29 30–39 40–49 50–59 60–69 70–79
Superior 95 55.4 54 52.5 48.9 45.7 42.1
Excellent 80 51.1 48.3 46.4 43.4 39.5 36.7
Good 60 45.4 44 42.4 39.2 35.5 32.3
Fair 40 41.7 40.5 38.5 35.6 32.3 29.4
Poor 0–40 <41.7 <40.5 <38.5 <35.6 <32.3 <29.4
Females Percentile 20–29 30–39 40–49 50–59 60–69 70–79
Superior 95 49.6 47.4 45.3 41.1 37.8 36.7
Excellent 80 43.9 42.4 39.7 36.7 33 30.9
Good 60 39.5 37.8 36.3 33 30 28.1
Fair 40 36.1 34.4 33 30.1 27.5 25.9
Poor 0–40 <36.1 <34.4 <33 <30.1 <27.5 <25.9
Data reprinted with permission from The Cooper Institute. For more information, go to www.CooperInstitute.org.
Appendix 199
FTP Ratings
These tables include classifications for functional threshold power (FTP) estimates by sex.
Males Watts per Kilogram (W/kg)
Superior 5.05 and greater
Excellent From 3.93 to 5.04
Good From 2.79 to 3.92
Fair From 2.23 to 2.78
Untrained Less than 2.23
Females Watts per Kilogram (W/kg)
Superior 4.30 and greater
Excellent From 3.33 to 4.29
Good From 2.36 to 3.32
Fair From 1.90 to 2.35
Untrained Less than 1.90
FTP ratings are based on research by Hunter Allen and Andrew Coggan, PhD, Training and Racing with a Power
Meter (Boulder, CO: VeloPress, 2010).
200 Appendix
Endurance Score Ratings
These tables include classifications for endurance score estimates by age and sex.
Males Recreational Intermediate Trained Well Trained Expert Superior Elite
18-20 Less than 4999 5000-5699 5700-6299 6300-6999 7000-7599 7600-8299
8300 and
greater
21-39 Less than 5099 5100-5799 5800-6599 6600-7299 7300-8099 8100-8799
8800 and
greater
40-44 Less than 5099 5100-5799 5800-6499 6500-7199 7200-7899 7900-8599
8600 and
greater
45-49 Less than 4999 5000-5699 5700-6399 6400-6999 7000-7699 7700-8399
8400 and
greater
50-54 Less than 4899 4900-5499 5500-6099 6100-6799 6800-7399 7400-7999
8000 and
greater
55-59 Less than 4599 4600-5099 5100-5699 5700-6199 6200-6799 6800-7299
7300 and
greater
60-64 Less than 4299 4300-4799 4800-5299 5300-5699 5700-6199 6200-6699
6700 and
greater
65-69 Less than 4099 4100-4499 4500-4899 4900-5399 5400-5799 5800-6199
6200 and
greater
70-74 Less than 3799 3800-4199 4200-4599 4600-4899 4900-5299 5300-5699
5700 and
greater
75-80 Less than 3599 3600-3899 3900-4299 4300-4599 4600-4999 5000-5299
5300 and
greater
80 and
older
Less than 3299 3300-3599 3600-3999 4000-4299 4300-4699 4700-4999
5000 and
greater
Appendix 201
Females Recreational Intermediate Trained Well Trained Expert Superior Elite
18-20 Less than 4599 4600-5099 5100-5499 5500-5999 6000-6399 6400-6899
6900 and
greater
21-39 Less than 4699 4700-5199 5200-5699 5700-6299 6300-6799 6800-7299
7300 and
greater
40-44 Less than 4699 4700-5199 5200-5699 5700-6199 6200-6699 6700-7199
7200 and
greater
45-49 Less than 4599 4600-5099 5100-5599 5600-6099 6100-6599 6600-7099
7100 and
greater
50-54 Less than 4499 4500-4999 5000-5399 5400-5899 5900-6299 6300-6799
6800 and
greater
55-59 Less than 4299 4300-4699 4700-5099 5100-5599 5600-5099 6000-6399
6400 and
greater
60-64 Less than 4099 4100-4499 4500-4899 4900-5299 5300-5699 5700-6099
6100 and
greater
65-69 Less than 3799 3800-4199 4200-4599 4600-4899 4900-5299 5300-5699
5700 and
greater
70-74 Less than 3699 3700-4099 4100-4399 4400-4799 4800-5099 5100-5499
5500 and
greater
75-80 Less than 3499 3500-3799 3800-4199 4200-4499 4500-4899 4900-5199
5200 and
greater
80 and
older
Less than 3199 3200-3499 3500-3799 3800-4099 4100-4399 4400-4699
4700 and
greater
These estimates are provided and supported by Firstbeat Analytics.
Wheel Size and Circumference
Your speed sensor automatically detects your wheel size. If necessary, you can manually enter your wheel
circumference in the speed sensor settings.
The tire size is marked on both sides of the tire. You can measure the circumference of your wheel or use one of
the calculators available on the internet.
support.garmin.com
GUID-9183E86B-2399-4CFC-AB50-EAFC6D6ED326
v5
July 2025
